08 accessories thorlabs by Axxis ecuador

A Bit About Us

Face Value Abroad Thorlabs’ Face Value dog mascot stands to remind our employees and customers alike that “what you see is what you get.” As a customer-centric organization, Thorlabs is dedicated to providing a transparent and user-friendly interface through which customers can interact, providing feedback and new product ideas. As a reminder of our focus, Face Value was even made into a stuffed animal that can be spotted at various tradeshows and conferences across the life science and photonics industry.

Catching Some Rays in Halkidiki, Greece

However, just like our employees, Face Value is up for a bit of fun when he isn’t working. If he is lucky, sometimes our employees and customers take him along on vacation!

Warming Up After a Long Day of Skiing in Zillertal, Austria

Enjoying the View atop a Mountain in the Bavarian Alps

384

Face Value Traveled from Germany to the US this Summer, Visiting Rockefeller Center in NYC (top), the Sequoia National Park in California in Arizona (middle), and the Grand Canyon National Park (bottom)

Do you have a Face Value adventure to share? Submit your photos to FaceValue@thorlabs.com and look for your photo in the next catalog.

Accessories Selection Guide Microscope Components

Illumination Sources

Pages 386 - 389

Pages 480 - 521

Optomechanics

Light Detection

Pages 390 - 409

Pages 522 - 537

Microscope Objectives

Alignment Tools

Pages 410 - 415

Pages 538 - 541

Targets and Reticles

Laser Safety

Pages 416 - 433

Pages 542 - 561

Optical Components

Lab Supplies

Pages 434 - 455

Pages 562 - 567

Adaptive Optics Pages 456 - 479

385

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

T-Scopes (Thorlabs Microscopes) Features

TSCOPE

n Top Port is Focus Adjustable and Compatible with C-Mount- or SM1-Threaded Viewing Accessories n Focus Block Provides 30 mm of Travel Along Optical Axis with Fine and Coarse Knobs n Five-Objective Turret with M26 x 0.706 Threading n Includes Five Adapters for RMS-Threaded Objectives n Motorized Version Includes Software and GUI Included M26 x 0.706 to RMS Adapters for Objective Turret

Thorlabs’ T-Scopes are microscope bodies that are designed to be easy to both operate and modify. They are ideal components of home-built systems that require widefield or brightfield imaging modalities. A T-Scope consists of four primary parts: the top port, used for viewing accessories; a tube lens; a focus block, which positions the objective at the correct working distance; and a 5-position objective turret. Top Port for Widefield Viewing Accessories This port is equipped with a non-rotating housing that provides 4 mm of fine adjustment along the optical axis, allowing viewing accessories to be positioned precisely at the image plane. The T-Scope ships with a C-Mount thread adapter attached to this housing so that cameras and detectors can be mounted directly. By removing the C-mount adapter, the T-Scope can accept custom optical systems based upon Thorlabs’ SM1 (1.035"-40) thread standard. Tube Lens Designed for Parfocality T-Scopes include an integrated tube lens (Item # ITL200, see page 225) that provides infinity-corrected, parfocal operation in combination with the microscope objectives attached to the turret. Focus Block Our focus blocks come in manual and motorized versions (Item #’s MGZ30 and MGZ30-MOT, respectively; see the following page for details). Both versions have coarse and fine adjustment knobs that translate the objective over a total range of 30 mm. The motorized version incorporates a stepper motor and a built-in encoder that reports the position along the Z axis; software and a user interface are included. Objective Turret The T-Scope’s objective turret can accommodate up to five objectives at once. It directly accepts M26 x 0.706 threaded objectives. For compatibility with RMS-threaded objectives, we also include five M26 x 0.706 to RMS adapters. SPECIFICATIONS ITEM # Z-Axis Travel

TSCOPE (MANUAL MICROSCOPE)

Fine: 225 µm/rev Coarse: 40 mm/rev

Z-Axis Adjustment

TSCOPE-MOT

Incremental Step (Min)

500 nm

50 nm

Shown Mounted on the MP1214 Focus Block Stand with the 1500M-CL Scientific CCD Camera and a Selection of Microscope Objectives (All Sold Separately)

Resolution

2.25 µm

100 nm

ITEM # TSCOPE

PRICE 4,100.00

TSCOPE-MOT $ 6,100.00

386

TSCOPE-MOT (MOTORIZED MICROSCOPE) 30 mm

Mounting*

Ø1.5" Posts

*Posts are not included. Thorlabs recommends the MP1214 Focus Block Stand, shown on the next page.

DESCRIPTION Thorlabs Microscope with Manual Focus Thorlabs Microscope with Motorized Focus

Accessories Microscope Components

T-Scope Focus Block Stand

Optomechanics

The MP1214 T-Scope Focus Block stand consists of Thorlabs’ Ø1.5" Dynamically Damped Post with a specially designed 12" x 14" breadboard. This 3/4" thick breadboard base provides increased vibrational stability for Thorlabs’ T-Scopes and Focus Blocks compared to what would be provided with a standard 1/2" thick aluminum breadboard. Additionally, the base includes side grips and recessed feet for easy lifting and transportation of the stand. The included DP14A Dynamically Damped Post (see www.thorlabs.com for details) provides added stability by further minimizing room vibrations transmitted to the imaging system. ITEM # MP1214

PRICE $ 600.00

DESCRIPTION Stand for T-Scopes and Focus Blocks

Post-Mountable Focus Blocks

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

MP1214

Adaptive Optics

Features

Thorlabs’ Post-Mountable Focus Blocks are the base units upon which home-built imaging systems may be constructed and configured from our standard optomechanics. Available in manual and motorized versions, the Focus Block provides 30 mm of travel along the Z-axis with fine and coarse coaxial adjustment knobs.

Illumination Sources

n Five-Objective

Turret with M26 x 0.706 Threads n Compatible with SM1, SM2, and 30 mm Cage Systems n Includes Adapters for RMS-Threaded Objectives (SM1 and M25 x 0.75 Adapters also Available)

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Each unit includes a five-objective turret with M26 x 0.706 threading. Five adapters are also included for use with RMS-threaded objectives (Item # RMSA7). Additional adapters for other thread standards are available on the next page. An adapter located above the lens turret enables direct integration of 30 mm cage systems, SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) components, and SM2-threaded (2.035"-40) components. The Focus Block is designed to mount directly to a Ø1.5" post as shown to the left or in the T-Scope/ Focus Block Stand combination in the image on the previous page.

MGZ30 Coarse Adjustment Knob Fine Adjustment Knob

Additional Motorized (MGZ30-MOT) Features n Motorized

Z Translation with Encoder that Responds to Automated or Manual Adjustment n USB Powered n Separate Controller Not Required n Software and GUI Included

MGZ30-MOT Stand Sold Separately Above SPECIFICATIONS ITEM #

Manual Focus Block (MGZ30)

Z-Axis Travel

Motorized Focus Block (MGZ30-MOT) 30 mm

M26 x 0.706 Threading (5 Places)

Fine: 225 µm/rev Coarse: 40 mm/rev

Collinear Z-Axis Adjustment Minimal Incremental Step

500 nm

50 nm

Resolution

2.25 µm

100 nm

Mounting*

RMS Adapter (5 Included)

SM2 Thread SM1 Thread

Ø1.5" Posts

*Post sold separately.

ITEM # MGZ30

PRICE 2,275.00

MGZ30-MOT $ 4,275.00

DESCRIPTION Manual Post-Mountable Focus Block

4-40 Tapped Hole

Motorized Post-Mountable Focus Block

387

Accessories Microscope Components

M26 x 36 TPI Adapters for T-Scopes and Focus Blocks These thread adapters facilitate the use of various thread standards with our Post-Mountable Focus Blocks featured on the previous page. The M25A1 is compatible with M26 x 0.706 TPI-threaded objectives, while the SM1A28 is for use with our SM1-compatible (1.035"-40) products. Finally, the RMSA7 (five included with the purchase of the focus blocks) work with RMS-threaded objectives. For our full selection of thread adapters, see pages 404 - 405.

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives

M25A1

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

RMSA7 ITEM # M25A1

PRICE $ 25.00

DESCRIPTION Thread Adapter with M25 x 0.75 Internal Threads and M26 x 0.706 External Threads

RMSA7

$ 19.95

Thread Adapter with RMS Internal and M26 x 0.706 External Threads

SM1A28

Thread Adapter with SM1 Internal and M26 x 0.706 External Threads

19.25

Motorized Microscope Focus Controller Features

Alignment Tools

n Incremental

Step: 100 nm (Minimum) n USB Controlled n Encoded Stepper Motor Drive n Controlled Through ThorImageLS™ Software

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

MFC1 Posts, Post Holders, and CL5 Clamps Included

The MFC1 Motorized Microscope Focus Controller is a compact module enabling motorized focus control of commercial microscopes such as the Upright Nikon Eclipse FN1 to the right. An encoded stepper motor drive ensures repeatable positioning through the fine focus drive of the microscope and provides positional information, even if the fine adjustment is done manually. The motor is capable of adjusting the fine focus continuously across the microscope’s entire adjustment range by engaging the microscope’s fine focus knob. The unit is controlled via USB with Have you our ThorImageLS™ software (see pages 66 - 69), seen our... allowing control of the motor through either a text box Thread entry or a slider adjustment.

Adapters Selection

See Pages 404 - 405 388

MFC1 Focus Controller Mounted on an Upright Nikon Eclipse FN1 Microscope

The motor is easily installed: simply remove the backing on the tape, center the motor over the fine focus knob, and press the motor onto the knob. The base incorporates 1/4" (M6) slots, which can be used to attach the unit to an optical table. The motor’s height is adjustable by loosening the cap screws on the sides of the motor using a 3 mm hex key and sliding the unit up or down along the posts. Four CL5 clamps are included to aid in securing the microscope and to keep it from moving once the MFC1 is attached. ITEM # MFC1

PRICE 1,850.00

DESCRIPTION Motorized Microscope Focus Controller

Accessories Microscope Components

Piezoelectric Z-Axis Objective Stage and Controller Thorlabs’ PFM400-E Piezo Objective Holder is an add-on module for Thorlabs’ Bergamo II multiphoton microscope systems, as well as upright and inverted microscopes from Nikon, Olympus, Leica, and Zeiss. With a piezo-driven flexure-amplification mechanism, the PFM400-E is capable of providing 400 µm of objective travel while in scanning or position-and-hold mode with 0.6 nm open-loop resolution. The monolithic design uses an anti-roll mechanism to limit the straightness error of travel, while a compact, capacitive sensor provides highresolution feedback via the controller. PFM400-E To attach this objective stage to a microscope and to an objective, two adapters are required (sold below). The microscope adapter inserts into the top of the Ø1.34" (Ø34.0 mm) ring and is held in place by an M2.5 clamping screw. Likewise, the objective adapter inserts into the bottom of the ring and is clamped in place by a second M2.5 screw. Currently, Thorlabs offers externally M32-threaded microscope adapters and internally M32-threaded objective adapters below. More adapters will be released in the near future.

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS Piezoelectric Output (SMC Male) Voltage (Software Control)

-30 to 150 V

Voltage (External Input)

Have you seen our...

0 to +10 V DC

Current

150 mA

Noise

<1 mV Peak-to-Peak (10 kHz Bandwidth, No Load)

Typical Piezo Capacitance

1 to 20 µF

Bandwidth

Drive Voltage

Position Feedback (9-Pin D-Type Female) Feedback Transducer Type

Power

100 W

Fuse

PRICE 7,468.01

120 Hz (150 g Load) 300 g (0.66 lbs)

Weight (with Cables, No Accessories Fitted)

1.95 kg (4.30 lbs)

ITEM # PFM400-E

25 ms Typical

Resonant Frequency (± 10%)

Dimensions (X, Y, Z)

147 mm x 66 mm x 210 mm (5.79" x 2.60" x 8.23")

Weight

Settling Time for 1 µm Step

Operating Temperature

General

See Pages 154 - 167

100 nm

Load (Max)

Dimensions (W x D x H)

< 0.05% over Full Travel

Minimum Step Size

Input Power Requirements 85 - 264 VAC

Capacitive

Position Linearity Error

USB 2 Full Speed (12 Mbps) Compatible

Voltage

2 nm

Feedback Transducer Type

2.5 nm

USB Port

400 µm

Resolution

0.6 nm

Resolution (Closed Loop)

0 to 150 V

Travel

Strain Gauge and Capacitive Compatible

Resolution (Open Loop)

Confocal Accessories

STAGE SPECIFICATIONS

4.0 kHz, Digital Closed Loop

10 to 40 °C 8.9" x 5.9" x 0.98" (226 mm x 150 mm x 25 mm) 0.38 kg (0.84 lbs)

DESCRIPTION Piezoelectric Z-Axis Objective Stage and Controller

Threaded Microscope Adapters These brass adapters allow the PFM400-E objective stage featured above to be mounted onto an M32-threaded microscope or an M32-threaded objective to be mounted on the PFM400-E stage. To use the PFM400-E with other microscopes or objectives, please purchase one of our thread adapters by visiting www.thorlabs.com. ITEM # PFMA01

PRICE 88.00

PFMA02

63.00

DESCRIPTION Microscope Adapter with External M32 Threads Objective Adapter with Internal M32 Threads

PFMA01

PFMA02 389

Accessories Microscope Components

Manual Dichroic Filter Wheel

Optomechanics

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles (Shows Filter Wheel Position)

Optical Components

CDFW5

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Light-Tight Design Mounts Five 25.2 mm x 35.6 mm x 1.05 mm Dichroic Filters (See Pages 235 - 240) n Magnetically Coupled Filter Holders n Removable Filter Wheel n Delrin Clamp Flexes to Reduce Stress on Filters and Avoid Damage n 30 mm Cage System Compatible n

Shown with Cover Removed

Thorlabs’ CDFW5 Manual Filter Wheel is designed for use with dichroic filters for fluorescence or wavelength separation applications. The mounting block has four light ports, all of which are oriented at 45° to the plane of the filter. This allows access to both the through and perpendicular light paths. The light-tight filter wheel cover is magnetically coupled and can be easily removed by hand to expose the five filter holders (see image in the upper right). Each magnetically coupled filter holder can be pulled free from the central hub to facilitate removal and replacement of a filter without disassembling or disturbing the setup. By removing one 1/4"-20 (M6) setscrew on the front of the housing as well as loosening the thumbscrew on the back of the housing, the entire wheel can be removed from a fixed cage setup. The filter wheel is equipped with four Ø6 mm holes on each entrance/exit port for 30 mm cage rod compatibility. In addition, these ports have SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) apertures for use with our SM1 lens tube systems (see our website for options). An 8-32 (M4) threaded mounting hole on the bottom of the mounting block allows the wheel to be post mounted.

6 mm Hole 30 mm Cage Cube Compatibility (4 Places)

5.80" (147.3 mm)

Input and Output Ports Located at a 45° Angle to the Filter

The CDFW5 comes with five rectangular filter holders that can be removed without opening the filter wheel or removing it from the setup.

1.60" (40.6 mm)

Visit...

SM1 (1.035"-40) Thread Thru

www.thorlabs.com

To View Our Full Line of Cage System and Lens Tube Components

8-32 (M4) Tap for Post Mounting 2.75" (69.9 mm)

ITEM # CDFW5

METRIC ITEM # CDFW5/M

The filter inserts may be removed without removing the cover.

Locking 4-40 Setscrew for Cage Rod (8 Places)

4.40" (111.8 mm)

390

CDFW5

PRICE

$ 600.00

DESCRIPTION Manual Dichroic Filter Wheel for 30 mm Cage System

Accessories Microscope Components

Light-Tight Filter Wheel

Optomechanics

Features n Light-Tight

Housing Ideal for Low Light Applications n 6 SM1-Threaded Filter Housings Hold Ø1" (25 mm) Filters up to 0.25" (6.4 mm) Thick n 30 mm Cage System and SM1 Lens Tube Compatible n 8-32 and M4 Adapters Included for Mounting to Ø1/2" Posts The LFTW6 Six-Position Light-Tight Filter Wheel is designed for situations where a sensor must be completely isolated from sources of stray light. It is ideal for sensitive measurement systems using a detector such as a PMT.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

LTFW6

Light Detection

8-32 and M4 Adapters Included for Post Mounting

The filter wheel is equipped with six SM1threaded (1.035"-40) filter holders designed to accommodate Ø1" or Ø25 mm plano optics up to 0.25" (6.4 mm) thick. The rotation mechanism is located under a hinged cover, as shown in the photo to the left. It has a knurled edge that is engraved with numbers to identify the filter locations. Once the proper filter is in position, a magnet holds the cover closed. The filter wheel incorporates a spring-loaded detent mechanism at each location to center the filter within the 0.95" (24.1 mm) clear aperture.

Hinged Cover

Filter Position Indicator

Illumination Sources

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

The outer cover has internal SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) input and output apertures surrounded by 4-40 tapped holes for 30 mm cage compatibility. By attaching SM1 lens tubes to both the entrance and exit apertures, an entire system can be made light tight as shown in the image below. Pivoting Light Cover Lifts to Allow Rotation of Filter Wheel Ø3.95" (100.3 mm) Knurled Filter Wheel Ø3.30" (83.8 mm)

SM1 (1.035"-40) Series Internal Thread 0.25" (6.4 mm) Max Filter Thickness Ø0.95" (24.1 mm) Clear Aperture (6 Places)

4-40 Tap (4 Places, Both Sides) for 30 mm Cage Compatibility

1.18" 0.59" (30 mm) (15 mm) 1.18" (30 mm)

SM1 (1.035"-40) Series Internal Thread Front and Rear Ports Back View

0.59" (15 mm)

LTFW6

Front View

Shown with SM1 Lens Tubes and a PDA10DT Detector ITEM # LTFW6

PRICE $ 335.00

DESCRIPTION Light-Tight Filter Wheel for Six Ø1" Filters

391

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

30 mm Cage-Compatible Fluorescence Filter Cube Features n Prealigns

Fluorescence Filter Sets Within 30 mm Cage Cube n Easily Swap Between Filter Sets Using Additional Inserts (Sold Separately) n Kinematic Design Provides Repeatable Alignment n Compatible with 30 mm Cage and SM1 Lens Tube Systems n Premounted Filter Cubes Available Upon Request

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

MAXIMUM FILTER THICKNESS Excitation

5 mm

Emission

3.5 mm

Dichroic

1.1 mm

DFM

Thorlabs’ DFM Fluorescence Filter Cube is designed to hold a fluorescence filter set (dichroic mirror and excitation and emission filters) in a 30 mm cage-compatible cube for homebuilt microscopy applications. The light-tight filter cube consists of a base and top lid with an insert to hold the filter set. Additional base units (DFMB) and top units (DFMT1) can be purchased separately. The base unit (DFMB) has four SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) ports and contains an M6 tap plus adapters to 8-32 and M4 threading for mounting (see mechanical drawing below). The top with insert (DFMT1) can hold a 25 mm x 36 mm dichroic mirror and two Ø25 mm filters (excitation and emission). It is designed to clamp the dichroic mirror in place using uniform pressure so as to prevent deformation to the mirror. Excitation and emission filters are held using the included SM1RR Retaining Rings. An SM1-tapped (1.035"-40) hole in the top plate’s emission port is oriented at a 3° angle with respect to the face of the bottom of the cube, thereby eliminating unwanted reflections.

DFMT1 DFMT1 Kinematically Mounts to the DFMB Base for Repeatable Alignment

DFMB

1/4"-20 (M6 x 1.0) Tapped Hole for Post Mounting

1.00" (25.4 mm) 4-40 Tap (4 Places) for 30 mm Cage Compatibility

2.15" (54.6 mm) 1.02" (26 mm)

SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads 1.00" (25.4 mm)

392

2.00" (50.8 mm)

1.00" (25.4 mm) 2.00" (50.8 mm)

Accessories Microscope Components

30 mm Cage-Compatible Fluorescence Filter Cube Through an innovative kinematic design, filter sets can easily be swapped without requiring realignment. Additional tops and bases can be purchased separately. To help keep track of your filter sets, spaces are provided on the top to write the specific mirror and filters that are mounted in each cube. By request, the DFM is also available premounted with any of Thorlabs’ Filter Sets (see page 229). Contact Tech Support for details.

Optomechanics

Fluorescence Filter Sets can be Easily Mounted in the DFM Filter Cube (Filters Sold Separately)

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

SM1RR Ø1" Retaining Ring (4 Places) B

Alignment Tools

4-40 Screw (2 Places) Parts A and B are fastened together with two 4-40 captive screws. There are four ports with SM1 threads for Ø1" or Ø25 mm optics. A 25 mm x 36 mm x 1.1 mm rectangular optic can be secured between parts A and B when they are fastened together.

Ø1" (25 mm) Optic

Able to Hold a Rectangular Optic 25.0 mm x 36.0 mm x 1.0 mm

ITEM # DFM*

METRIC ITEM # DFM/M*

DFMB DFMT1*

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

SM1 (1.035"-40) Thread (4 Places)

PRICE $ 295.00

DESCRIPTION Kinematic Fluorescence Filter Cage Cube

DFMB/M

$ 100.00

Kinematic Fluorescence Filter Cage Cube Base

$ 195.00

Kinematic Fluorescence Filter Cage Cube Top

*Includes Two SMIRR Retaining Rings

Have you seen our...

Microscope Filter Cubes ◆ Drop-In Filter Cubes for Many Olympus and Nikon Microscopes ◆ Easily Mount Fluorescence Imaging Filter Sets (Sold Separately): Emission Filter, Excitation Filter, and Dichroic Mirror ◆ Hassle-Free Alignment ◆ Pre-Mounted Filter Cubes Available Upon Request

TLV-U-MF2

Designed for quick mounting, aligning, and swapping of fluorescence imaging filter sets, each cube holds one Fluorescence Filter Set (not included). Our Ø25 mm emission filters, Ø25 mm excitation filters, and 25.2 mm x 35.6 mm dichroic mirrors are sold separately on pages 235 - 240.

See Page 244 for More Details

TLV-TE2000

TLV-QFXL 393

Cuvette Holder with Four Light Ports

Cuvette Not Included

Features n Compatible

with Standard 12.5 mm Square Profile Micro and Macro Cuvettes n Four Light Ports for Fiber and Free Space Applications n Filter Holder for Mounted Ă&#x2DC;1" Filters Included n Interchangeable SMA Collimator Included n Z-Dimension Beam Height: 8.5 mm n SM1 (1.035"-40) and 30 mm Cage Compatible n Post Mountable via 1/4"-20 (M6) Tap

CVH100 Filter Holder, SMA-to-SM1 Fiber Adapter and SM1 End Caps Included

4-40 Tapped Holes for 30 mm Cage Compatibility

Internally

Threaded The CVH100 Cuvette Holder, which includes a Fiber Adapter SM1 Ports and one CVH100-FHâ&#x20AC;&#x2C6;Filter Holder, offers a compact means for performing spectroscopic measurements. Designed to accommodate standard micro and macro cuvettes, the holder can be used in fiber or free space applications. It features four light ports, thereby offering two perpendicular light paths for transmission and fluorescence measurements. Both optical axes and the axis for the post mount have a common crossing intersection point (see illustrations below), which allow the user to rotate the holder while maintaining alignment to the optical axes in free space applications.

Beam Paths through the Cuvette Holder

Side view cross section showing the position of the mechanical axes (red) and an optical axis (blue).

Top view cross section showing ray trace of beam through system and possible signals for spectroscopic measurements.

Application Example: Absorption Spectroscopy CVH100-COL Adapter (See Page 396 for Details)

Absorption Spectroscopy setup, which includes CVH100 Cuvette Holder, OSA201 Optical Spectrum Analyzer, and SLS201 Stabilized Halogen Light Source

OSA201 SLS201 394

(See Page 516)

CVH100

See www.thorlabs.com for Details

Accessories Microscope Components

Cuvette Holder with Four Light Ports The CVH100 cuvette holder ships with a collimating SMA-to-SM1 fiber adapter, allowing the holder to be directly connected to fiber-based light sources, detectors, or spectrometers. The adapter includes a lens that transmits from 380 - 2100 nm.

All four access ports on the cuvette holder are equipped with four 4-40 taps for compatibility with our 30 mm cage systems and a single bore that has internal SM1 (1.035"-40) threading for direct mounting to our lens tubes or other SM1compatible products such as our mounted high-power LEDs (see pages 484 - 508). The cuvette holder can be post mounted using the 1/4"-20 (M6) mounting hole on the bottom of the cuvette holder.

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Post, Cage, and Lens Tube Mounting Options

Filter Holder The CVH100 cuvette holder includes one filter holder designed to house Ø1" mounted filters measuring up to 7 mm in thickness. These filters are typically used to achieve wavelength isolation for incident or emitted radiation. This filter holder is located between the cuvette and one of the ports. Additional CVH100-FH filter holders can be purchased separately.

Outer Cuvette Dimensions Cuvette Types

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

Mounting

ITEM #

Optomechanics

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

CVH100-FH Ø1" Mounted Filter Holder

CVH100

CVH100/M

0.49" x 0.49" x 1.77"

12.5 mm x 12.5 mm x 45 mm

Macro and Micro Cuvettes with 10 mm (0.39") Light Path

Cuvette Z Dimension (Optical Axis Height Above Cuvette Base)

8.5 mm (0.33")

Window Sizes Input (Main Optical Axis)

9 mm x 14 mm (0.35" x 0.55")

Output (Main Optical Axis)

Ø12 mm (Ø0.47")

Side Ports (Secondary Optical Axis)

Ø9 mm (Ø0.35")

Optical In-Line Filter Holder*

Mounted Ø1" (Ø25.4 mm) Filters

Filter Thickness (Max)

7 mm (0.28")

Fiber Port

SMA (Removable)

Collimator Lens

Uncoated B270 Glass

Mounting Main Optical Axis

Sunk SM1 Internal Thread (Optimized for Lens Tubes) 30 mm Cage System SM1 (1.035"-40) Internal Thread

Secondary Optical Axis (90° to Main Axis) Post Mounting Tap

30 mm Cage System 1/4"-20

General Material (Main Body / Collimator) Weight

Aluminum Black Anodized / Stainless Steel 280 g (0.617 lbs)

Dimensions w/o Collimator (W x H x D)**

44 mm x 42 mm x 49 mm (1.73" x 1.65" x 1.93")

Dimensions w/ Collimator (W x H x D)**

44 mm x 42 mm x 60.5 mm (1.73" x 1.65" x 2.38")

* Filters Sold Separately ** Height with Filter Holder: 1.97" (50 mm)

Pricing and Ordering Information Presented on Next Page 395

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics

Cuvette Holder with Four Light Ports When purchasing small volume or window cuvettes, a ‘Z’ dimension is often specified. This ‘Z’ dimension is the length from the bottom of the cuvette to the center of the sample chamber window on the cuvette. The CVH100 is designed such that the beam height is 8.5 mm from the bottom of the cuvette (see illustration to the left).

‘Z’ Dimension

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Visit our website to view our selection of lenses with f=20 mm

Optional SMA-to-SM1 Fiber Adapter with Lens Mount for Collimation (Includes two Spacers and a Retaining Ring)

Cross-Sectional View (Lens Not Included)

Optional SMA-to-SM1 Fiber Adapter with Lens Mount The optional CVH100-COL SMA-toSM1 fiber adapter with lens mount allows the user to mount an unmounted Ø1/2" collimating lens and insert it into the beam path. Use this option to optimize the fiber coupling for specific setups (e.g., for use with large-corediameter multimode fibers or if a coated lens is required). The CVH100-COL ships with 2 spacer rings (6.8 mm and 9.6 mm thick) and a retaining ring.

Sample Window

Light Detection

CVH100-COL

8.5 mm

Small Volume or Window Cuvette

When ordering the CVH100-COL, additional lenses must be purchased. Recommended 20 mm focal length lenses, and the appropriate spacer to be used, are available online. Please note that plano-convex lenses should be mounted with the plano side facing the fiber. ITEM # CVH100

PRICE $ 490.00

CVH100/M

490.00

DESCRIPTION Cuvette Holder for Micro and Macro Cuvettes with Fiber Port Cuvette Holder for Micro and Macro Cuvettes with Fiber Port, Metric

CVH100-COL* $ 88.00 CVH100-FH

SMA-to-SM1 Fiber Adapter with Ø1/2" Lens Mount

54.00

Additional Ø1" Mounted Filter Holder

*Collimation Lens Not Included

Have you seen our...

Optical Spectrum Analyzers

Spectrum of a 1550 nm Laser Diode

◆ Resolve Spectral Characteristics in the 350 - 1100 nm, 600 1700 nm, 1000 - 2600 nm, or 1000 - 5600 nm Range ◆ Resolution: 7.5 GHz (10 pm @ 633 nm; 60 pm @ 1550 nm) ◆ Wavelength Accuracy: <1 pm ◆ Fiber-Coupled or Free-Spaced Input

OSA203B

Thorlabs’ line of Optical Spectrum Analyzers (OSAs) is based on a Fourier Transform Spectrometer design. Advantages of this design include high optical throughput, wide wavelength range, and high spectral resolution.

Peak Power Density and Total Optical Power of the 1550 nm Laser Diode 396

Visit www.thorlabs.com for Details

Accessories Microscope Components

UV Fused Quartz Cuvettes

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

Cuvettes with Stoppers Included

Cuvettes with Caps Included

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Super Micro Cuvette, 100 µL

CV10Q700S

CV10Q3500

Micro Cuvette, 700 µL

Macro Cuvette, 3500 µL

Our UV Fused Quartz Cuvettes are highquality cells designed to hold liquid samples. The UV fused quartz construction allows these cuvettes to be used with UV light at wavelengths as low as 200 nm, as well as with visible and infrared light up to 3 µm. Thorlabs offers cuvettes with either two polished sides, for use in absorption spectroscopy experiments, or four polished sides, for use in fluorescence spectroscopy.

CV10Q3500F-E Enhanced Chemical Resistance Macro Fluorescence Cuvette, 3500 µL

n UV

Fused Quartz Cuvettes for the 200 nm - 3 µm Wavelength Range n Choose from Two or Four Polished Windows n 100 µL, 700 µL, 1400 µL, and 3500 µL Capacities Available n Standard 12.5 mm Square Profile with 10 mm Transmitted Light Path n Teflon® (PTFE) Top Caps Included

The standard 12.5 mm square outside dimension makes these cuvettes compatible with most spectrophotometers as well as our CVH100 cage-compatible cuvette holder. We offer macro, micro, and super micro sizes, each of which is sold in a pack of two. Teflon® (PTFE) dust caps or airtight stoppers are included with each cuvette. All cuvettes are engraved on the outer surface with the Item # and a letter "Q" designating quartz construction and the typical input side. The macro cuvette with four polished sides is also available in an enhanced chemically resistant version. The chemically resistant cuvette is assembled by heating the quartz to a high temperature and then applying pressure to adhere the pieces together. This process eliminates the need for glue, allowing for the use of solution with corrosive properties. ITEM # (with Dust Cap) PRICE CV10Q100 $ 108.00

ITEM # POLISHED (with Airtight Stopperb) PRICE QUANTITY SIDES 2 2 CV10Q100S $ 136.00

90 80 70 100

1000 Wavelength (nm)

TYPE Super Microc

CAPACITY 100 µL

66.00

CV10Q700S

$ 106.00

Micro

700 µL

66.00

CV10Q1400S

$ 106.00

Micro

1400 µL

CV10Q3500

30.00

CV10Q3500S

$ 74.00

Macro

3500 µL

CV10Q100F

192.00

CV10Q100FS

$ 224.00

Super Microc

100 µL

CV10Q700F

136.00

CV10Q700FS

$ 164.00

Micro

700 µL

CV10Q1400F

136.00

CV10Q1400FS

$ 164.00

Micro

1400 µL

CV10Q3500F

76.00

CV10Q3500FS

$ 106.00

Macro

3500 µL

CV10Q3500F-Ea

$ 158.00

Macro

3500 µL

Resistant Cuvette bOur Chemically Resistant Cuvette is Not Currently Sold with an Airtight Stopper

c8.5

5000

The Shaded Region Indicates the Design Wavelength Range

aChemically

Lab Supplies

Transmission of UV Fused Quartz Cuvette

CV10Q1400

Laser Safety

100

CV10Q700

Light Detection Alignment Tools

Features

Transmission (%)

CV10Q100

mm Beam Height, as Measured from the Bottom of the Cuvette

397

Accessories Microscope Components

Microscopy Slide Holder

Optomechanics

Features n Direct

Mounting via Four #6 (M3) Counterbored Holes or on Any Stage with 1/4"-20 (M6) Taps on 2" Centers n Accommodates Glass Slides with Width â&#x2030;Ľ1.73" (44.0 mm) n Compatible Petri Dish Diameters: 1.46" to 1.63" (37.1 mm - 41.4 mm)

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

MAX3SLH

Petri dishes and glass slides can be mounted to motion control stages using the MAX3SLH Microscopy Slide Holder, as shown in the image to the right. Thorlabs created this mount when designing our OTKB Modular Optical Tweezers (see pages 132 - 136 for details). Two sets of mounting holes allow versatility: four #6 (M3) counterbores are compatible with our 3-axis flexure stages, and a set of 1/4" (M6) slots with 2" separation is designed for mounting to most other translation stages, including those with both 2" imperial and 25 mm metric hole patterns. The spring clips rotate to accommodate swapping between petri dishes and glass slides. They are also interchangeable with the SLH1 Microscope Slide Spring Clips on the next page, as they both use 8-32 screws to secure them. ITEM # MAX3SLH

The MAX3SLH Holder can be Mounted Directly to Our 3-Axis Flexure Stage Featured on our Website 3.46" (87.8 mm)

#6 (M3) Counterbored Holes (4 Places)

2.70" (68.6 mm)

PRICE $ 150.00

1.00" (25.4 mm) 1.35" (34.3 mm)

1.00" (25.4 mm) 4.00" (101.6 mm)

DESCRIPTION Microscopy Slide Holder

Have you seen our...

Optical Tweezers Kits

The MAX3SLH Microscopy Slide Holder Described Above is used to Hold Samples for Our Modular Optical Tweezers System

To the left is a fully functional optical tweezers system (OTKB, see page 132) that utilizes Thorlabsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; SM1 lens tube and 30 mm cage systems product lines. They provide all the functionality needed to build a stable imaging system with well-defined and, if necessary, enclosed beam paths. To get started on building a custom imaging system, visit www. thorlabs.com or contact us at techsupport@thorlabs. com for help in selecting components ideal for your application. OTKB Modular Optical Tweezers Kit (Breadboard Not Included)

See Page 132 for Details 398

Accessories Microscope Components

Microscope Slide Spring Clips

Optomechanics

Features n Pair

of Spring Clips Hold Sample Firmly in Place Microscope Slides and Test Targets (See Pages 416 - 433) of Various Sizes n Attaches Directly to Any Stage with 8-32 (M4) Tapped Holes n Dowel Pins Included for Aligning Standard Slides Over the Through Hole in Our XYR1(/M) or XYT1(/M) Translation Stages (See www.thorlabs.com for Details) n Accommodates

Included Dowel Pins (Qt. 3)

SLH1

These steel spring clips, which are ideal for securely holding various sizes of microscope slides and test targets, come with two 8-32 (M4) threaded shoulder screws, each of which has a 3/32" (2.5 mm) hex socket for simple attachment to a variety of stages. Each clip is 2.51" (63.7 mm) long with a 0.20" (5.1 mm) wide tip and can be rotated 360° for easy access to, or positioning of, a slide. The tip of the clip is curved upwards to help prevent damage and facilitate the mounting of slides, while also providing enough holding force to secure it in place. ITEM # SLH1

METRIC ITEM # SLH1/M

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

SLH1 Spring Clips Attached to the XYT1 Translation Stage (See www.thorlabs.com for Details), Holding a Test Target (See Pages 416 - 433) that is Aligned Over the Central Aperture Using the Provided Dowel Pins

PRICE $

Microscope Objectives

DESCRIPTION

40.00

Microscope Slide Spring Clips, 8-32 (M4) Thread, Qty: 2

Have you seen our...

Rigid Stands ◆ Adjustable Vertical Axes up to 250 mm ◆ Full 360 Degrees of Rotation ◆ Suitable for Upright and Inverted Microscopes ◆ Quick-Lock Mechanism for Easy Positioning ◆ Solid Construction for Stable Mounting ◆ Compatible with 66 mm Rails and M6 Optomechanics

MP100

MP150

MP200

MP250

Height: 148.1 – 208.5 mm

Height: 198.1 – 309.3 mm

Height: 248.1 – 410.1 mm

Height: 265.9 – 510.9 mm

These stands provide options and modularity for mounting physiology hardware and specimens into a physiology system. Each stand is available in four different heights and comes with either a simple platform or a holder. They make mounting hardware or specimens into an existing system quick and easy, allowing the user to customize the experimental setup.

See Page 296 for Details 399

Accessories Microscope Components

Test Target Positioning Mount

Optomechanics

Features

Microscope Objectives

n Compatible

with 1" (25.4 mm) to 3" (76.2 mm) Wide Rectangular Optics n Maximum Optic Thickness: 0.12" (3 mm) n 50 mm (1.97") Horizontal Travel and 30 mm (1.18") Vertical Travel n Each Axis Includes a Vernier Scale that Provides 100 µm Resolution n Five Post-Mountable Orientations via Adapter with Five 8-32 (M4) Tapped Holes n Four Nylon-Tipped Setscrews Secure the Optic Within Two Mounting Arms

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

XYFM1

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Thorlabs’ XYFM1(/M) Test Target Positioning Mount allows for quick, stable, and adjustable mounting of 1" (25.4 mm) to 3" (76.2 mm) wide rectangular optics up to 0.12" (3 mm) thick. The mount, which was originally a standard microscope slide holder, was upgraded by Thorlabs to add versatility and ease of use. It is ideal for general applications as well as home-built microscopy systems. Designed for use with our selection of test targets (pages 416 - 433), it is also compatible with our line of optical filters (pages 226 - 245).

Have you seen our... Test Targets

R3L3S6P

Two actuators that have 100 μm vernier scales on the side of the mount allow manual positioning over a 50 mm (1.97") x 30 mm (1.18") area. A square mounting adapter with five 8-32 (M4) tapped holes is provided on the back of the mount to allow for various Ø1/2" post-mountable orientations (see below). The adapter’s position is secured in place by a front-located thumbscrew.

Channel with Lockable Support Arm

Optics are mounted using two support arms, each of which contains two nylon-tipped setscrews that use a 0.05" (1.5 mm) hex key. One support arm is fixed, while a second arm is free to move along a channel. The movable arm can be locked in place using a top-located locking screw with a 5/64" (2 mm) hex. Please note that the chrome pattern at the edge of a test target may be covered when held between the two mounting arms.

Multiple Mounting Orientations R2L2S1P

R1L1S2P

See Pages 416 - 433 400

ITEM #

METRIC ITEM #

XYFM1

XYFM1/M

PRICE $

175.00

DESCRIPTION XY Mount for 1" - 3" Rectangular Optics

Accessories Microscope Components

Four-Position Microscope Slide Holder n Compatible

C4SH01

with Standard Microscope Slides (25 mm × 75 mm) n Secures up to Four Slides and Requires Minimal Slide-to-Slide Focal Adjustments n Highly Versatile and Adaptable for Automated Tissue Analysis on Multiple Slides n Compatible with Most Common Robotic Plate Readers n Designed for Inverted Microscopes

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

The C4SH01 Four-Position Microscope Slide Holder, made from black PEI plastic, allows up to four slides to be mounted into our imaging cytometers (see pages 251 - 254) or on microscope stages. Slides are loaded into the bottom of the tray (see image to the right), ensuring excellent stability and maintaining near parfocality from slide to slide. This slide holder has the external footprint of a standard multiwell plate (127.6 mm × 85.5 mm), allowing it to be easily integrated into existing microscope stages, such as Thorlabs’ MLS203 stage fitted with an MLS203P1 Plate Adapter, as shown below, or an MZS500-E Z-Axis Stage, as shown to the right. It can also be used with robotic plate loaders.

Optomechanics

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

C4SH01 Mounted in Thorlabs’ MZS500-E Z-Axis Stage (See Pages 175 - 176)

Have you seen our...

C4SH01 Slide Holder Mounted on Thorlabs’ MLS203 XY Stage using an MLS203P1 Plate Adapter in an Inverted Microscope System

High-Speed Motorized XY Microscopy Stages

MLS203

See Pages 168 - 171

ITEM # C4SH01

PRICE $ 77.00

DESCRIPTION Four-Position Microscope Slide Holder

401

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

Polaris™ Kinematic Mirror Mounts Thorlabs’ PolarisTM Kinematic Mirror Mounts for Ø1/2" or Ø1" optics provide superior long-term alignment stability. Extensive research, engineering, computer simulation, and testing were done during the design process to determine the materials, components, and design elements that would result in the best performance characteristics. The Polaris design addresses all of the common causes of beam misalignment. These include temperature-induced hysteresis of the mirror position, crosstalk, drift, and backlash. For additional details on these mounts or to see our entire line of Polaris products, please visit our website. 100 TPI Adjuster (3 Places)

Illumination Sources

Flexure Spring Optic Retaining Mechanism

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

1.00" (25.4 mm)

1.00" (25.4 mm) 2.00" (50.8 mm)

Lab Supplies

POLARIS-K1

Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings.

Visit...

3/16"-130 Adjuster Screw 5/64" (2.0 mm) Hex (3 Places)

Flexure Spring Optic Retaining Mechanism 1.00" (25.4 mm)

Ø0.45" (Ø11.4 mm) Clear Aperture Accepts Ø0.50" (Ø12.7 mm) Optics

0.50" (12.7 mm)

1.00" (25.4 mm)

Specifications ITEM # Optic Size

#8 (M4) Counterbored Through Hole (2 Places)

0.25" (6.4 mm)

POLARIS-K05

0.77" (19.5 mm)

Mirror Not Included

POLARIS-K05 POLARIS-K05

POLARIS-K1

Ø1/2" or Ø12.5 mm

Ø1" or Ø25 mm

Optic Thickness (Min)

0.08" (2 mm)

Adjusters (Qty 3) Resolutiona Front Plate Translation (Max) Angular Range

130 TPI

100 TPI

~11 mrad/rev

~7 mrad/rev

5 mm

6 mm

±5°

Beam Deviationb

±4° <2 µrad

Mountingc

#8 (M4) Counterbore

Operating Temperature Range

-30 to 200 °C

aWhen the front plate is parallel to the back plate bAfter 12.5° temperature cycle, the beam returns to within 2 µrad of its original position. Note: this value does not c Ø1/2" mounts come with 8-32 and M4 low-profile cap screws for mounting without obstructing the beam path.

ITEM #

402

1.58" (40.2 mm)

0.72" (18.3 mm) Nominal 0.40" (10.2 mm)

www.thorlabs.com

For Thorlabs’ vast selection of mirrors for use in our kinematic mounts

#8 (M4) Counterbored Through Hole (2 Places)

2.00" (50.8 mm)

Ø0.93" (Ø23.9 mm) Clear Aperture Accepts Ø1.00" (Ø25.0 mm) Optics

PRICE

take into account effects caused by the method at which the Polaris is mounted.

DESCRIPTION

POLARIS-K05

129.00

Polaris™ Ø1/2" Kinematic Mirror Mount

POLARIS-K1

129.00

Polaris™ Ø1" Kinematic Mirror Mount

Accessories

Right-Angle Kinematic Cage Mounts n Provides

±4º Pitch/Yaw SM1Threaded n KCB1: Accepts Ø1" or Ø25 mm Optics Hole (Both n KCB1E: Accepts 1" Elliptical Optics Sides) KCB1 Accepts n Mounts Optics at 45º Angle to the Ø1.0" or Optical Axis Ø25 mm Optics n Compatible with 30 mm Cage Systems and SM1-Threaded (1.035"-40) 100 TPI Adjusters Provide Components ±4° Tip and Tilt Adjustment n Post Mountable via 8-32 Thorlabs’ 30 mm-cage-compatible right(M4)Tap angle kinematic mounts are designed for easy integration into our cage assembly system (available on our website). The KCB1 is Application Idea designed for use with 1" or 25 mm round mirrors, while KCB1E is designed for 1" elliptical mirrors.

SM1 Lens Tube

ER Cage Rods

KCB1

Provides True 90° Beam Steering

ITEM #

Microscope Components

Top-Located 8-32 (M4) Tap for Post Mounting

30 mm Cage Spacing

Microscope Objectives

4-40 Tapped Hole for 30 mm Cage System (8 Places)

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

KCB1E

Accepts 1" Elliptical Optics

The entrance and exit ports of both models are equipped with 4-40 tapped holes and SM1-threaded bores to accommodate ER cage rods and Ø1" lens tubes, respectively. These mounts have three TPI adjusters, allowing for precise mirror alignment, and consequently, accurate alignment of the beam path within a 30 mm cage system.

PRICE

Optomechanics

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

DESCRIPTION

KCB1

139.94

Right-Angle Kinematic 30 mm Cage Mount for Ø1" Optics

KCB1E

220.00

Right-Angle Kinematic 30 mm Cage Mount for 1" Elliptical Optics

Have you seen our...

Full Line of Polaris Mirror Mounts ◆ Mounts for Ø1/2" or Ø1" Mirrors POLARIS-K1PZ Ø1" Mount with Piezo Actuators ◆ SM-Threaded, Low-Distortion, or Piezo Actuated Options ◆ Versions with 2 or 3 Adjusters ◆ Knob- or Hex-Driven Designs ◆ All Fabricated from Low-Outgassing and Vacuum-Compatible Materials ◆ Extensive Testing Guarantees Low Drift and Consistent Performance

POLARIS-K1T8 Ø1" SM1-Threaded Mount

POLARIS-K05F2 Ø1/2" Low Distortion Mount

Visit www.thorlabs.com for More Details 403

Accessories Microscope Components

Thread Adapters

Optomechanics

Thorlabs offer both thermally insulating (SM1A4TS, SM1A9TS, SM1A3TS, and SM1A10TS) and traditional aluminum adapters in the table below.

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

An experiment was conducted to compare the thermal isolation of our thermally insulating adapters with that of our traditional aluminum adapters. During the experiment, an aluminum adapter and a thermally isolating black delrin adapter were each used to connect two lens tubes. Then, one of the lens tubes was externally heated to 60 ºC using a foil heating element that had been attached to that lens tube’s outer surface.

RMSA7 Shown Adapting an Externally RMS-Threaded Objective to an Internally M26 x 0.706-Threaded (36 TPI) Focus Block

Temperature Stability

65 60 55

Temperature readings were recorded in 30 second intervals for both the heated and unheated lens tube in each system. The measured results are shown in the plot to the right. From the graph, it is clearly evident that there is far less heat transfer when using one of our thermally isolating adapters to connect two lens tubes than exists when using an aluminum adapter.

Temperature (ºC)

Microscope Objectives

50 45 40 35 30 25 20

The table below outlines Thorlabs’ optical component adapter offerings. The top row indicates the internal threads of the adapter, while the first column indicates the external threads on the adapter. The cells indicate whether an adapter is available, as well as the appropriate part number.

100

150

200

250

300

Time Elapsed (s) LEGEND Heated SM1 Lens Tube with Aluminum Adapter Unheated SM1 Lens Tube with Aluminum Adapter

Heated SM1 Lens Tube with Delrin Adapter Unheated SM1 Lens Tube with Delrin Adapter

External Threads

Internal Threads SM05

RMS

M25 x 0.75

SM05

—

SM1A1

—

RMS

SM05RMS

—

RMSA2

RMSA6

—

SM1A4 or SM1A4TS

—

RMSA4

RMSA10

—

M25 x 0.75

—

RMSA1

—

SM1A11

—

M32A2

—

C-MOUNT

—

RMSA5

—

SM1A9 or SM1A9TS

—

M25.5 x 0.5

—

SM1A25

—

SM1A6 or SM1A6T

SM1A3 or SM1A3TS

SM1A12

SM1A10 or SM1A10TS

SM1A24

—

SM1A27

SM1A35

SM1A17

SM1A34

—

SM1A2

M26 x 0.706

—

RMSA7

M25A1

—

SM1A28

—

M27 x 0.5

—

SM1A36

—

M27 x 0.75

—

RMSA3

—

SM1A18

—

M32 x 0.75

—

RMSA9

M32A1

—

SM1A33

—

SM2A23

M38 x 0.5

—

SM2

—

SM2A6

—

SM2A22

SM2A20

—

SM1

Reference SM05 = 0.535"-40

404

C-MOUNT

M25.5 x 0.5

SM1

M26 x 0.706

M27 x 0.5

M27 x 0.75

M32 x 0.75

M38 x 0.5

SM2

RMS = 0.800"-36

C-Mount = 1.000"-32

SM1 = 1.035"-40

SM2 = 2.035"-40

Accessories Microscope Components

Thread Adapters ITEM # SM1A6

PROFILE

INTERNAL THREAD SM05 (0.535"-40)

EXTERNAL THREAD SM1 (1.035"-40)

TYPICAL APPLICATION 0.15" Thick, Step Up/Down Lens Tube Size

PRICE $ 18.75

SM1A6T

(0.535"-40) SM05 (0.535"-40)

SM1 (1.035"-40)

0.40" Thick, Step Up/Down Lens Tube Size

19.75

SM05RMS

SM05 (0.535"-40)

RMS (0.800"-36)

Create Objective from Lens Tube

14.75

SM1A3

RMS (0.800"-36)

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Mount RMS Objective to SM1 Lens Tube

16.75

SM1A3TS

RMS (0.800"-36)

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Same as SM1A3 with Thermal Insulation

20.50

RMSA5

RMS (0.800"-36)

C-Mount (1.000"-32)

Mount RMS Objective to Camera

19.00

RMSA3

RMS RMS (0.800"-36) (0.800"-36) RMS (0.800"-36)

M27 x 0.75

Mount RMS Objective in M27 x 0.75 Mount

21.00

RMSA7

M26 x 0.706

Integrate RMS Objective with M26 x 0.706 Mount

19.95

RMSA9

RMS (0.800"-36)

M32 x 0.75

Attach RMS Objective to M32 x 0.75 Mount

22.00

RMSA1

RMS (0.800"-36)

M25 x 0.75

Mate RMS Objective to M25 x 0.75 Mount

19.00

RMSA2

M25 x 0.75

RMS (0.800"-36)

Mate M25 x 0.75 Objective to RMS Mount

22.00

SM1A12

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Mate M25 x 0.75 Objective to SM1 Mount

19.75

M25A1

M25 x 0.75 M25 x 0.75 M25 x 0.75

M26 x .706

Mate M25 x 0.75 Objective to M26 x .706 Mount

25.00

M32A1

M25 x 0.75

SM1A10 SM1A10TS

C-Mount (1.000"-32)

M32 x 0.75

Mate M25 x 0.75 Objective to M32 x 0.75 Mount

22.00

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Mount Camera Lens to SM1 Lens Tube

18.75 20.50

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Same as SM1A10TS with Thermal Insulation

RMSA6

RMS (0.800"-36)

Integrate Camera Lens to Microscope

19.00

SM1A24

M25.5 x 0.5

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Attach M25.5 x 0.5 Filters to SM1 Lens Tube

19.00

SM1A1

SM1 (1.035"-40)

SM05 (0.535"-40)

Step Up/Down Lens Tube Size

19.75

SM1A18

SM1 (1.035"-40)

M27 x 0.75

Create Objective with SM1 Lens Tube

19.75

SM1A25

SM1 (1.035"-40)

M25.5 x 0.5

Attach Filters to Front of MVL Lens

19.00

SM1A28

SM1 (1.035"-40)

M26 x 0.706

Create Objective from SM1 Lens Tube

19.25

SM1A33

SM1 (1.035"-40)

M32 x 0.75

Attach SM1 Lens Tube to M32 x 0.75 Mount

22.00

SM1A36

M27 x 0.5

Attach SM1 Lens Tube to M27 x 0.5 Mount

19.75

SM1A4

SM1 (1.035"-40) SM1 (1.035"-40) SM1 (1.035"-40)

RMS (0.800"-36)

Create Objective from SM1 Lens Tube

23.00

SM1A4TS

SM1 (1.035"-40)

RMS (0.800"-36)

Same as SM1A4 with Thermal Insulation

20.50

SM1A9

SM1 (1.035"-40)

C-Mount (1.000"-32)

Mount a C-Mount Camera Body to an SM1 Lens Tube

18.75

SM1A9TS

SM1 (1.035"-40)

C-Mount (1.000"-32)

Same as SM1A9 with Thermal Insulation

20.50

SM2A6

SM1 (1.035"-40)

SM2 (2.035"-40)

Step Up/Down Lens Tube Size

24.00

M25 x 0.75

Mate SM1 Lens Tube to M25 x 0.75 Mount

19.75

SM1A11 SM1A27

M26 x 0.706

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Attached M26 x 0.706 Objective to SM1 Lens Tube

19.25

SM1A35

M27 x 0.5

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Attach M27 x 0.5 Objective Lens to SM1 Lens Tube

19.75

SM1A17

M27 x 0.75 M27 x 0.75 M27 x 0.75

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Mount M27 x 0.75 Objective to SM1 Lens Tube

19.75

RMSA4

RMS (0.800"-36)

Integrate M27 x 0.75 Objective with RMS Mount

21.00

SM1A34

M32 x 0.75

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Attach M32 x 0.75 Objective to SM1 Lens Tube

22.00

RMSA10

M32 x 0.75 M32 x 0.75 M32 x 0.75

RMS (0.800"-36)

Attach M32 x 0.75 Objective to RMS Mount

22.00

SM2 (2.035"-40)

Attach M32 x 0.75 Objective to SM2 Lens Tube

22.00

M25 x 0.75

Mate M32 x 0.75 Objective to M25 x 0.75 Mount

22.00

SM2A22

M32A2

SM2A20 M38 x 0.5 SM2 (2.035"-40)

Integrate Infinity-Corrected Tube Lens for Plan Fluorite Objective into SM2 Lens Tube

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

$ 45.00

SM1A2

SM2 (2.035"-40)

SM1 (1.035"-40)

Step Up/Down Lens Tube Size

24.00

SM2A23

SM2 (2.035"-40)

M32 x 0.75

Attach SM2 Lens Tube to M32 x 0.75 Mount

22.00

Visit www.thorlabs.com to see our full line of thread adapters

Have you seen our...

Microscope Objectives N100X-PF0 100X Nikon Oil Immersion Objective

RMS4X 4X Olympus Plan Achromat Objective

Thorlabs offers both air and oil immersion designs of Olympus and Nikon visible imaging objectives. Plan achromat and plan fluorite (also called plan semiapochromat or plan fluor) objectives are available. These objectives can be used in applications such as traditional microscopy, confocal imaging, and fiber coupling.

See Page 410 - 413 for Details 405

Accessories Microscope Components

Microscope Port Adapters

Optomechanics

The adapters mate to the reflected light n Compatible Microscopes lamphouse port of current generation • Olympus IX and BX microscope models. Any existing • Nikon Eclipse and Eclipse Ti Mount lamphouse needs to be removed from the • Leica DMI microscope prior to using the adapter. • Zeiss Axioskop The adapters mate to the reflected SM1A44 Nikon Eclipse Ti Camera light lamphouse port of current generation Port Adapter Shown Attaching microscope models. Any existing lamphouse a Thorlabs Hermetically Sealed Scientific Camera (See Page 308) needs to be removed from the microscope with Lens Tube and Cage System Components to the Microscope prior to using the adapter.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

Olympus Microscope Lamphouse Port Adapters

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies SM2A13 External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Black Anodized

LED4A1 External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Silver Anodized

SM2A7

SM1A14

Internal SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Black Anodized

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threading 30 mm Cage Compatibility Black Anodized

Leica Microscope Lamphouse Port Adapters

SM2A14

LED4A2

SM2A8

SM1A21

External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Black Anodized

External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Silver Anodized

Internal SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Black Anodized

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threading 30 mm Cage Compatibility Black Anodized

Nikon Eclipse Microscope Lamphouse Port Adapters

406

SM2A17

LED4A5

SM2A18

SM1A26

External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Black Anodized

External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Silver Anodized

Internal SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Black Anodized

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threading 30 mm Cage Compatibility Black Anodized

Accessories Microscope Components

Microscope Port Adapters

Optomechanics

Zeiss Microscope Lamphouse Port Adapters

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics SM2A16

LED4A4

External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Black Anodized

Olympus BX or IX Camera Port Adapter

External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Silver Anodized

Leica DMI Camera Port Adapter

SM2A10

SM1A23

Internal SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading Black Anodized

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threading 30 mm Cage Compatibility Black Anodized

Nikon Eclipse Ti Epi-Fluorescence Port Adapter

Nikon Eclipse Ti Camera Port Adapter

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

SM1A51

SM1A50

SM1A30

SM1A44

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threading 30 mm Cage Compatibility Black Anodized

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threading External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading 30 mmm Cage Compatibility Black Anodized

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threading 30 mm and 60 mm Cage Compatibility Black Anodized

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threading External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threading 30 mm Cage Compatibility Black Anodized

ITEM # MICROSCOPE SM2A13

ADAPTER TYPE Lamphouse Port

DESCRIPTION External SM2 (2.035"-40), Black Anodized

PRICE $ 88.00

LED4A1 Olympus IX or BX SM2A7

Lamphouse Port

External SM2 (2.035"-40), Silver Anodized

$ 60.00

Lamphouse Port

Internal SM2 (2.035"-40), Black Anodized

$ 88.00

SM1A14

Lamphouse Port

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40), 30 mm Cage Compatibility, Black Anodized

$ 88.00

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40), 30 mm Cage Compatibility, Black Anodized

SM1A51

Camera Port

SM2A14

Lamphouse Port

External SM2 (2.035"-40), Black Anodized

$ 88.00

LED4A2

Lamphouse Port

External SM2 (2.035"-40), Silver Anodized

$ 60.00

SM2A8 Lamphouse Port Leica DMI SM1A21 Lamphouse Port SM1A50 Camera Port

Internal SM2 (2.035"-40), Black Anodized

$ 88.00

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40), 30 mm Cage Compatibility, Black Anodized Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads, External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads, 30 mm Cage Compatibility, Black Anodized

$ 88.00 $ 74.00

77.00

SM2A17

Lamphouse Port

External SM2 (2.035"-40), Black Anodized

$ 101.12

LED4A5 Nikon Eclipse SM2A18

Lamphouse Port

External SM2 (2.035"-40), Silver Anodized

$ 101.12

Lamphouse Port

Internal SM2 (2.035"-40), Black Anodized

$ 110.11

SM1A26

Lamphouse Port

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40), 30 mm Cage Compatibility, Black Anodized

$ 110.11

SM1A30 Nikon Eclipse Ti SM1A44

Fluorescence Port

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40), 30 mm and 60 mm Cage Compatibility, Black Anodized

$ 59.00

Camera Port

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40), External SM2, 30 mm Cage Compatibility, Black Anodized

$ 74.00

SM2A16

Lamphouse Port

External SM2 (2.035"-40), Black Anodized

$ 88.00

LED4A4 Zeiss SM2A10

Lamphouse Port

External SM2 (2.035"-40), Silver Anodized

$ 60.00

Lamphouse Port

Internal SM2 (2.035"-40), Black Anodized

$ 88.00

SM1A23

Lamphouse Port

Internal SM1 (1.035"-40), 30 mm Cage Compatibility, Black Anodized

$ 88.00

407

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives

Rigid Construction Products 1 Cage Systems

Optic Mount

Cage Plate

Cage Cube

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Assembly Rod Rotation Mount Accessory

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Visit our website to view the options

Thorlabs’ cage assembly system provides a convenient way to construct large optomechanical systems with an established line of precision-machined building blocks designed for high-flexibility and accurate alignment. 16 mm, 30 mm, and 60 mm cage system sizes are available with various components including cage cubes, cagecompatible optic mounts, cage plates, assembly rods, and compatible accessories.

2 Lens Tubes Lens tubes are ideal for creating compact or light-tight optical subassemblies. Each lens tube can house multiple optical elements, which are secured and positioned using provided retaining rings. For example, an SM1 lens tube is designed to hold Ø1" (25 mm) optics. Lens tubes are available in a multitude of inner diameters including 1/2", 1", 2", 3", and 30 mm as well as a variety of lengths. Thorlabs’ standard SM-threaded lens tubes have an internal SM-threaded bore with an externally SM-threaded shoulder (as shown in the schematic to the right).

SM1L05

SM05L05

SM1 Threaded (1.035"-40)

SM05 Threaded (0.535"-40)

Internal SM Thread External SM Thread

Retention Lip

3 Rail Systems

Thorlabs’ Bergamo 2 Microscope System is Supported by a 95 mm Rail Extrusion

Optical rail assemblies provide the building blocks necessary for constructing stable, rigid, three-dimensional mechanical assemblies. Rails consist of extruded lengths of aluminum with a dovetail mounting surface that allows rails to be joined to each other, tabletops, or optomechanical assemblies. Accessories offered by Thorlabs include clamps and angle brackets, breadboard mounts, mounting platforms, rail carriages, rail platforms, rotation platforms, size adapters, rail joiners, and lens tube adapters.

4 Optical Posts Optical posts are a basic building block for most rigid constructions. They offer high strength and rigidity for holding and maintaining large applications. Posts are offered in Ø6 mm, Ø12 mm, Ø1/2", Ø1", and Ø1.5". A vast amount of accessories are also available for these posts, including clamping forks, post holders, post clamps, bases, and rail carriers. 408

TR2

RS2P8E

Ø1/2" Post

Ø1" Post

Accessories Microscope Components

Rigid Construction Products Modular Optical Tweezers

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

Our Modular Tweezer Setup Incorporates Numerous Rigid Construction Components

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

Laser Safety

Lab Supplies

Raman Spectrometer 2

409

Accessories Microscope Components

Plan Achromat Objectives

Optomechanics

These infinity-corrected objectives from Olympus offer ultra-wide broadband AR coatings for the visible spectral region. In addition, they have standard RMS RMS10X RMS40X (0.800"-36) threading for compatibility with many of the microscopy and fiber coupling accessories offered by Thorlabs.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

RMS (0.800" x 36) Objective Thread

Length

Parfocal Length 45 mm

These objectives are ideal for imaging applications due to their diffraction-limited Working Distance (WD) performance across the entire visible spectrum. With their high numerical apertures (NA) and large magnifications (M), they are suitable for focusing or collimating laser light. Alternatively, they can be used to focus light to a diffraction-limited spot, thus enabling efficient coupling of monochromatic or broadband light into a waveguide or fiber. Their designation as Plan Achromats indicates that they are flat field and corrected at one color for spherical aberration and two colors for chromatic aberration, leading to better spherical and chromatic corrections and superb field flatness. ITEM # RMS4X

Ma NAb WDc DESCRIPTION 4X 0.10 18.5 mm 4X Olympus Plan Achromat Objective

PRICE 196.00

RMS10X

10X

0.25

10.6 mm

10X Olympus Plan Achromat Objective

388.00

RMS20X

20X

0.40

1.2 mm

20X Olympus Plan Achromat Objective

472.00

RMS40X

40X

0.65

0.6 mm

40X Olympus Plan Achromat Objective

784.00

aMagnification

bNumerical

Aperture

cWorking

Distance

Plan Fluorite Objectives Correction Collar Adjustment

RMS60X-PFC

RMS4X-PF

Thorlabs offers infinity-corrected visible and NIR Plan Fluorite microscope objectives from both Olympus and Nikon. Plan Fluorite objectives are corrected at three to four colors for spherical aberration and two to four colors for chromatic aberration. They are designed to produce flat images across the field of view and are well suited for use in color laser scanning microscopy applications. With high signal-to-noise ratios, excellent resolution, and high contrast imaging, they are also useful in brightfield and Nomarski DIC observations. The rotating correction collar on the RMS60X-PFC can correct for cover glass thickness. The 45 mm parfocal length of our Olympus objectives can be extended to 60 mm using the PL15RMS Parfocal Length Extender featured on page 414. The 60 mm parfocal length of Nikon objectives can be extended using the PL12M25, also featured on page 414. N10X-PF

Olympus Plan Fluorite Objectives, RMS (0.800"-36) Threading ITEM # RMS4X-PF

Ma NAb WDc DESCRIPTION PRICE 4X 0.13 17 mm 4X Plan Fluorite Objective $ 547.00

RMS10X-PF

10X

0.30

10 mm

10X Plan Fluorite Objective

979.00

RMS20X-PF

20X

0.50

2.1 mm

20X Plan Fluorite Objective

1,095.00

RMS40X-PF

40X

0.75

0.51 mm

40X Plan Fluorite Objective

1,272.00

RMS60X-PFC

60X

0.90

0.2 mm

60X Plan Fluorite Objective w/ Correction Collar

3,228.00

aMagnification

bNumerical

Aperture

cWorking

Distance

Nikon Plan Fluorite Objectives, M25 x 0.75 Threading ITEM # N4X-PF

Ma NAb WDc DESCRIPTION 4X 0.13 17.2 mm 4X Plan Fluorite Objective $

N10X-PF

10X

0.30

16 mm

10X Plan Fluorite Objective

785.00

N20X-PF

20X

0.50

2.1 mm

20X Plan Fluorite Objective

870.00

N40X-PF

40X

0.75

0.66 mm

40X Plan Fluorite Objective

991.00

N60X-PF

60X

0.85

0.31 - 0.4 mm

60X Plan Fluorite Objective

2,334.00

N100X-PFO

100X

1.3

100X Oil Immersion Plan Fluorite Objective

2,112.00

aMagnification

410

0.16 mm bNumerical

Aperture

cWorking

Distance

PRICE 432.00

Accessories

Oil Immersion Objectives

Iris Diaphragm Adjustment

Thorlabs offers Oil Immersion objectives from both Olympus and Nikon. All of the objectives have a plan fluorite design with the exception of the RMS100X-O, which is a plan achromat. These RMS100X-O RMS40X-PFO RMS60X-PFOD objectives are designed to provide flat images across the field of view and must be used with a drop of oil placed between the objective and cover glass or image quality will be degraded. The use of oil increases the objectiveâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s NA above 1. The RMS60X-PFOD and RMS100X-PFOD objectives feature a built-in iris diaphragm, which is designed to be partially closed during darkfield microscopy, preserving the darkness of the background in the darkfield observation. This is absolutely necessary for high numerical aperture (above NA = 1.2) oil immersion objectives when using an oil immersion darkfield condenser. For ordinary brightfield observations, the iris diaphragm should be left fully open. The 45 mm parfocal length of our Olympus objectives can be extended to 60 mm using the PL15RMS Parfocal Length Extender featured on page 414. The parfocal length of Nikon objectives can be extended using the PL15M25, also featured on page 414.

Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

N100X-PFO Olympus Oil Immersion Objectives, RMS (0.800"-36) Threading Ma NAb WDc DESCRIPTION 40X 1.3 0.2 mm 40X Oil Immersion Objective

PRICE 5,798.00

RMS60X-PFOD

60X

1.25 - 0.65

0.12 mm

60X Oil Immersion Objective with Iris

3,375.00

RMS100X-PFO

100X

1.3

0.2 mm

100X Oil Immersion Objective

2,644.00

1.3 - 0.55

0.2 mm

100X Oil Immersion Objective with Iris

3,184.00

1.25

0.15 mm

100X Oil Immersion Plan Achromat Objective

1,100.00

ITEM # RMS40X-PFO

RMS100X-PFOD 100X RMS100X-O

100X

aMagnification

bNumerical

Aperture

cWorking

Distance

Nikon Oil Immersion Objective, M25 x 0.75 Threading ITEM # N100X-PFO aMagnification

Ma NAb WDc DESCRIPTION 100X

1.3 bNumerical

0.16 mm Aperture

100X Oil Immersion Plan Fluorite Objective cWorking

PRICE $

2,112.00

Distance

Microscope Immersion Oil Features Designed for Use with Oil Immersion Objectives n Low Auto-Fluorescence for Multiphoton Imaging n 30 mL of Oil in Each Bottle n

The MOIL-30 contains 30 mL of microscope immersion oil ideal for general microscopy. The low auto-fluorescence also makes it ideal for use with multiphoton and other fluorescence imaging microscopes.

MOIL-30 ITEM # MOIL-30

PRICE $ 45.00

DESCRIPTION Immersion Oil, 30 mL

411

Accessories Microscope Components

Multiphoton Physiology Objectives

Optomechanics

Features n Especially

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

N40XLWD-NIR

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

N16XLWD-PF

Suited for Multiphoton Imaging n High Numerical Aperture n Long Working Distance n Wide Transmission and Color Correction Range n Flat Field of View

N20X-PFH

Especially chosen for their applicability to multiphoton microscopy, these water-immersion objectives have a high numerical aperture (NA) as well as a long working distance (WD). They also provide wide transmission and color correction ranges. Nikon objectives with a 60 mm parfocal length can be extended to 75 mm using the PL15M25 Parfocal Length Extender featured on page 414.

TRITC

Alexa 488

Lab Supplies Mouse Embryo Section g-Tubulin Obtained Using Thorlabs’ Multiphoton Microscopy System. Sample Courtesy of Dr. Rieko Ajima, National Cancer Institute, Center for Cancer Research.

Phalloidin Merged

DAPI

20X 1.0 NA W

DNA

WAVELENGTH ITEM # Ma RANGE NAb WDc N16XLWD-PF 16X 380 – 1100 nm 0.80 3.0 mm N20X-PFH

400 – 900 nm

PARFOCAL LENGTH THREADING DESCRIPTION 75 mm M32 x 0.75 Nikon CFI LWD Plan Fluorite Objective

1.00 2.00 mm

75 mm

M25 x 0.75

60 mm

M25 x 0.75

N40X-NIR

40X 380 – 1100 nm 0.80 3.5 mm

60 mm

M25 x 0.75

Nikon CFI APO 40XW NIR Objective

$ 2,318.00

N60X-NIR

60X 380 – 1100 nm 1.00 2.8 mm

60 mm

M25 x 0.75

Nikon CFI APO 60X NIR Objective

$ 3,694.00

bNumerical

Aperture

cWorking

Olympus XLUMPLFLN 20X

Distance

Bergamo II Multiphoton Microscopes ◆ Modular Microscope Configurable for Various Imaging Needs

◆ Galvo-Resonant Scan Path Acquires Video of In Vivo Specimens at up to 400 Frames per Second

◆ Z, XYZ, or XYZ + θ Configurations ◆ PMT Detectors with Extended Fields of View for

Excellent Contrast and Spatial Resolution Available

See Pages 2 – 35

$ 6,706.00

Nikon CFI APO 40XW LWD NIR Objective $ 12,973.00

Have you seen our...

412

PRICE $ 5,533.00

N40XLWD-NIR 40X 360 – 1100 nm 1.15 0.61 mm

aMagnification

20X

N20X-PFH Olympus Objective Shown on a Bergamo II Multiphoton Microscope

Accessories Microscope Components

Reflective Objectives

Optomechanics

Applications Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectroscopy n Thermal Imaging Microscopy n Hyperspectral Imaging n

LMM-40X-UVV

LMM-15X-P01

Thorlabs’ Reflective Microscope Objectives consist of reflective surfaces that focus light without introducing chromatic aberration. They are designed for broadband applications and are offered with one of two coatings: a UV-enhanced aluminum coating for >80% reflectance in the 200 nm – 20 µm wavelength range or a silver coating for >96% reflectance from 450 nm to 20 µm. They have a standard RMS (0.800"-36) threading for compatibility with many of the microscopy and fiber coupling accessories offered by Thorlabs. Based on the classical Schwarzschild design, these objectives are corrected for third-order spherical aberration, coma, and astigmatism and have negligible higher-order aberrations, resulting in near-diffraction-limited performance. These advantages make them well suited for infinite conjugate applications that require longer working distances than those provided by typical refractive objectives.

Broadband Coating Reflectance

100

Reflectance (%)

96 92 Aluminum (-UVV) Silver (-P01)

88 84 80

0.2

Wavelength (µm) ITEM # LMM-15X-UVV

Ma NAb WDc 15X 0.30 24.1 mm

LMM-40X-UVV

40X

0.50

7.8 mm

29.1 mm

LMM-15X-P01

15X

0.30

24.1 mm

63.3 mm

LMM-40X-P01

40X

0.50

7.8 mm

29.1 mm

aMagnification

bNumerical

PARFOCAL LENGTH 63.3 mm

cWorking

Aperture

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Ray Trace of the Light Path Through a Reflective Objective

BROADBAND REFLECTIVE COATING Aluminum, >80% Reflectance, 200 nm – 20 µm Aluminum, >80% Absolute Reflectance, 200 nm – 20 µm Coating, 200 nm – 20 µm Coating, 450 nm – 20 µm Silver, >96% Average Reflectance, 450 nm – 20 µm Coating, 450 nm – 20 µm

PRICE 2,000.00

2,210.00

1,990.00

2,200.00

Distance

Have you seen our...

XYZ Microscope Stages ◆ Compatible with Nikon, Olympus, and Zeiss Microscopes ◆ XY DC Linear Servo Stage with Position Accuracy of <3.0 µm ◆ Z-Axis Piezo Stage with 500 µm of Vertical Travel and 25 nm Resolution ◆ Options for 2-Axis or Z-Axis Joystick Control

See Pages 174 - 177 413

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics

Rotating Lens Turret Features

SM1 (1.035"-40) Internal Thread

4 RMS-Threaded (0.800"-36) Microscope Objective Ports n SM1 Lens Tube Interfaces Provided n Bi-Directional Repeatability: Âą2.5 Âľm n Detent Mechanism Ensures Location Repeatability n Aluminum and Brass Construction with Hardened Steel Inserts n

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

RMS (0.800"-36) Internal Thread (4 Ports)

OT1

Lens Turret

LMM-40X-UVV Reflective Objective Lens Mounted on an OT1 Objective Turret

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

This lens turret holds up to four standard microscope objective lenses and is designed to be used with our SM1 lens tubes and 30 or 60 mm cage systems. It allows easy magnification changes without adjusting the optical setup. A detent mechanism ensures any given lens returns to the same location with high accuracy. For objectives or objective holders with different threading, we offer a wide selection of RMS adapters (see pages 404 - 405). ITEM # OT1

PRICE $ 299.25

DESCRIPTION Objective Lens Turret for Four Externally RMS-Threaded Objectives

Parfocal Length Extenders for Objectives Length

Diameter

External RMS Threads

PL15RMS

Parfocal Length

Internal RMS Threads

Thorlabs offers parfocal length extenders that increase the parfocal length of any infinity-corrected objective by 15 mm per extender. Industry parfocal length standards vary, as Olympus and Zeiss objectives have a parfocal length of 45 mm, whereas the standard for Nikon and Leica objectives is 60 mm. Furthermore, manufacturers also offer oversized objectives with a 75 mm parfocal length. These extenders allow users to swap microscope objectives manually or using a lens turret without having to refocus the system. This also simplifies microscope automation.

PL15RMS Parfocal Length Extender Shown with Objective in the OT1 Lens Turret

The PL15RMS (shown above) features internal and external RMS (0.800"-36) threads on opposite ends and is directly compatible with our OT1 Objective Turret (sold above). The PL15M25 features M25 x 0.75 threads and requires an RMSA2 adapter to be used with the OT1 turret.

414

ITEM # PL15RMS

PRICE $ 72.00

DESCRIPTION 15 mm Parfocal Length Extender for Microscope Objectives, RMS Threading

PL15M25

$ 72.00

15 mm Parfocal Length Extender for Microscope Objectives, M25 x 0.75 Threading

Accessories Microscope Components

RMS-Threaded Adapters

Optomechanics

These adapters feature RMS (Royal Microscopy Society) threading allowing the user to easily integrate an objective into a custom-built imaging system. To view our extensive selection of adapters, please visit www.thorlabs.com. ITEM # ADAPTER PROFILE RMSA2

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

RMSA3

EXTERNAL THREADS RMS (0.800"-36)

Optical Components

SM1A4 INTERNAL THREADS M25 x 0.75

PRICE 22.00

RMSA10

RMS (0.800"-36)

M32 x 0.75

22.00

RMSA6

RMS (0.800"-36)

C-Mount (1.00"-32)

19.00

SM1A4

RMS RMS(0.800"-36) (0.800"-36) RMS (0.800"-36)

SM1 (1.035"-40)

23.00

SM1A4TSa

SM1 (1.035"-40)

20.50

RMSA4

RMS (0.800"-36)

M27 x 0.75

21.00

RMSA12

M62 x 0.75

25.00

RMSA1

M25 x 0.75

RMS (0.800"-36)

19.00

RMSA5

C-Mount (1.00"-32)

RMS (0.800"-36)

19.00

SM1A3

SM1 (1.035"-40)

RMS (0.800"-36)

16.75

SM1A3TSa

SM1 (1.035"-40)

RMS (0.800"-36)

20.50

RMSA7

M26 x 0.706 (36 TPI)

19.95

RMSA3

M27 x 0.75

RMS (0.800"-36) RMS (0.800"-36) RMS (0.800"-36)

21.00

RMSA9

M32 x 0.75

RMS (0.800"-36)

22.00

RMSA8

M42 x 1.0

19.95

RMSA11

N/Ab

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

$ 25.00

a Thermally insulating adapter constructed from black delrin. It is useful in situations where heat transfer between components could be a problem, such as camera sensors, whose noise increases with temperature. b

Both Threads are Internal

Have you seen our...

Confocal Microscopy Systems

Thorlabs’ Confocal System Mounted on a Nikon FN1, Shown Here with an MLS203 Stage and a Scientific CCD Camera.

◆ Compact, Modular Design Adaptable for Upright, Inverted, and Thorlabs’ T-Scope Microscopes ◆ Two- and Four-Channel Options ◆ Systems Optimized for UV, Visible Fluorescence, or Reflectance Modes ◆ High-Speed Scanning: 30 Frames per Second (at 512 x 512 Pixel Resolution)

For Details, See Pages 54 - 65 415

Accessories Microscope Components

Test Targets and Reticles: Overview

Optomechanics

Resolution Targets (Pages 418 - 425)

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

R1L3S6P

Optical Components

Variable Line Grating Target

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

R2L2S1P NBS 1963A Resolution Target

Thorlabs offers a variety of targets for determining the resolution of an optical system, including 1951 USAF, NBS 1952, NBS 1963A, sector star, and variable line grating patterns. The standard resolution target features a series of line sets with decreasing distances between the lines. By identifying the largest set of nondistinguishable lines (or the smallest set of distinguishable lines), one determines the resolving power of the system.

Distortion Targets (Pages 426 - 427) Thorlabsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; Grid Distortion Targets each feature a single- or multi-frequency grid of dots or other shapes. Ideally, the horizontal and vertical lines of the grid should be imaged as straight and perpendicular to each other. A distorted image will show the lines as bowed; this image can then be used to quantify the amount of distortion introduced by a system and to correct for it in future images.

R3L3S4P2

R2L2S3P4

Multi-Frequency Grid Distortion target

Close Up of R2L2S3P4 Grid Distortion Target

Calibration Targets (Pages 428 - 429)

R1L1S5P

R3L3S3P

Stage Micrometer

Concentric Squares Target

Both stage micrometers and concentric squares can be used to calibrate distances in an image. We offer stage micrometers with divisions as small as 10 Âľm and concentric squares with dimensions as small as 0.1 mm. 416

Accessories Microscope Components

Test Targets and Reticles: Overview Slant Edge MTF Targets (Page 430)

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Close Up of the R2L2S2P Slant Edge MTF Target

R2L2S2P Slant Edge MTF Target

Adaptive Optics

Thorlabs’ Slant Edge MTF Target allows the user to determine the spatial frequency response of an imaging system via a slant edge pattern or Ronchi rulings. The slant edge pattern is L-shaped and tilted at 5° for compatibility with ISO 12233.

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Reticles (Page 431)

Lab Supplies

R1DS3N

R1DS2P

Crosshair Reticle

Crosshair and Concentric Circle Reticle

Numbered Concentric Circle Pattern

Reticles are optics designed for insertion in the eyepiece of an imaging system and superimpose either a crosshair or concentric circle pattern on the imaged object. The pattern provides a reference location, allowing the imaged object to be centered.

Obstruction Targets (Pages 432 - 433)

Thorlabs’ Annular Aperture Obstruction Targets (AAOTs) are ideal for increasing the contrast within a biological system or filtering out lower order modes. We offer versions that are ideal for high-pass or edge-enhancement filters, as well as versions for increasing the lateral spatial resolution within confocal imaging systems. R1CA300 R1DF200 417

Accessories Microscope Components

Resolution Targets: 1951 USAF

Optomechanics

Features n Determine

Resolution of an Optical System n M aximum Resolution of 228.0 Line Pairs per Millimeter n Conforms to MIL-S-150A Standard n Positive and Negative Patterns Available

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

R3L3S1P Positive Pattern

Thorlabs offers positive and negative resolution test targets that are made from plating chrome on a soda lime glass substrate and measure Ø1", 3" x 1", or 3" x 3". A set of six elements (horizontal and vertical line pair) make up each group. The spacing between the lines in each element is equal to the thickness of the line itself. When the target is imaged, the resolution of an imaging system can be determined by viewing the clarity of the horizontal and vertical lines. The largest set of non-distinguishable horizontal and vertical lines determines the resolving power of the imaging system.

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

R3L1S4P

Positive Wheel Pattern

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

R1DS1N

R3LS1N Enlarged Section

Enlarged Section

R1DS1N

R3L3S1N

Negative Pattern

USAF 1951 Targets* ELEMENT

See More... We are rapidly expanding our test target product offering. Please visit www.thorlabs.com for recent additions. R1DS1N Negative Pattern

GROUP NUMBER -2

-1

0.250

0.500

1.00

2.00

4.00

8.00

16.00

32.00

64.00

128.00

0.280

0.561

1.12

2.24

4.49

8.98

17.95

36.0

71.8

144.0

0.315

0.630

1.26

2.52

5.04

10.10

20.16

40.3

80.6

161.0

0.353

0.707

1.41

2.83

5.66

11.30

22.62

45.3

90.5

181.0

0.397

0.793

1.59

3.17

6.35

12.70

25.39

50.8

102.0

203.0

0.445

0.891

1.78

3.56

7.13

14.30

28.50

57.0

114.0

228.0

*Units are in line pairs per millimeter

NUMBER ITEM # PRICE DIMENSIONS OF TARGETS GROUPS R1DS1P $ 125.00 R1DS1N $ 125.00

1 1

R3L1S4P $ 200.00

3" x 1"

R3L1S4N $ 200.00

3" x 1"

R3L3S1P $ 160.00

3" x 3"

R3L3S1N $ 160.00

3" x 3"

aThe

418

Ø1" Ø1"

unit lp/mm is lines pairs per millimeter.

ELEMENTS MAXIMUM MINIMUM PER GROUP RESOLUTIONa RESOLUTIONa SUBSTRATE DESCRIPTION Positive 1951 USAF Test Target 6 (+2 to +7) 4.00 lp/mm

6 (+2 to +7)

4.00 lp/mm Negative 1951 USAF Test Target 4.00 lp/mm Soda Soda Lime Lime Positive 1951 USAF Wheel Pattern

6 (+2 to +7) 6 228.0 lp/mm 6 (+2 to +7) 10 (-2 to +7)

Negative 1951 USAF Wheel Pattern Glass 4.00 lp/mm 0.250 lp/mm Positive 1951 USAF Test Target

10 (-2 to +7)

0.250 lp/mm

Negative 1951 USAF Test Target

Accessories Microscope Components

Resolution Targets: NBS 1952

Optomechanics

Features n Measure

Resolution with One-Pass Scanning n N BS 1952 Targets with Centered Crosshairs n R esolutions from 2.4 to 80 lp/mm or from 0.48 to 16 lp/mm n Sets of Three Lines Minimize Spurious Resolution

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

R1L3S10P

Adaptive Optics Close Up of the R3L3S6P NBS 1952 Target

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Close Up of the R1L3S10P NBS 1952 Target

Thorlabs’ NBS 1952 Resolution Targets each offer 48 sets of lines R3L3S6P with 24 different frequencies ranging either from 2.4 to 80 lp/mm (Item # R1L3S10P) or from 0.48 to 16 lp/mm (Item # R3L3S6P), as listed in the tables to the right. In the center of both targets is a crosshair with two concentric circles. The R1L3S10P target has a crosshair with a length and width of 610 µm and concentric circles with diameters of 250 µm and 500 µm, while the R3L3S6P target has a crosshair with a length and width of 3100 µm and concentric circles with diameters of 1250 µm and 2500 µm. Since the line sets on this target are arranged such that every resolution can be viewed by traveling in only one direction along the pattern (either horizontally or vertically), the resolution of an optical system can be determined with one pass. Because these targets feature sets of three lines, they reduce the occurrence of spurious resolution and thus help prevent inaccurate resolution measurements. For more information on spurious resolution, please visit the presentation at www.thorlabs.com The pattern on these targets are made from low-reflectivity, vacuum-sputtered chrome deposited on a 0.6" (1.5 mm) thick soda lime glass substrate to achieve an optical density of ≥3 at 430 nm. The dark pattern and clear substrate are useful for front-lit and general applications.

ITEM #

PRICE

R1L3S10P

$ 100.00

DESCRIPTION Positive NBS 1952 Resolution Target, 3" x 1", 2.4 to 80 lp/mm, Soda Lime Glass

R3L3S6P

Positive NBS 1952 Resolution Target, 3" x 3", 0.48 to 16 lp/mm, Soda Lime Glass

150.00

R1L3S10P FREQUENCIES Resolution Line Width (lp/mm) (µm)

R3L3S6P FREQUENCIES Resolution Line Width (lp/mm) (µm)

2.4

208.3

0.48

1041.7

2.8

176.8

0.56

892.9

3.4

147.1

0.68

735.3

4.0

125

0.80

625

4.8

104.2

0.96

520.8

5.6

89.3

1.12

446.4

6.8

73.5

1.36

367.6

8.0

62.5

1.60

312.5

9.6

52.1

1.92

260.4

11.2

44.6

2.24

223.2

41.7

2.40

208.3

13.6

36.8

2.72

183.8

35.7

2.80

176.8

31.3

3.20

156.3

29.4

3.40

147.1

4.0

125

20.8

4.80

104.2

17.9

5.60

89.3

14.7

6.80

73.5

12.5

8.0

62.5

10.4

9.60

52.1

8.9

11.2

44.6

7.4

13.6

36.8

6.3

16.0

31.3

419

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics

Resolution Targets: NBS 1963A NBS 1963A Targets CYCLES/mm

CYCLE SIZE

CYCLES/mm

CYCLE SIZE

1.0

1.00 mm

4.5

0.222 mm

1.1

0.909 mm

5.0

0.200 mm

1.25

0.800 mm

5.6

0.179 mm

Targets and Reticles

R2L2S1N

1.4

0.714 mm

6.3

0.159 mm

1.6

0.625 mm

7.1

0.141 mm

Negative Pattern

Optical Components

1.8

0.556 mm

8.0

0.125 mm

2.0

0.500 mm

9.0

0.111 mm

2.2

0.455 mm

10.0

0.100 mm

2.5

0.400 mm

11.0

0.091 mm

2.8

0.357 mm

12.5

0.080 mm

3.2

0.313 mm

14.0

0.071 mm

3.6

0.278 mm

16.0

0.063 mm

4.0

0.250 mm

18.0

0.056 mm

Microscope Objectives

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

R2L2S1P Positive Pattern

Features n Frequencies

from 1 to 18 cycles/mm n Determine Resolution of an Optical System n 2" x 2" Soda Lime Glass Substrate n Positive and Negative Patterns Available

horlabs offers positive and negative NBS 1963A resolution test targets that are made from plating vacuumT sputtered chrome (OD ≥ 3) on glass substrates that measure 2" x 2". These targets have sets of five horizontal and five vertical lines. Each set of lines is labeled with a number, which refers to the frequency of the lines in cycles per millimeter. With a maximum frequency of 18 cycles/mm, the smallest cycles have a spacing of only 0.056 mm. ITEM #

PRICE

R2L2S1N

120.00

R2L2S1P

$ 120.00

DESCRIPTION Negative NBS 1963A Resolution Target, 2" x 2", Soda Lime Glass Positive NBS 1963A Resolution Target, 2" x 2", Soda Lime Glass

Resolution Targets: NBS 1963A (High Frequency) Features n Frequencies

Close Up of R2L2S1N1 Negative Target

Close Up of R2L2S1P1 Positive Target

from 1 to 228 cycles/mm n Determine Resolution of an Optical System n 2" x 2" Soda Lime Glass Substrate n Positive and Negative Patterns Available

Thorlabs’ 2" x 2" high-frequency NBS 1963A resolution test targets offer 48 line sets with frequencies from 1 to 228 cycles/mm, High-Frequency NBS 1963A Targetsa corresponding to cycle sizes from 1.0 mm to 4.4 µm. Each set of CYCLES/mm CYCLE SIZE CYCLES/mm CYCLE SIZE lines on the pattern contains five horizontal and five vertical lines 20 0.0500 72 0.0139 and is labeled with the frequency of the lines in cycles/mm. The 23 0.0435 81 0.0123 resolution of an optical system can be determined by identifying 25 0.0400 91 0.0110 the highest frequency line set that the system is able to resolve. 29 0.0345 102 0.0098 R2L2S1P1

These resolution targets are offered in positive and negative versions. The R2L2S1P1 positive target consists of a vacuumsputtered chrome pattern (OD ≥ 3) plated onto a clear substrate and is useful for front-lit and general applications. Alternatively, the R2L2S1N1 negative target uses the same chrome coating to cover the substrate, leaving the pattern itself clear, and works well in back-lit and highly illuminated applications. ITEM #

420

PRICE

0.0313

114

0.0088

0.0278

128

0.0078

0.0250

144

0.0069

0.0222

161

0.0062

0.0196

181

0.0055

0.0175

203

0.0049

0.0156

228

0.0044

These high-frequency NBS 1963A targets offer all of the cycle sizes in the table at the top of the page as well as those listed here.

R2L2S1P1

$ 200.00

DESCRIPTION Positive High-Frequency NBS 1963A Resolution Target, 2" x 2", Soda Lime Glass

R2L2S1N1

$ 200.00

Negative High-Frequency NBS 1963A Resolution Target, 2" x 2", Soda Lime Glass

Accessories Microscope Components

Resolution Targets: NBS 1963A (Birefringent)

Optomechanics

Features n Frequencies

from 1 to 18 cycles/mm (See Table Below) n Determine Resolution of a Polarizing Optical System n Birefringent Target Displays Both Positive and Negative Patterns n 2" Ă&#x2014; 2" N-BK7 Glass Substrate

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

The R2L2S1B Birefringent Resolution Target has a pattern that is invisible R2L2S1B unless viewed through a pair of crossed polarizers, making it ideal for calibration of polarization-sensitive systems. It is created by using a photo alignment process to set the fast axis of the liquid crystal polymer layer, which is protected by two N-BK7 glass covers.

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

The target is designed so that it can display both positive and negative patterns by adjusting the orientation of the crossed polarizers relative to the test target. If the cross polarizers are aligned with the sides of the glass covers, the positive image will be formed. If the cross polarizers are aligned at 45Â° to the sides of the glass covers, the negative image will be formed. Because of its polarization sensitivity, this resolution target is ideal for calibrating and testing the resolution of polarizing microscopes, microscopes with a Nomarski mode, polarization imaging systems, or Mueller Matrix polarimeters. This target has 26 sets of five horizontal and five vertical lines. Each set of lines is labeled with a number, which refers to the number of cycles per millimeter. With a maximum frequency of 18 cycles/mm, the smallest cycles have a spacing of only 0.056 mm (see table below). NBS 1963A Targets CYCLES/mm CYCLE SIZE 1.0

1.00 mm

1.1

0.909 mm

1.25

0.800 mm

1.4

0.714 mm

1.6

0.625 mm

1.8

0.556 mm

2.0

0.500 mm

2.2

0.455 mm

2.5

0.400 mm

2.8

0.357 mm

3.2

0.313 mm

3.6

0.278 mm

4.0

0.250 mm

4.5

0.222 mm

5.0

0.200 mm

5.6

0.179 mm

6.3

0.159 mm

7.1

0.141 mm

8.0

0.125 mm

9.0

0.111 mm

10.0

0.100 mm

11.0

0.091 mm

12.5

0.080 mm

14.0

0.071 mm

16.0

0.063 mm

18.0

0.056 mm

ITEM # R2L2S1B

PRICE

Positive

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Negative

DESCRIPTION Birefringent NBS 1963A Resolution Target, 2" x 2", N-BK7

$ 300.00

We also manufacture...

Custom Test Targets Thorlabs has extensive design and production capabilities for test targets and reticles. All our test targets, stage micrometers, distortion grids, and reticles are manufactured in-house at our Thorlabs Quantum Electronics (TQE) division in Jessup, Maryland. In addition to the test targets that are offered from stock, we can provide custom patterns and sizes (circular, square, and rectangular), a sample of which are shown above. Please note that there is a significant tooling cost and lead time for custom test target patterns that make the purchase of only a few pieces fairly costly. We are also able to provide versions of our stock target patterns with AR coatings on the substrates, higher or lower optical Micrometers Grids densities, or substrates other than soda lime glass. For a quote on custom test targets, please contact Tech Support. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Micrometers

Grids

A B C D E F G H I J

55 20 50

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 35

Protractors Concentric Circles

Pinholes Crosshairs

421

Accessories Microscope Components

Resolution Targets: Sector Star

Optomechanics

Features n 1"

x 1" Positive Sector Star Targets n Determine Resolution of an Optical System n Low-Reflectivity, Vacuum-Sputtered Chrome on Soda Lime Glass

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

R1L1S2P

R1L1S3P

Thorlabs offers two 1" square targets with positive Sector star (also known as Siemens star) patterns. The R1L1S2P target has 36 bars over 360°. The resolution at the center circle of this target is 57.5 line pairs per millimeter (lp/mm). Alternatively, the R1L1S3P target has 72 bars over 360°, and the resolution at the center is 115 lp/mm. Both targets also have a Ø200 µm center circle and are useful for determining the resolution of an optical system by noting how close to the center of the pattern an optical system is able to resolve adjacent bars.

Lab Supplies ITEM # R1L1S2P R1L1S3P

PATTERN OUTER DIAMETER

CENTER CIRCLE DIAMETER

125 µm 10 mm 200 µm 250 µm

Resolution Targets: Variable Line Grating

NUMBER OF BARS

Close Up of the R1L1S3P Sector Star Target

RESOLUTION AT OUTER DIAMETER

RESOLUTION AT CENTER CIRCLE

PRICE

36 Over 360°

1.15 lp/mm

57.5 lp/mm

$ 150.00

72 Over 360°

2.30 lp/mm

115 lp/mm

$ 220.00

Features n 3"

x 1" Variable Line Grating Target n Resolutions from 1.25 lp/mm to 250 lp/mm n Determine Resolution of an Optical System n Low-Reflectivity, Vacuum-Sputtered Chrome on Soda Lime Glass n Compatible with our MLS203 Microscope Stages (See Page 171) via MLS203P2 Slide Holder (See Page 172)

R1L3S6P

The R1L3S6P Variable Line Grating Target offers 18 sections of line grating with resolutions ranging from 1.25 line pairs per millimeter (lp/mm) to 250 lp/mm. The table to the right lists each available resolution. The resolution of an optical system can be measured by determining the highest resolution grating for which the system is still able to resolve the lines.

ITEM # R1L3S6P

422

PRICE $ 450.00

Close Up of the R1L3S6P Variable Line Grating Target RESOLUTIONS OF INCLUDED LINE GRATINGS (lp/mm) 1.25

2.08

2.86

3.85

16.67

200

1.67

2.5

3.33

4.17

6.67

12.5

100

250

DESCRIPTION Variable Line Grating Test Target, 3" x 1", Soda Lime Glass

Accessories Microscope Components

Combined Resolution and Distortion Target: Grid

Optomechanics

Features n Concentric Circles and Crosshair Patterns Arranged in a Grid n F our Different Concentric Circle Sizes and Five Different Crosshair Sizes n M easure Resolution, Distortion, and Magnification of an Imaging System n 3" x 3" Soda Lime Glass Substrate

R3L3S5P

The pattern on this target is made from low-reflectivity, vacuum-sputtered chrome deposited on a 0.6" (1.5 mm) thick soda lime glass substrate to achieve an optical density of ≥3 at 430 nm. The dark pattern and clear substrate are useful for front-lit and general applications. B1

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Thorlabs’ 3" x 3" Concentric Circle and Crosshair Grid Target offers 289 individual grids, arranged in a larger, 2" x 2" grid of 17 rows and 17 columns. The smaller grids each have four concentric circle patterns and five crosshair patterns of varying sizes. The concentric circle and crosshair patterns on the smaller grids are labeled in the image below but not on the target itself. Each concentric circle pattern features seven different radii, while the crosshairs each have a single or double cross. For details on the dimensions of these patterns, see the tables below.

Microscope Objectives

A2 1

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Close Up of Entire Pattern on the R3L3S5P Target

Concentic Circle Pattern

Length

4 5

Close Up of the Smaller Grid on the R3L3S5P Target with Labels Added (See Tables Below)

Double Crosshair Pattern

6 7

Line Width

CONCENTRIC CIRCLES

aAs

Circle Patterna

31.3 µm

62.5 µm

125 µm

140.6 µm

234.4 µm

242.2 µm

500 µm

15.6 µm

31.3 µm

62.5 µm

70.3 µm

117.2 µm

121.1 µm

250 µm

7.8 µm

15.6 µm

31.3 µm

35.2 µm

58.6 µm

60.5 µm

125 µm

3.9 µm

7.8 µm

15.6 µm

17.6 µm

29.3 µm

30.3 µm

62.5 µm

indicated by the drawing above

CROSSHAIRS Crosshair Patterna

Single or Double Line

Double

Single

Double

25 µm

Double

100 µm

aAs indicated by the drawing above bThe line width is equal to the spacing

ITEM # R3L3S5P

Length/Width

Line Widthb 6.25 µm 12.5 µm

500 µm

50 µm

between the lines.

PRICE $ 500.00

DESCRIPTION Combined Resolution and Distortion Target, 3" x 3", Soda Lime Glass

423

Combined Resolution and Distortion Targets: 1951 USAF Features n Determine

Resolution of an Optical System n Measure Image Distortion, Astigmatism, and Other Aberrations n 18 mm (0.71") Square, 1.5 mm Thick Target n I ncludes 1951 USAF Pattern, Star Sector, Concentric Circles, Grids, and Ronchi Rulings n Positive and Negative Patterns Available The test targets include a 1951 USAF pattern (Groups 2 - 7), a star sector, concentric circles, grids (100 µm, 50 µm, and 10 µm), and Ronchi rulings (30 - 150 lp/mm). These targets are useful for testing resolution, field distortion, focus errors, and astigmatism. In particular, the USAF 1951 targets are useful for measuring imaging resolution.

R1L1S1P

Positive Pattern

With these targets, the spacing between the lines in each element is equal to the thickness of the line itself. When the target is imaged, the resolution of an imaging system can be determined by viewing the clarity of the horizontal and vertical lines. The largest set of non-distinguishable horizontal and vertical lines determines the resolving power of the imaging system. The grids can be used to measure image distortion, while the star sector and concentric circles are ideal for identifying focus errors, astigmatism, and other aberrations existing in an imaging system. The Ronchi rulings are excellent for evaluating resolution, field distortion, and parfocal stability.

TARGET FEATURE

Negative Pattern

DETAILS

1951 USAF Target

Groups 2 - 7

Grids

20 x 20 Arrays with 100 µm, 50 µm, and 10 µm Pitch 10 Circles with Radii from 100 µm to 1000 µm, Intervals Labeled 1 to 10

Concentric Circles

13 Rulings from 30 lp/mma to 150 lp/mm in 10 lp/mm Intervals

Ronchi Ruling

36 Bars through 360º, Ø10 µm Radius Center Circle, and Ten Concentric Circles with Radii from 50 µm to 500 µm in 50 µm Intervals

Star Sector aLine

R1L1S1N

Pairs per Millimeter

Microscope Image of the R1L1S1N Negative Test Target

424

ITEM # R1L1S1P

PRICE 485.00

DESCRIPTION Positive Combined Resolution and Distortion Test Target, 18 mm Square, Soda Lime Glass

R1L1S1N

485.00

Negative Combined Resolution and Distortion Test Target, 18 mm Square, Soda Lime Glass

Accessories Microscope Components

Combined Resolution and Distortion Target: NBS 1963A

Optomechanics

Features n 3"

R1L3S5P

Thorlabs offers positive 3" x 1" x 0.06" (76.2 mm x 25.4 mm x 1.5 mm) combined resolution / distortion test targets that are made by plating vacuum-sputtered, low reflectivity chrome with an optical density of ≥3 at 430 nm on a soda lime glass substrate. Ideal for calibration of imaging systems and microscope stages, they are sized to fit in our MLS203P2 Stage Slide Holder for use with our MLS203 Microscope Stages (see page 171). The test targets include an NBS 1963A pattern, a sector (Siemens) star, concentric circles, grids, Ronchi rulings, and more (see table to the right). These targets are useful for testing resolution, field distortion, focus errors, and astigmatism. The NBS 1963A, sector star, and concentric circle targets are useful for measuring imaging resolution. The grids can be used to measure the distortion introduced by an imaging system. The Ronchi rulings are excellent for evaluating resolution, field distortion, and parfocal stability.

x 1" Target on a Soda Lime Glass Substrate n Includes NBS 1963A Pattern, Sector Star, Concentric Circles, Grids, Ronchi Rulings, and More (See Table Below) n Determine Resolution of an Optical System n Measure Image Distortion, Astigmatism, and Other Aberrations n Compatible with our MLS203 Microscope Stages via MLS203P2 Slide Holders (See Page 172)

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

TARGET FEATURE

DETAILS

NBS 1963A

Frequencies from 4.5 cycles/mm to 228 cycles/mm (See List Below)

Distortion Grid (Squares)

3 Grids: 100 lp/mm,a 150 lp/mm, 200 lp/mm

Two-Point Resolution Dots

3 Grids: 400 µm Pitch of Ø80 µm Dots, 200 µm Pitch of Ø40 µm Dots, 100 µm Pitch of Ø20 µm Dots

Two-Point Resolution Dots

Ø25 µm, Ø20 µm, Ø15 µm, Ø12.5 µm, Ø10 µm, Ø7.5 µm, and Ø5 µm

Interdigitated Lines

6.25 lp/mm, 12.5 lp/mm, 25 lp/mm, 50 lp/mm, 100 lp/mm, and 200 lp/mm

Concentric Circles

10 Circles with Radii from 100 µm to 1000 µm in 100 µm Intervals

Lab Supplies

3 Rulings: 100 lp/mm, 150 lp/mm, and 200 lp/mm

Fixed Ronchi Rulings

Variable Ronchi Rulings

Laser Safety

20 Rulings (Each 1 mm x 1 mm): 10 lp/mm to 200 lp/mm in 10 lp/mm Intervals

Close Up of the R1L3S5P Resolution and Distortion Target Pinholes

FREQUENCIES OF NBS 1963A PATTERN (CYCLES/mm) 4.5

114

128

5.6

12.5

144

6.3

161

7.1

181

203

102

228

ITEM # R1L3S5P

PRICE $ 900.00

Micrometers

Sector Star

Ø25 µm, Ø20 µm, Ø15 µm, Ø12.5 µm, Ø10 µm, Ø7.5 µm, and Ø5 µm 3 Rulers: 10 mm Scale with 50 µm Divisions, 1 mm Scale with 10 µm Divisions, and 1 mm x 1 mm XY Scale with 50 µm Divisions 36 Bars through 360°, 50 µm Radius Center Circle, and Ten Concentric Circles with Radii from 100 µm to 500 µm in 50 µm Intervals

a. The unit lp/mm is line pairs per millimeter

DESCRIPTION Positive Combined Resolution and Distortion Test Target, 3" x 1", Soda Lime Glass

425

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics

Distortion Targets: Fixed Frequency Grid Features n O ne

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

Grid Array on a 1.5" x 1.5" x 0.06" (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 1.5 mm) Soda Lime Glass Substrate n 125 µm, 250 µm, 500 µm, or 1000 µm Grid Spacings n Ø62.5 µm, Ø125 µm, Ø250 µm, or Ø500 µm Dots n Ideal for Machine Vision Applications of Stage Calibration and Distortion Detection R2L2S3P4

These distortion grid arrays each feature a single 25.0 mm x 25.0 mm (0.98" x 0.98") grid of dots fabricated from the deposition of vacuumsputtered, low-reflectivity chrome on a soda lime glass substrate. The available grid spacings, which are measured from the center of any dot to the center of any adjacent dot, range from 125 µm to 1000 µm, and the dot diameters range from 62.5 µm to 500 µm.

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Grid arrays are used to determine the distortion of an imaging system. Ideally, the horizontal and vertical rows of dots should be perpendicular to each other. A distorted image will show the array as bowed; this image can then be used to correct for distortion.

Lab Supplies

ITEM #

SPACINGa

SPACING TOLERANCE DOT SIZE

DOT SIZE TOLERANCE

PATTERN SIZE PATTERN SIZE

PATTERN TOLERANCE

Close Up of R2L2S3P4 Pattern

OPTICAL DENSITY

PRICE

R2L2S3P1

125 µm

Ø62.5 µm

375.00

R2L2S3P2

Ø125 µm 25.0 mm x 25.0 mm ±2 µm ±4 µm (0.98" x 0.98") Ø250 µm

320.00

R2L2S3P3

250 µm ±1 µm 500 µm

275.00

R2L2S3P4

1000 µm

Ø500 µm

250.00

aMeasured

OD ≥3 at 430 nm

from the center of any dot to the center of any adjacent dot

Distortion Targets: Multi-Frequency Grids Features n I deal

R1L3S3P

for Stage Calibration and Distortion Detection n F our Grid Arrays on a 3" x 1" Soda Lime Glass Slide n 500 µm, 100 µm, 50 µm, and 10 µm Grid Spacings

Grid arrays are used to determine the distortion of an imaging system. Ideally, the horizontal and vertical lines of the grid should be perpendicular to each other. A distorted image will show the lines as bowed; this image can then be used to correct for distortion. Our R1L3S3P positive grid array features four chrome grids (OD ≥ 3) on a 3" x 1" soda lime glass slide. The grid arrays have 500 µm, 100 µm, 50 µm, and 10 µm spacings. ITEM # R1L3S3P

426

PRICE $ 225.00

Microscope Image of R1L3S3P Grid Array

DESCRIPTION Grid Distortion Target; 500, 100, 50, and 10 µm Grids, 3" x 1", Soda Lime Glass

Accessories Microscope Components

Distortion Targets: Concentric Multi-Frequency Grids

Optomechanics

Features n T hree

or Five Grid Arrays on a 3" x 3" Substrate n Available on a Soda Lime Glass or White Flashed Opal Substrate n Grid Spacings Between 125 and 2000 µm n Dot Diameters Between 62.5 and 1000 µm n Ideal for Machine Vision Applications of Stage Calibration and Distortion Detection

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

R3L3S4P2

These multi-frequency grid distortion targets each feature grids of dots arranged as concentric squares with varying spacings between the dots. The lowreflectivity, vacuum-sputtered chrome patterns (OD ≥ 3) are available with grid spacings (i.e., distances from the center of a dot to any adjacent dot) of either three different sizes (500, 1000, and 2000 µm) or five different sizes (125, 250, 500, 1000, and 2000 µm). Both patterns are offered on soda lime glass, which is transparent and useful for transmissive applications, or white-flashed opal, which is opaque and useful for reflective applications.

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Close Up of the Five Grid Patterns on the R3L3S4P2-O

Close Up of the Three Grid Patterns on the R3L3S4P1-O

GRID SPACINGa

DOT DIAMETERSb

PATTERN SIZEc

R3L3S4P1 250, 500, 500, 1000, and 1000 µm and 2000 µm R3L3S4P1-O 50 mm x 50 mm R2L2S3P2 125, 250, 500, 1000, 62.5, 125, 250, 500, and 2000 µm and 1000 µm R3L3S4P2-O a Measured from the center of any dot to the center of any adjacent dot b Dot diameters are listed in order with respect to their corresponding grid c Measured from corner to corner on the grid array

SUBSTRATE THICKNESS

PRICE

Soda Lime Glass

0.06" (1.5 mm)

300.00

White-Flashed Opal

0.12" (3.1 mm)

380.00

Soda Lime Glass

0.06" (1.5 mm)

320.00

White-Flashed Opal

0.12" (3.1 mm)

430.00

spacings

Have you seen our...

Scientific Cameras Thorlabs’ monochrome scientific CCD cameras are based on high quantum efficiency, low-noise CCD imagers, which make them ideal for multispectral imaging, fluorescence microscopy, and other highperformance imaging techniques.

8050M-CL 8 Megapixel Hermetically Sealed Two-Stage Cooled Camera

1500M-GE 1.4 Megapixel Non-Cooled Camera

See Page 308 for More Details 427

Accessories Microscope Components

Calibration Targets: Concentric Squares

Optomechanics

Features n 3"

x 3" Concentric Square Target n Calibrate a Measurement for Imaging Software n Low-Reflectivity, Vacuum Sputtered Chrome

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

Close Up of the R3L3S3P

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

WIDTHS OF POSITIVE SQUARES (mm)

R3L3S3P

The R3L3S3P Concentric Square Target features fourteen concentric squares with lengths and widths ranging from 0.1 mm to 50 mm. Each squareâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s width is labeled on the target. This target is made ITEM # R3L3S3P

PRICE

0.1

0.5

0.25

from a soda lime glass substrate with low-reflectivity, vacuum-sputtered chrome and is useful for the calibration of distances within imaging systems.

DESCRIPTION Positive Concentric Square Test Target, 3" x 3", Soda Lime Glass

$ 350.00

Calibration Targets: Concentric Squares and Micrometers Features n 3"

R1L3S8P

x 1" Combined Dual-Axis Stage Micrometer and Concentric Squares Target n For Calibrating Eyepiece Reticles or Objective Magnification n Soda Lime Glass (R1L3S8P) or White-Flashed Opal (R1L3S8P-O) Substrate n One Imperial and One Metric Pattern on Each Target

Thorlabsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; R1L3S8P and R1L3S8P-O targets combine a dual-axis stage micrometer pattern with a concentric square pattern. The R1L3S8P consists of low-reflectivity, vacuum-sputtered chrome plated onto a transparent 0.06" (1.5 mm) thick soda lime substrate. Alternatively, the R1L3S8P-O features the same low-reflectivity chrome pattern plated onto an opaque, 0.12" (3.1 mm) thick white-flashed opal substrate. Soda lime is useful for transmissive applications, whereas opal should be used for reflective applications. Each target includes one pattern with imperial measurements on the right and one pattern with metric measurements on the left. These positive targets are useful for the calibration of distances within imaging systems. ITEM #

428

PRICE

R1L3S8P

$ 300.00

R1L3S8P-O

380.00

Close Up of the R1L3S8P-O Imperial Micrometer

DESCRIPTION Stage Micrometer and Concentric Squares Target, 3" x 1", Soda Lime Glass Stage Micrometer and Concentric Squares Target, 3" x 1", White-Flashed Opal Glass

Accessories Microscope Components

Calibration Targets: Stage Micrometers

Optomechanics

Features n 1"

x 1" or 3" x 1" Stage Micrometers n For Calibrating Eyepiece Reticles or Objective Magnification n Four Scale Options • R1L3S2P: 1 mm Scale with 10 µm Divisions • R1L3S1P: 10 mm Scale with 50 µm Divisions • R1L1S4P: 10 mm Vertical Scale with 100 µm Divisions • R1L1S5P: 20 mm Horizontal Scale with 100 µm Divisions and Crosshair

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

R1L3S1P

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Thorlabs’ Stage Micrometers each feature a micrometer pattern with numerically labeled divisions centered on a 1" x 1" or 3" x 1" soda lime glass substrate. We offer a 1 mm horizontal scale with 10 μm divisions, a 10 mm horizontal scale with 50 μm divisions, a 10 mm vertical Close Up of the R1L1S5P Horizontal Scale with Crosshair scale with 100 μm divisions, and a 20 mm horizontal scale with 100 μm divisions and a vertical crosshair. The positive pattern on R1L1S4P each target consists of low-reflectivity, vacuum-sputtered chrome with an optical density of ≥3 at 430 nm. These micrometers are useful for the calibration of distances within imaging devices, such as microscopes.

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Mounting

R1L1S5P Microscope Image of R1L3S1P Stage Micrometer

These test targets can be mounted in one of four of our microscopy slide holders. Our MAX3SLH fixed slide holder (shown at right and presented on page 398) provides two spring clips to mount the optic and can be mounted to any of our 3-axis flexure stages. The MAX3SLH is only compatible with test targets greater than or equal to 2" wide and provides a clear aperture of 1".

R1L3S3P Stage Micrometer Test Target Mounted on the MAX3SLH Fixed Microscope Slide Holder (See Page 398 for Details)

Alternatively, Thorlabs also offers our XYFM1(/M) test target positioning mount (pictured on the next page and presented on page 400) capable of translating a 1" to 3" wide rectangular target over a 50 mm x 30 mm area. An adapter on the back of the mount contains five 8-32 (M4) taps for various post-mountable orientations. The XYFM1 uses nylon-tipped setscrews to secure the optic. This will slightly cover the edges of the optic and can, in some instances, cover the chrome pattern on test targets. For users of the MLS203 microscopy stage, we offer the MLS203P2 slide holder (see page 172) for inverted microscopes, which can mount slides 25 mm to 26.5 mm wide and petri dishes 30 mm to 60 mm in diameter.

ITEM #

PRICE 155.00

DESCRIPTION 1 mm Stage Micrometer with 10 µm Divisions, 3" x 1", Soda Lime Glass

R1L3S2P

R1L3S1P

$ 175.00

10 mm Stage Micrometer with 50 µm Divisions, 3" x 1", Soda Lime Glass

R1L1S4P

$ 120.00

10 mm Stage Micrometer with 100 µm Divisions, 1" x 1", Soda Lime Glass

R1L1S5P

20 mm Stage Micrometer with 100 µm Divisions, 1" x 1", Soda Lime Glass

120.00

429

Accessories Microscope Components

Slant Edge MTF Target

Optomechanics

Features

Microscope Objectives

n Determine

Modular Transfer Function (MTF) of an Imaging System Slanted, L-Shaped Pattern (ISO 12233 Compatible) n 20 Variable Ronchi Rulings, 10 lp/mm to 200 lp/mm n 5°

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Thorlabs’ Slant Edge MTF Target allows the user to determine the spatial R2L2S2P frequency response of an imaging system via a slant edge pattern or Ronchi rulings. The slant edge pattern is L-shaped and tilted at 5° for compatibility with ISO 12233. The Ronchi rulings include twenty individual rulings, each measuring 5 mm x 5 mm and ranging in resolution from 10 line pairs per millimeter (lp/mm) to 200 lp/mm in 10 lp/mm intervals. Made from a soda lime glass substrate with low-reflectivity, vacuum-sputtered chrome, the target also features a cross pattern at each of the four corners of the overall pattern for alignment.

Modulation Transfer Function The modulation transfer function (MTF) is used to determine the resolution and performance of an imaging system. Several kinds of targets exist to measure the MTF of a system, including sine wave targets, grill targets, and slanted edge targets. For the slant edge method, a slant edge target, such as the one featured on this page, is imaged. The target consists of a distinct dark edge that is tilted at some angle, usually between one and five degrees. The edge should be produced using a method that will establish as distinct an edge as possible. In the case of the target sold here, photolithography is used. For information about calculating the MTF of an optical system, please visit www.thorlabs.com.

R2L2S2P Target Mounted in an XYFM1 Test Target Postitioner

Mounting Options To mount this target, Thorlabs offers the XYFM1(/M) Test Target Positioning Mount (see photo to the right). This mount is capable of translating the target over a 50 mm x 30 mm area and SPECIFICATIONS secures the target using nylon-tipped setscrews. An Design adapter on the back of the mount contains five 8-32 (M4) Substrate taps for various post-mountable orientations. Chrome Thickness Chrome Optical Density Substrate Thickness

Enlarged View of 10 lp/mm and 20 lp/mm Ronchi Rulings and Cross Pattern on R2L2S2P a

ITEM # R2L2S2P

430

PRICE $ 580.00

Chrome-on-Glass Soda Lime Glass 0.120 µm OD ≥3 at 430 nm 0.06" (1.5 mm)

Surface Flatness

<5 µm

Line Spacing Tolerancea

±1 µm

Line Width Tolerancea

±0.5 µm

This tolerance is valid for the mask used to create this target and not necessarily for the target itself.

DESCRIPTION Slant Edge MTF Target, 2" x 2", Soda Lime Glass

Accessories Microscope Components

Reticles: Crosshair

Optomechanics

Features n C rosshair

Extends to the Edge of the

Microscope Objectives

Optic n P ositive Crosshair Available in 19.0 mm, 21.0 mm, and 1" Diameters n Ø 1" Negative Crosshair Option

Targets and Reticles

R1DS3N

Adaptive Optics

Our crosshair (crossline) reticles are used to superimpose a reference pattern on an object being imaged. The crosshairs, formed from lines that are 25 µm wide, span the entire diameter of the optic. Made by plating chrome onto one side of a UV fused silica substrate, these optics provide greater than 90% transmission in the 200 - 1200 nm spectral range. ITEM #

PRICE

Optical Components

R1DS3P

Illumination Sources Light Detection

The R19DS11P Reticle can be Mounted in our LMR1 Ø1" Fixed Optic Mount Using an SM1AD19 Mounting Adapter

Alignment Tools Laser Safety

DESCRIPTION Positive Crosshair Reticle, Ø19.0 mm, UV Fused Silica

R19DS11P R21DS5P

$ 61.95 $ 61.95

R1DS3P

61.95

Positive Crosshair Reticle, Ø1", UV Fused Silica

R1DS3N

61.95

Negative Crosshair Reticle, Ø1", UV Fused Silica

Lab Supplies

Positive Crosshair Reticle, Ø21.0 mm, UV Fused Silica

Reticles: Crosshair and Concentric Circles Features n T en

Numbered Concentric Circles with 1 mm Spacings, Superimposed on a Crosshair n P ositive Pattern Available in 19.0 mm, 21.0 mm, and 1" Diameters n Ø 1" Negative Pattern Option n C rosshair Does Not Extend to the Edge of the Optic R1DS2N

R19DS13P

Our concentric circle reticles consist of a centered crosshair and ten numbered concentric circles, each spaced 1 mm apart. The pattern is formed from lines that are 25 µm wide. Made by plating chrome onto one side of a UV fused silica substrate, these optics provide greater than 90% transmission in the 200 to 1200 nm spectral range. ITEM #

PRICE

Numbered Concentric Circle Pattern

DESCRIPTION Positive Concentric Circle Reticle, Ø19.0 mm, UV Fused Silica

R19DS13P R21DS7P

$ 61.95 $ 61.95

R1DS2P

61.95

Positive Concentric Circle Reticle, Ø1", UV Fused Silica

R1DS2N

61.95

Negative Concentric Circle Reticle, Ø1", UV Fused Silica

Positive Concentric Circle Reticle, Ø21.0 mm, UV Fused Silica

431

Accessories Microscope Components

Obstruction Targets: Annular Aperture

Optomechanics

Thorlabs’ Annular Aperture Obstruction Targets (AAOTs) are ideal for increasing the contrast within a biological system or filtering out lower order modes. Each AAOT is characterized by the ratio (e) between the obstruction diameter (OD) and the pinhole diameter (PD), as shown in the diagram below.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

They are fabricated from 0.5 mm thick quartz glass substrates that have high transmission in the 200 - 2200 nm wavelength range. The clear aperture annulus is created using a chrome mask with an optical density of ≥6 that blocks light from being transmitted though the inner obstruction target and outer obstruction region. The AAOT is then mounted within an aluminum housing that has a 1" outer diameter for mounting within our translation mounts for Ø1" optics.

Features n V arious

Obstruction and Pinhole Diameters n 0 .5 mm Thick Quartz (Fused Silica) Substrate n B locking Region Created Using a Chrome Mask n A R Coating Over Chrome Mask n A luminum Housing with a 1" Outer Diameter n I deal for Image Enhancement

Obstruction Targets: Annular Aperture 0.05 < R1DF200

R1DF250 ITEM #

e RATIOa

e < 0.50

These Annular Aperture Obstruction Targets have In this close up photo of an annular obstruction pinhole, the pinhole an obstruction : pinhole diameter (PD) and obstruction diameter (OD) are labeled. The chrome-masked area appears black, and light is transmitted through the diameter ratio (e) between clear aperture. 0.05 and 0.50, making them ideal for use as high-pass and edge-enhancement filters and for dark field imaging applications. When the Fourier plane is imaged onto the filter, the center region, which contains homogenized light (TEM00), will become blocked by the center obstruction, allowing higher order modes of the Fourier plane, which contain diffraction information, to pass through and form the image. This will cause an overall loss of light intensity and generalized, smooth features, but it will enhance any sharp lines or boundaries. OBSTRUCTION DIAMETER

PINHOLE DIAMETER CENTRICITYb

GLASS THICKNESS

PRICE

R1DF50 R1DF100

0.05 0.10

50 µm 100 µm

$ $

150.00 150.00

R1DF150

0.15

150 µm

150.00

R1DF200

0.20

150.00

R1DF250 R1DF300

0.25 0.30

200 µm 0.5 mm 148 ± 68 µm 1 mm 250 µm 300 µm

$ $

150.00 150.00

R1DF400

0.40

400 µm

150.00

R1DF500

0.50

500 µm

150.00

a Ratio of the Obstruction Diameter to the Pinhole Diameter b Centricity of the Annulus with Respect to the Outer Diameter

432

R1CA300

of the Quartz Glass Substrate

Accessories

Obstruction Targets: Annular Aperture

e = 0.85

Microscope Components

These Annular Aperture Obstruction Targets have a constant obstruction : pinhole diameter ratio (e) of 0.85, making them ideal for increasing the lateral spatial resolution within confocal imaging systems. These filters are designed to be placed directly in front of the output of a light source such as a fiber-coupled laser. The system should be aligned so that the first bright diffraction spot of the light source is larger than the pinhole diameter of the annular aperture. Often used in two-photon excitation microscopy or confocal theta fluorescence microscopy, annular apertures augment the point spread function (PSF) of the focusing lens, effectively sharpening the main maximum on the focal plane and elongating the axial extent along the optical axis. However, in two-photon microscopy, the side maxima vanish, and the axial elongation is reduced, resulting in an overall gain in the lateral resolution without much loss in axial resolution.

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

These annular apertures have also been used to increase the axial and lateral resolution in far-field fluorescence light microscopy. The annular aperture augments the PSF of the lens while a confocal pinhole suppresses the side modes. This allows one to realize a resolution that is smaller than the wavelength range used for detection. ITEM #

e RATIOa

OBSTRUCTION DIAMETER

PINHOLE DIAMETER CENTRICITYb

Optical Components

R1CA500

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

R1CA1000

Laser Safety

GLASS THICKNESS

PRICE

R1CA50 R1CA100

42.5 µm 85 µm

50 µm 100 µm

$ $

150.00 150.00

R1CA200

170 µm

200 µm

150.00

R1CA300

255 µm

150.00

425 µm 680 µm

300 µm 0.5 mm 148 ± 68 µm 500 µm 800 µm

$ $

150.00 150.00

R1CA1000

850 µm

1000 µm

150.00

R1CA2000

1700 µm

2000 µm

150.00

0.85 R1CA500 R1CA800

a Ratio of the Obstruction Diameter to the Pinhole Diameter b Centricity of the Annulus with Respect to the Outer Diameter

Lab Supplies

of the Quartz Glass Substrate

Have you seen our …

Laser Scanning Essentials Kit Thorlabs’ Laser Scanning Essentials Kit is designed to help customers build their own laser scanning microscopy system. The kit includes a galvo-resonant scan head complete with scan and tube lenses, a 2-channel electronic control unit, and a computer with the ThorImageLS™ control software installed. Systems are available that have been optimized for one of two wavelength ranges: 400 - 750 nm or 650 - 1050 nm.

For More Details, See Pages 154 - 155 433

Accessories Microscope Components

Liquid Crystal Tunable Filters A Hyperspectral Imaging System Built Using the KURIOS-WB1 Liquid Crystal Filter and a 1500M-GE Scientific Camera (See Page 313) Mounted on an Olympus IX71 Microscope

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

KURIOS-WB1 Controller Included

Adaptive Optics

Thorlabs’ Liquid Crystal (LC) Tunable Bandpass Filters incorporate liquid crystal cells sandwiched between polarizing elements, much like Loyt or Solc filters, that are used to quickly change the transmission band within the wavelength range. These filters tune continuously over the operating wavelength range, providing rapid and vibrationless tuning of the filter’s center wavelength. Due to their rapid tuning capabilities, these liquid crystal tunable filters (LCTFs) are ideal for applications such as multispectral or hyperspectral imaging as well as for use with chargecoupled devices (CCDs). For instance, using these filters in conjunction with a CCD camera produces images with a much higher accuracy for color representation than using a standard CCD camera with a Bayer mosaic. This technique produces true spectral imaging and can thus show spectral features that would otherwise be impossible to detect.

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

425

KURIOS-WB1 Switching Time (ms)

Switching Times

Initial Wavelength (nm)

475 0.0 ms 5.0 ms 10 ms 15 ms 20 ms 25 ms 30 ms 35 ms

525 575 625 675 725 425

475

525

575

625

675

725

Initial Wavelength (nm)

0.0 ms

525

20 ms 40 ms

Out-of-Band Blocking

60 ms

575

80 ms

35 nm

11 nm, 22 nm, 42 nm (Selectable)

5 - 40 ms

5 - 200 ms

Clear Aperture (CA) Polarized Transmissiond @ 550 nm

Ø20 mm 45%

25% OD > 2

Resolution

1 nm

Tuning Accuracy

±FWHM/10

625

100 ms 120 ms

Angle of Incidence (Field of View)

675

140 ms

Wavelength Uniformity over CA

FWHM/8

Operating Temperature

0 to 40 °C

160 ms 725 425

475

525

575

625

675

725

Final Wavelength (nm) The lower graph is a plot of the switching times for the KURIOS-VB1 in 11 nm bandwidth mode. Other bandwidth modes may be up to 100 ms faster.

434

420 - 730 nm

Bandwidthb (FWHM @ 550 nm) Switching Speedc

475

KURIOS-VB1a

KURIOS-WB1

Wavelength Range

KURIOS-VB1 Switching Time (ms)

KURIOS-VB1 Tunable Filter Head (Controller Included)

ITEM #

Final Wavelength (nm)

425

These LCTFs provide some of the fastest switching times available on the market with reliability, stability, and accuracy. The switching times, which vary based on the initial and final wavelengths, can each fall between 5 ms and 200 ms.

±6°

Storage Temperature Dimensions (Optical Head)

-15 to 65 °C 52.5 mm x 52.5 mm x 48.5 mm

aThis product is in the final stages of development. Specifications are bBandwidth changes linearly with wavelength. cSwitching speed is dependent on the initial and final wavelengths. dInput polarization is aligned with the filter’s polarization axis.

subject to change.

52.5 mm x 52.5 mm x 78.5 mm

Accessories Microscope Components

Liquid Crystal Tunable Filters

Tunable Filter Spectrum

To optimize the switching times, these filters are equipped with a comprehensive selection of hardware and software features to best suit any system or application. The trigger options can allow the filter to either drive an external device, such as a camera, or be driven by an external device, such as a stage.

Polarized Transmission (%)

Switching Sequences

0 400

(b)

450

Polarized Bandwidth FWHM (nm)

70 60

550

600

650

Wavelength (nm) 475 nm 600 nm 725 nm

700

750

800

525 nm 650 nm

500 nm 625 nm

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

Tunable Filter Bandwidth KURIOS-WB1 KURIOS-VB1, 42 nm BW Mode KURIOS-VB1, 22 nm BW Mode KURIOS-VB1, 11 nm BW Mode

Alignment Tools

Laser Safety

40 30

Lab Supplies

20 10 0 425

Transmission (%)

500 450 nm 575 nm 700 nm

475

525

575

625

Wavelength (nm)

675

725

Tunable Filter Transmission KURIOS-WB1 KURIOS-VB1, 42 nm BW Mode KURIOS-VB1, 22 nm BW Mode KURIOS-VB1, 11 nm BW Mode

50 40 30 20 10 0 425

(a)

Optical Components

Hyperspectral Imaging

Targets and Reticles

425 nm 550 nm 675 nm

Mounting Options The front and back faces of these LC filters are compatible with our Ø1" lens tubes and 30 mm cage systems. The housings incorporate 8-32 (M4) taps on three sides for compatibility with our Ø1/2" posts on three sides. For more information on these rigid construction products, please see page 408.

Microscope Objectives

Transmission & Polarization Since these LC filters are made from stacks of LC cells and polarizers, they are not sensitive to the direction of propagation and may be used in either direction. Each face is marked with a white line that indicates the polarization axis for the device. For maximum transmission, the input beam should be linearly polarized and aligned with the polarization axis of the filter. Due to the special design of the filter configuration, the polarization axis is rotated by 90° front-to-back. For added operational stability, a closed-loop temperature control servo is used to ensure temperature regulation. Due to the structure of these filters, the bandwidth changes with the center wavelength and gradually increases for longer wavelengths.

Optomechanics

475

525

575

625

Wavelength (nm)

675

Two images of a root cell taken with the KURIOS-WB1 LC filter’s center wavelength set to (a) 500 nm and (b) 650 nm. Hyperspectral imaging resolves an image both spatially and spectrally by analyzing the sample with different wavelengths.

ITEM #

METRIC ITEM # KURIOS-WB1 KURIOS-WB1/M

PRICE $ 8,000.00

DESCRIPTION Liquid Crystal Tunable Filter, 35 nm FWHM, 420 - 730 nm, 8-32 (M4) Tap

KURIOS-VB1 KURIOS-VB1/M

$ 8,750.00

Liquid Crystal Tunable Filter, Selectable FWHM, 420 - 730 nm, 8-32 (M4) Tap

725

Thorlabs’ ColorTemperature Balancing Filters increase the color temperature of broadband light sources by attenuating light on the red end of the visible and nearIR spectrum and transmitting light on the blue end.

Visit www.thorlabs.com for Details

435

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Overview

Optomechanics

Thorlabs’ scanning galvanometer systems are mirrorGalvanometer Features positioning systems designed for integration into n 1 D and 2D Systems for Small (<5 mm) and custom laser beam steering applications. Both singleLarge (<10 mm) Beam Diameters and dual-axis systems are available for scanning in one n M oving Magnet Motor Design for Faster axis or two axes, respectively. In the diagram below, a typical dual-axis galvo system setup is presented. Response Light from the laser is scanned across the screen by n H igh-Precision Optical Mirror Position the rotation of the mirrors within the galvanometer Detection mirror system. The covered length (L) and width of n A nalog PD Control Electronics with Current the screen is determined by the maximum scan angle Damping and Error Limiter of the galvanometer system (Θ) and by the distance from the mirror to the screen (d). For each axis of the galvanometer system, a driver card controls the movement. Scanning galvanometer systems are useful in a number of applications, such as confocal laser scanning microscopy, where the specimen would take the place of the screen.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Motor/Mirror Assembly A galvanometer mirror assembly consists of a galvanometer-based scanning motor with an optical mirror mounted on the shaft and a detector that provides positional feedback to the control board. The moving magnet design for Thorlabs’ GVS series of galvanometer motors was chosen over a stationary magnet and rotating coil design in order to maximize response times and the system’s resonant frequency. For small beam systems, the position of the mirror is encoded using an optical sensing system located inside the motor housing. For large beam systems, a capacitive sensing system encodes the position of the mirror. Due to the large angular acceleration of the rotation shaft, the size, shape, and inertia of the mirrors become significant factors in the design of high-performance galvo systems. Furthermore, the mirror must remain rigid (flat) even when subjected to large accelerations. All these factors have been precisely balanced in our galvo systems to match the characteristics of the galvo motor and maximize performance of the system.

System Operation The servo driver must be connected to a DC power supply, the galvo motor, and an input voltage source. For continuous scanning applications, a function generator with a square or sine wave output is sufficient for scanning the galvo mirror over its entire range. For more complex scanning patterns, a programmable voltage source should be used. 436

White Screen L L = 2d (Tan Θ)

d Θ

X-Axis Driver Card

Laser Y-Axis Driver Card 2-Axis Galvo Block Diagram of a Typical 2-Axis Galvo Beam Steering System

The ratio between the input voltage and mirror position is switchable and can be 0.5 V/º, 0.8 V/º, or 1 V/º. For Thorlabs’ small beam systems, when set to 0.8 V/º, the ±10 V input will rotate the mirror over its full range of ±12.5°. For our large beam systems, the ±10 V input produces the full angular range of ±20° with a scaling factor of 0.5 V/º. The control circuit also provides monitoring outputs that allow the user to track the position of the mirror. In addition, voltages proportional to the drive current being supplied to the motor and the difference between the command position and the actual position of the mirror are given by the control circuit.

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Overview

Optomechanics

Closed-Loop Mirror Positioning For small beam systems, the angular orientation (position) of the mirror is optically encoded using an array of photocells and a light source. For large beam systems, a capacitive sensing system encodes the position of the mirror. Each of these encoding systems is incorporated into its respective galvanometer housing and allows for closed-loop operation of the galvo mirror system.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

GVS011 Single-Axis Large Beam Galvo/Mirror Assembly

Optical Components Adaptive Optics

Our small beam systems (see pages 438 - 441) can be driven to scan their full mechanical range of ±12.5° at a frequency of 100 Hz when using a square wave control input voltage or at 250 Hz when using a sine wave. For a single, small-angle step of 0.2°, it takes the mirror 300 µs to come to rest at the command position.

Illumination Sources Light Detection

The large beam systems (see pages 442 - 445) can be driven to scan their full ±20° range at a frequency of 65 Hz when using a square wave control input voltage or at 130 Hz when using a sine wave. For the same 0.2° small angle, the step response is 400 µs. For all systems, the maximum scan frequency is 1 kHz and the angular resolution is 0.0008° (15 µrad).

Alignment Tools

GVS002

Laser Safety

Dual-Axis Small Beam Galvo/Mirror Assembly

Lab Supplies

Servo Driver Board The Proportional Derivative (PD) servo driver circuit interprets the signals from the optical position detecting system inside the motor and then produces the drive voltage required to rotate the mirror to the desired position. The scanner uses a non-integrating, Class 0 servo that is ideal for use in applications that require vector positioning (e.g., laser marking), raster positioning (printing or scanning laser microscopy), and some step-and-hold applications. Furthermore, the proportional derivative controller gives excellent dynamic performance. The circuit includes an additional current term to ensure stability at high accelerations. The driver board and motor/mirror assembly are tuned at the factory to ensure maximum compatibility and performance and are clearly marked to ensure easy set up.

Servo Driver Board with Heat Sink (One Unit Included with Single-Axis Systems, Two Units Included with DualAxis Systems)

GPS011 Galvo System Power Supply

Power Supply Option The GPS011 is a 3 A RMS, ±15 VDC, linear two-channel switching power supply designed to power two galvo motor drivers. The unit has two outputs and comes with two power cables that are terminated so that they can be plugged directly into both the socket on the driver board and the power supply. The GPS011 can be used with either a 115 VAC or 230 VAC main input. The black power supply enclosure measures 274 mm x 179 mm x 122 mm (10.79" x 7.05" x 4.8"), has a cooling fan, and is protected from power surges by a main input fuse.

Galvanometer Selection Guide GALVANOMETER TYPE Small Beam (<5 mm Diameter) Large Beam (5 to 10 mm Diameter)

SECTION

PAGE

Systems

439

Kits

440

Accessories

441

Systems

443

Accessories

444

437

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Small Beams

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives

GALVANOMETER MOTOR/MIRROR SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

Targets and Reticles Optical Components

GVS002 Dual-Axis Small Beam Galvo/Mirror Assembly

Adaptive Optics

300 µs 15 µrad

40 ppm/°C 10 µrad/°C

Coil Resistance

2.2 Ω ± 10%

Coil Inductance

150 µH ± 10%

Rotor Inertia

0.02 g/cm2

Operating Temperature Range

0 to 40 °C

Motor Weight**

GVS00x (Silver) GVS30x (Dual Band) GVS10x (Gold)

*With GPS011 Linear PSU **Including Cables, Excluding Brackets

P-Polarized S-Polarized Unpolarized

525

530

Wavelength (nm)

535

540

545

400

500

600

96 94 P-Polarized S-Polarized Unpolarized

700

Wavelength (nm)

800

900

90 0.4

1000

Dual-Band Coating, 1064 nm

100

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.8

2.0

2.4

Protected Gold (45º AOI)

96 94 P-Polarized S-Polarized Unpolarized

1055

1060

1065

Wavelength (nm)

1070

1075

1080

90 600

800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400

Wavelength (nm)

The shaded regions in the graphs above denote the recommended wavelength ranges for these coatings. The dashed black line denotes the single recommended wavelength.

438

1.6

Wavelength (µm)

Reflectance (%)

P-Polarized, 45º AOI S-Polarized, 45º AOI Unpolarized, 8º AOI

98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 1050

Protected Silver (45º AOI)

100

Reflectance (%)

100 99

0.25 J/cm2 at 532 nm (10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø0.803 mm) 3 J/cm2 at 1064 nm (10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø1.000 mm) 5 J/cm2 at 1064 nm (10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø1.010 mm) 2 J/cm2 at 1064 nm (10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø1.000 mm)

GVS20x (E02)

Dual-Band Coating, 533 nm

50 g

Damage Threshold

90 300

99.9%

Zero Drift (Max)

520

5A 40 to 80 µA

Scale Drift (Max)

E02 (45º AOI)

100

Silver, Gold, E02-Coated, and Dual-Band Mirrors Available Online.

98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 515

Motor and Position Sensor Linearity

www.thorlabs.com

100 99

0.0008° (15 µrad)*

Optical Position Sensor Output Range

for Beams with a Diameter of Less than 5 mm n AR Coating on Mirrors (>95% Average Reflectance Over Range) • Broadband Dielectric E02 (400 nm - 750 nm) • Protected Silver (500 nm - 2.0 µm) • High-Power Dual-Band (532 nm and 1064 nm) • Protected Gold (800 nm - 20 µm) n S ingle- and Dual-Axis Versions Available for 1D or 2D Scanning, Respectively n R ange of Accessories Available Separately (See Pages 440 - 441) or with System in a Kit (See Page 440)

Lab Supplies

Small Angle Step Response

Peak Galvo Current

n I ntended

Laser Safety

±12.5°

Average Galvo Current

Features

Alignment Tools

Maximum Scan Angle (Mechanical Angle)

Typical Resolution

Single-Axis Small Beam Galvo/Mirror Assembly

Light Detection

5 mm

Repeatability

GVS001

Illumination Sources

Maximum Beam Diameter

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Small Beams

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

Servo Driver Board with Heat Sink (One Unit Included with SingleAxis Systems, Two Units Included with Dual-Axis Systems)

GPS011

Adaptive Optics

Galvo System Power Supply

Illumination Sources

DRIVE ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS Full Scale Bandwidth

100 Hz Square Wave, 250 Hz Sine Wave

Small Angle (±0.2°) Bandwidth

DC to 1 kHz

Small Angle Step Response

300 µs

Analog Position Signal Input Range

±10 V

Analog Signal Input Resistance

20 kΩ ± 1% (Differential Input)

Position Signal Output Resistance

1 kΩ ± 1%

Mechanical Position Signal Input Scale Factor

0.5 V/Degree, 0.8 V/Degree, or 1.0 V/Degree (Switchable)

Mechanical Position Signal Output Scale Factor

0.5 V/Degree

Power Supply

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

±15 to ±18 VDC

Operating Temperature Range

0 to 40 °C

Servo Board Size (L x W x H)*

3.35" x 2.9" x 1.73" (85 mm x 74 mm x 44 mm)

*Includes Mounting Bracket

ITEM # GVS201

PRICE 1,260.00

1D Small Beam Galvo System, BB Mirror for 400-750 nm, Motor, Drivers, and Cables

DESCRIPTION

GVS001 GVS301

$ 934.00 $ 1,260.00

1D Small Beam Galvo System, Dual Band Mirror for 532/1064 nm, Motor, Drivers, and Cables

GVS101

1,004.00

1D Small Beam Galvo System, Gold-Coated Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables

GVS202

2,260.00

2D Small Beam Galvo System, BB Mirror for 400-750 nm, Motor, Drivers, and Cables

GVS002

$ 1,905.00

GVS302

2,260.00

2D Small Beam Galvo System, Dual Band Mirror for 532/1064 nm, Motor, Drivers, and Cables

GVS102

1,905.00

2D Small Beam Galvo System, Gold-Coated Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables

GPS011

450.00

1D Small Beam Galvo System, Silver-Coated Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables

2D Small Beam Galvo System, Silver-Coated Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cable

Galvo Power Supply, Dual Output

Have you seen our...

Scan Lenses for Laser Scanning Microscopy

LSM02

LSM04

10X

LSM05-BB 1.6X

See Pages 204 - 205 for More Details 439

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Small Beam Kits

Optomechanics Heat Sink

Microscope Objectives

Enclosure for Servo Driver Cards

Targets and Reticles Optical Components

2D Galvo/Mirror Assembly

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Power Supply

GVSM002 Dual-Axis Small Beam Diameter Galvanometer System Kit

For convenience, Thorlabs supplies the GVS001 and GVS002 small-diameter galvanometers as part of a complete kit. The single-axis galvo mirror systems come with a single mirror mounted on a galvo motor, which is held in a small aluminum mount that can be secured to a larger structure. The kits also include the driver (with heat sink) for the galvo motor and four cables. The cable connecting the motor to the driver is connectorized on both ends, while the power, analog input, and output monitoring cables are only connectorized on the end that attaches to the driver circuit.

Kit Contents n 1 D

(GVS001) or 2D (GVS002) Galvo Mirror Assembly n Galvo Motor Mount and GHS003 Heat Sink n G alvo Motor Driver Cards, with Heat Sink and Cover n GPS011 Power Supply

The dual-axis galvo mirror systems come with two galvo motors, each with a protected-silver-coated mirror. The mirror on the second galvo motor is elongated so that the full scan range of both mirrors can be used. The mirrors are factory aligned so that the zero position of the two mirrors is orthogonal. Also included are two drivers (with heat sinks) and two of each of the cables included with the single-axis systems described above. ITEM # GVSM001 GVSM002 GPS011

METRIC ITEM # GVSM001/M

PRICE $ 1,461.00

DESCRIPTION 1D Small Beam Galvo Mirror System Kit, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GVSM002/M

2,431.00

2D Small Beam Galvo Mirror System Kit, 8-32 (M4) Tap

â&#x20AC;&#x201D;

450.00

Galvo Power Supply, Dual Output

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Small Beam Accessories 1) Heat Sink and Post Mount Typically, the galvo motors do not generate enough heat to need an additional heat sink. However, it may be necessary for applications that involve a rapidly changing drive signal waveform. The GHS003(/M) provides additional heat sinking for such conditions. This heat sink also serves as a post adapter, allowing the small beam galvo mirror assembly to be mounted on our 8-32 (M4 x 0.7)-threaded posts as shown in the image to the right. ITEM # GHS003

440

METRIC ITEM #

PRICE

GHS003/M $ 20.00

GHS003

Heat Sink for All GVS GVS002 Systems Mounted on a GHS003 Heat Sink (Post and Post Holder Not Included)

DESCRIPTION Galvanometer Heat Sink and Post Adapter, 8-32 (M4) Tap

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Small Beam Accessories Servo Driver Mounted in GCE001 Enclosure

2) Protective Cover for Servo Driver The GCE001 protective cover is designed to fit over the servo driver card supplied with the GVS series of galvo mirror systems.

PRICE

Optical Components

DESCRIPTION Galvo Driver Card Cover

GCE001 $ 56.00

Adaptive Optics

3) Galvo Mirror Adapter for Pitch/Yaw Platform The GTT001 adapter allows small beam Galvo Mirror Systems to be mounted onto the PY003 pitch and yaw platform (see our website for details). This platform, which provides an adjustment range of ±4° with an angular resolution of 10 arcsec, can greatly simplify the alignment of the galvo mirrors with respect to an incoming beam. When used with a post assembly, this pitch and yaw platform can be mounted to an optical table such that the top surface is at the proper beam height for your application. A suitable pitch/yaw platform is included with the GVS011 and GVS012 systems. ITEM #

PRICE

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

GCE001 ITEM #

Optomechanics

Illumination Sources Light Detection

GTT001

Alignment Tools Laser Safety

2D Galvo System with a GTT001 Adapter Mounted on a PY003 Pitch and Yaw Platform

Lab Supplies

DESCRIPTION Galvo Mount Tip-Tilt Platform Adapter

GTT001 $ 18.00 PY003 $ 197.40

Pitch and Yaw Platform with Micrometers

4) 30 mm Cage Cube Mount

GCM001

GCM002

The GCM001 and GCM002 30 mm cage cubes are designed to allow 1D and 2D small beam galvo mirrors, respectively, to be integrated into an optical setup built using Thorlabs’ cage construction system. The output and input ports on the cube are SM1 threaded (1.035"-40), which makes them compatible with all of our SM1 lens tubes (available on our website) and other SM1-threaded accessories and components. To mount the motors in the cubes, remove them from the holder they were shipped with, ITEM #

METRIC ITEM #

GCM001 — GCM002 GCM002/M

PRICE $ 120.00 $ 120.00

A Small Beam Galvanometer Mounted in a GCM001 Cage System Cube

insert them into the cage cube mounting block, and then replace the cage cube covers. The distance between the two mirrors in the GVS002 galvo mirror system is 10 mm (0.39"), which means that the optical axis of the cage system will be displaced vertically (or horizontally depending on system orientation) by the same 10 mm (0.39"). The 2D Galvo Cage System Mount also features an 8-32 (M4) tap for post mounting. DESCRIPTION 1D Galvo Cage System Mount 2D Galvo Cage System Mount, 8-32 (M4) Tap

441

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Large Beams

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives

GVS012 Dual-Axis Large Beam Galvo/Mirror Assembly

Targets and Reticles

GVS011 Single-Axis Large Beam Galvo/Mirror Assembly

Optical Components Adaptive Optics

GALVANOMETER MOTOR/MIRROR SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

Features n I ntended

for Beams with Diameters Between 5 mm and 10 mm n A R Coatings on Mirrors (>95% Average Reflectance Over Range) • UV-Enhanced Aluminum (250 nm - 450 nm) • Broadband Dielectric E02 (400 nm - 750 nm) • Protected Silver (500 nm - 2.0 µm) • High-Power Dual-Band (532 nm and 1064 nm) • Protected Gold (800 nm - 20 µm) n S ingle- and Dual-Axis Versions Available for 1D or 2D Scanning, Respectively n Post Mount Adapter Included n R ange of Accessories Available Separately (See the Next Page)

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

See More... Aluminum, Silver, Gold, E02-Coated, and Dual-Band Mirrors Available Online.

Maximum Beam Diameter Maximum Scan Angle (Mechanical Angle) Small Angle Step Response

10 mm

Repeatability

15 µrad

±20° 400 µs

Typical Resolution

0.0008° (15 µrad)*

Average Galvo Current

Peak Galvo Current Position Sensor Output Range Motor and Position Sensor Linearity

10 A 40 to 80 µA

Scale Drift (Max)

40 ppm/°C

99.9%

Zero Drift (Max)

10 µrad/°C

Coil Resistance

2.2 Ω ± 10%

Coil Inductance

150 µH ± 10%

Rotor Inertia

0.02 g.cm2

Operating Temperature Range

0 to 40 °C

Motor Weight**

94 g

Damage Threshold 0.3 J/cm2 at 355 nm (10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø0.381 mm) 0.25 J/cm2 at 532 nm (10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø0.803 mm) 3 J/cm2 at 1064 nm (10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø1.000 mm) 5 J/cm2 at 1064 nm (10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø1.010 mm) 2 J/cm2 at 1064 nm (10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø1.000 mm)

GVS41x (UV-Enhanced Aluminum) GVS21x (E02) GVS01x (Silver) GVS31x (Dual Band) GVS11x (Gold)

*With GPS011 Linear PSU **Including Cables, Excluding Brackets

UV-Enhanced Aluminum, 45º AOI

100

P-Polarized S-Polarized Unpolarized

90 85 80

Reflectance (%)

96 94

P-Polarized S-Polarized Unpolarized

98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 515

300

400

500

600

700

Wavelength (µm)

800

900

Dual-Band Coating, 533 nm

100 99

P-Polarized, 45º AOI S-Polarized, 45º AOI Unpolarized, 8º AOI 520

525

530

90 300

1000

535

540

545

98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 1050

400

500

600

96 94 P-Polarized S-Polarized Unpolarized

700

Wavelength (nm)

800

900

90 0.4

1000

Dual-Band Coating, 1064 nm

100

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

Wavelength (µm)

1.8

2.0

2.4

Protected Gold (45º AOI)

Reflectance (%)

200

100 99

442

Reflectance (%)

Protected Silver (45º AOI)

100

Reflectance (%)

E02 (45º AOI)

100

Reflectance (%)

www.thorlabs.com

96 94 92

1055

1060

1065

1070

1075

1080

90 600

P-Polarized S-Polarized Unpolarized 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400

Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) The shaded regions in the graphs above denote the recommended wavelength ranges for these coatings. The dashed black line denotes the single recommended wavelength.

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Large Beams 65 Hz Square Wave, 130 Hz Sine Wave

Full Scale Bandwidth Small Angle (±0.2°) Bandwidth

1 kHz

Small Angle Step Response

400 µs

Analog Position Signal Input Range

±10 V

Analog Signal Input Resistance

Optomechanics

Servo Driver Board with Heat Sink

DRIVE ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS

(One Unit Included with Single-Axis Systems, Two Units Included with DualAxis Systems)

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

20 kΩ ± 1% (Differential Input)

Position Signal Output Resistance

Adaptive Optics

1 kΩ ± 1%

Mechanical Position Signal Input Scale Factor

0.5 V/Degree, 0.8 V/Degree, or 1.0 V/Degree (Switchable)

Mechanical Position Signal Output Scale Factor

0.5 V/Degree

Power Supply

Illumination Sources Light Detection

±15 to ±18 VDC

Operating Temperature Range

0 to 40 °C

Servo Board Size (L x W x H)*

3.35" x 2.9" x 1.73" (85 mm x 74 mm x 44 mm)

Alignment Tools

GPS011 Galvo System Power Supply

Laser Safety

*Includes Mounting Bracket

Lab Supplies

3.40" 86.4 mm

Single-Axis Schematic

Beam In/out

Single-axis galvanometers include one mirror mounted on a galvo motor. This configuration allows the galvanometer system to scan along a line.

Dual-axis galvanometers include two mirrors, mounted on two separate, orthogonal galvo motors. This configuration allows the galvanometer system to scan over a twodimensional area. ITEM #

1.26" 32.0 mm

0.59" 15.0 mm

Dual-Axis Schematic

2.73" 69.3 mm

3.45" 87.7 mm 1.79" 45.5 mm

Beam In

Beam Out

2.64" 67.2 mm

1.44" 36.5 mm

2.02" 51.2 mm

3.38" 85.9 mm

GVS411

METRIC ITEM # GVS411/M

PRICE $ 1,460.00

GVS211

GVS211/M

$ 1,630.00

1D Large Beam Galvo System, Broadband Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GVS011

GVS011/M

$ 1,375.00

1D Large Beam Galvo System, Silver-Coated Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GVS311

GVS311/M

$ 1,795.00

1D Large Beam Galvo System, Dual-Band Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GVS111

GVS111/M

$ 1,460.00

1D Large Beam Galvo System, Gold-Coated Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GVS412

GVS412/M

$ 2,950.00

2D Large Beam Galvo System, UV-Enhanced Aluminum Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GVS212

GVS212/M

$ 3,050.00

2D Large Beam Galvo System, Broadband Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GVS012

GVS012/M

$ 2,785.00

2D Large Beam Galvo System, Silver-Coated Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GVS312

GVS312/M

$ 3,185.00

2D Large Beam Galvo System, Dual-Band Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GVS112

GVS112/M

$ 2,950.00

2D Large Beam Galvo System, Gold-Coated Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

GPS011

—

450.00

DESCRIPTION 1D Large Beam Galvo System, UV-Enhanced Aluminum Mirror, Motor, Drivers, and Cables, 8-32 (M4) Tap

Galvo Power Supply, Dual Output

443

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Large Beam Accessories

Optomechanics

1) Heat Sink

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Typically, the galvo motors do not generate enough heat to need an additional heat sink. However, it may be necessary for applications that involve a rapidly changing drive signal waveform. The GHS003(/M) provides additional heat sinking for such conditions.

GHS003 Heat Sink for All GVS Systems

ITEM # GHS003

METRIC ITEM #

PRICE

DESCRIPTION Galvanometer Heat Sink

GHS003/M $ 20.00

2) Protective Cover for Servo Driver

Servo Driver Mounted in GCE001 Enclosure

The GCE001 protective cover is designed to fit over the servo driver card supplied with any of our galvo mirror systems.

Lab Supplies

GCE001 ITEM #

PRICE

DESCRIPTION Galvo Driver Card Cover

GCE001 $ 56.00

3) Cage Adapter for Dual-Axis Galvo System Features n SM1-Threaded

(1.035"-40) Input and Output Ports n Gasket Included for Light-Tight Applications n All Mounting Screws Supplied

GCM012

The GCM012 Cage System Adapter is used to mount the GVSx12 dual-axis galvo systems into a 30 mm cage system. The adapter features SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) input and output ports. It also provides both 1/4"-20 (M6) and 8-32 (M4) taps for mounting. A gasket is included for use in light-tight applications, and all mounting screws are supplied. Note: The input and output ports are on different planes and are offset by 16.83 mm (0.66"). Cage systems should be adapted accordingly. ITEM # GCM012

444

METRIC ITEM # GCM012/M

PRICE $ 175.00

GCM012 Cage System Adapter Integrated with 30 mm Cage Components

DESCRIPTION 30 mm Cage Adapter for 10 mm Galvo System

Accessories Microscope Components

Galvanometer Mirror Systems: Large Beam Accessories 4) Mounting Bracket and Thread Adapters for Dual-Axis Galvo Mirror and Scan Lenses The GAS012 Mounting Bracket allows for the integration of our FTH100-1064, FTH160-1064, FTH2541064, or FTH160-1064-M39 F-Theta Scan Lenses or our LSM05 Telecentric Scan Lens with our galvanometer mirror pairs. It also allows the complete assembly to be integrated with optical-table- or breadboard-based optomechanical setups.

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

To use the GAS012 mounting bracket, a scan-lens-dependent thread adapter (sold below) must also be purchased. This places the lens at the recommended distance from the second galvo mirror. Please refer to the price box below for a description of which adapter is compatible with each scan lens.

Adaptive Optics

The bracket’s input light port is a plate equipped with both SM1 (1.035"-40) threading and four Ø6 mm cage rod holes for Ø1" lens tube and 30 mm cage system integration, respectively. The bottom mounting surface of the GAS012 has eight #8 (M4) and nine 1/4" (M6) through holes, spaced at 12.6 mm (0.496") and 25.2 mm (0.99"), respectively, for compatibility with both imperial and metric breadboards and optical tables. When mounted, the GVS012(/M) galvo mirror pair does not sit directly on this surface, allowing all of the through holes to be used for table or breadboard mounting.

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

GAS0121

GAS0122

GAS0123

GAS0124

Shown with the GAS012 Mounting Bracket and FTH160-1064 Scan Lens Featured on our Website.

Shown with the GAS012 Mounting Bracket and FTH254-1064 Scan Lens Featured on our Website.

Shown with the GAS012 Mounting Bracket and LSM05 Scan Lens Featured on our Website.

Shown with the GAS012 Mounting Bracket and FTH1601064-M39 Scan Lens Featured on our Website.

ITEM # GAS012 $

PRICE 150.00

DESCRIPTION Scan Lens and Galvo Mirror System Mounting Bracket

GAS0121

55.00

Scan Lens Thread Adapter for GAS012 Bracket and FTH100-1064 or FTH160-1064 Scan Lens

GAS0122

55.00

Scan Lens Thread Adapter for GAS012 Bracket and FTH254-1064 Scan Lens

GAS0123

55.00

Scan Lens Thread Adapter for GAS012 Bracket and LSM05 Scan Lens

GAS0124

55.00

Scan Lens Thread Adapter for GAS012 Bracket and FTH160-1064-M39 Scan Lens

Have you seen our...

Custom OCT Systems See Page 114 for More Information

Customized OCT Probe, or Sample Head, Designed to Allow Imaging of Liquid Within a Bottle

445

Accessories

Beam Expanders with Collimation Adjustment

Optomechanics

The BE Series of Galilean Beam Expanders can expand or reduce the diameter of a collimated beam with diffraction-limited performance. Beam expanders are useful for expanding a laser to fill the entrance pupil of an objective lens for a variety of applications including single-photon excitation, optical tweezers, and Raman spectroscopy.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

The compact, rugged housing contains a plano-concave singlet and a doublet designed to minimize aberrations in the recollimated beam. Both optics have broadband AR coatings to minimize surface reflections. A rotary barrel controls the adjustment of the collimating lens. Recommended mounts are listed in the tables below.

Lab Supplies

0.15 0.10 0.05 0.00

Max Input Quality: 20-10 Scratch-Dig Ø8 mm (Ø0.31") n AR Coating: Ravg < 0.5% Over Coating Range n Damage Threshold: 100 W/cm2 CW n SM05 and SM1 Lens Tube Compatible Body n 1" O.D. for Kinematic Mount Compatibility

Internal SM05 Thread

MAX INPUT 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 4.0 mm

INPUT APERTURE Ø8.0 mm

BE02M-B

4.0 mm

Ø8.0 mm

650 - 1050 nm

BE02M-C

4.0 mm

Ø8.0 mm

1050 - 1620 nm

Ø1" Mounting Ring

Max Input

Ø8 mm Scratch-Dig (Ø0.31") n AR Coating: Ravg < 0.5% Over Coating Range n Damage Threshold: 100 W/cm2 CW n SM05 Lens Tube Compatible Input Aperture Internal SM05 n 1" O.D. for Kinematic Mount Compatibility Thread INPUT APERTURE Ø8.0 mm

BE03M-B

4.5 mm

Ø8.0 mm

650 - 1050 nm

BE03M-C

4.5 mm

Ø8.0 mm

1050 - 1620 nm

Scratch-Dig n AR Coating: Ravg < 0.5% Over Coating Range n Damage Threshold: 100 W/cm2 CW n SM05 Lens Tube Compatible Input Aperture n 1" O.D. for Kinematic Mount Compatibility

FMP1, KS1, or KM100

71 - 78 mm (2.80" - 3.11") Ø1" Mounting Ring

Max Input Ø4.6 mm (Ø0.18")

Max Output Ø42 mm Ø28 mm (Ø1.65") (Ø1.10")

Internal 4-40 UNC, SM05 3 mm Deep Thread M3, 3 mm Deep

ITEM # BE05M-A

MAX INPUT 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 2.5 mm

INPUT APERTURE Ø4.6 mm

BE05M-B

2.5 mm

Ø4.6 mm

650 - 1050 nm

BE05M-C

2.5 mm

Ø4.6 mm

1050 - 1620 nm

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

469.20

RECOMMENDED MOUNTS**

**Find These Mounts Online at www.thorlabs.com

n Surface Quality: 20-10

446

Internal M3, 3 mm Deep M36 x 1.5 Thread

AR COATING RANGE PRICE 400 - 650 nm

5X Beam Expanders

64 - 69 mm (2.52" - 2.72")

4-40 UNC, 3 mm Deep

MAX INPUT 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 4.5 mm

BE05M

FMP1, KS1, or KM100

39.8 mm Max (Ø1.57") Output 28 mm (Ø1.10")

ITEM # BE03M-A

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

382.50

RECOMMENDED MOUNTS**

**Find These Mounts Online at www.thorlabs.com

n Surface Quality: 20-10

Internal SM1 Thread M3, 3 mm Deep 4-40 UNC, 3 mm Deep

AR COATING RANGE PRICE 400 - 650 nm

3X Beam Expanders

BE03M

Max Output Ø31 mm Ø16 mm (Ø1.22") (Ø0.63")

ITEM # BE02M-A

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

38 - 42 mm (1.5" - 1.7") Ø1" Mounting Ring

n Surface

BE02M

Input Beam Diameter (mm)

2X Beam Expanders

Alignment Tools Laser Safety

WFE vs. Input Beam Diameter 0.20

Wavefront Error (RMS)

Microscope Components

**Find These Mounts Online at www.thorlabs.com

AR COATING RANGE PRICE 400 - 650 nm $

448.80

Internal M36 x 1.5 Thread

RECOMMENDED MOUNTS** FMP1, KS1, or KM100

Accessories Microscope Components

Beam Expanders with Collimation Adjustment

Optomechanics

WFE vs. Input Beam Diameter

10X, 15X, and 20X Beam Expanders

Wavefront Error (RMS)

0.15

Microscope Objectives

n Surface 0.10

0.05

0.00 1.0

1.4

2.0

2.5

Quality: 20-10 Scratch-Dig n AR Coating: Ravg < 0.5% Over Coating Range n Damage Threshold: 100 W/cm2 CW n SM1 and SM2 Lens Tube Compatible Body n 2" O.D. for Kinematic Mount Compatibility

Input Beam Diameter (mm)

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

116 - 136 mm (4.57"- 5.35") Ø2" Mounting Ring

10X Beam Expanders

Illumination Sources

Max Input Ø4.6 mm (Ø0.18")

BE10M

Max Output Ø37 mm Ø56 mm (Ø1.46") (Ø2.20")

8-32 UNC, Internal SM1 Thread 6 mm Deep

10X

ITEM # BE10M-A

MAX INPUT 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 2.0 mm

INPUT APERTURE Ø4.6 mm

BE10M-B

2.0 mm

Ø4.6 mm

650 - 1050 nm

BE10M-C

2.0 mm

Ø4.6 mm

1050 - 1620 nm

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

Internal SM2 Thread M4, 6 mm Deep

AR COATING RANGE PRICE 400 - 650 nm $

520.20

BE15M

Lab Supplies

FMP2 or KS2

Max Output Ø59 mm Ø48 mm (Ø1.90") (Ø2.32")

Internal SM1 Thread

15X MAX INPUT 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 1.6 mm

INPUT APERTURE Ø4.6 mm

8-32 UNC, 6 mm Deep

Internal SM2 Thread

M4, 6 mm Deep

AR COATING RANGE PRICE 400 - 650 nm

BE15M-B

1.6 mm

Ø4.6 mm

650 - 1050 nm

BE15M-C

1.6 mm

Ø4.6 mm

1050 - 1620 nm

571.20

RECOMMENDED MOUNTS** FMP2 or KS2

**Find These Mounts Online at www.thorlabs.com

20X Beam Expanders

267 - 287 mm (10.51" - 11.30") Ø2" Mounting Ring Max Input Ø4.6 mm (Ø0.18")

BE20M

Max Output Ø48 mm Ø59 mm (Ø1.90") (Ø2.32") Internal SM1 Thread

20X

M4, 6 mm Deep

8-32 UNC, 6 mm Deep

ITEM # BE20M-A

MAX INPUT 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 1.2 mm

INPUT APERTURE Ø4.6 mm

BE20M-B

1.2 mm

Ø4.6 mm

650 - 1050 nm

BE20M-C

1.2 mm

Ø4.6 mm

1050 - 1620 nm

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

Laser Safety

197 - 215 mm (7.75" - 8.46") Ø2" Mounting Ring Max Input Ø4.6 mm (Ø0.18")

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

Alignment Tools

**Find These Mounts Online at www.thorlabs.com

15X Beam Expanders

ITEM # BE15M-A

RECOMMENDED MOUNTS**

Light Detection

AR COATING RANGE PRICE 400 - 650 nm $

724.20

Internal SM2 Thread

RECOMMENDED MOUNTS** FMP2 or KS2

**Find These Mounts Online at www.thorlabs.com

447

Accessories Microscope Components

Beam Expanders, Non-Rotating Optics

Optomechanics

Microscope Objectives

Sliding Collimation Adjustment High-Power Coatings

n n

UV Coatings Broadband or Narrowband Coatings

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

2.5X Beam Expanders 1/e2 Input: Ø4.4 mm Diameter: Ø38 mm

Illumination Sources

5X Beam Expanders 1/e2 Input: Ø2.2 mm Diameter: Ø38 mm

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

20X Beam Expanders 1/e2 Input: Ø0.6 mm Diameter: Ø38 mm

10X Beam Expanders 1/e2 Input: Ø1.1 mm Diameter: Ø38 mm

Thorlabs is in the process of updating the mechanical housing of these beam expanders. Please visit our website at www.thorlabs.com for up-to-date housing information.

Specifications

Features

n Wavefront

n Diverge,

Error: <λ/4 (Diffraction Limited) n Transmittance: >96% (>90% for E Coating) n Surface Quality • 10-5 Scratch-Dig (A, B, UV, and 1064 nm Coatings) • 20-10 Scratch-Dig (E Coating)

The ELU, EL, and ELQ series of Galilean Beam Expanders can expand or reduce the diameter of a collimated beam with an introduced wavefront error of less than λ/4 (i.e., diffraction-limited performance). A beam is often expanded so that it can fill the entrance pupil of an objective lens for a variety of applications including single-photon excitation, optical tweezers, and Raman spectroscopy. The housing contains two lenses that are designed to minimize aberrations in the recollimated beam. Both optics have broadband AR coatings to minimize surface 448

Collimate, or Focus the Output Beam n Collimation Adjustment Does Not Rotate Lens n Removable End Cap Protects Optics n Best Form AR-Coated Lenses

reflections. The input lens is mounted in a precisionmilled tube that can slide in and out of the main body containing the output lens. The sliding design allows for the adjustment of the collimating lens and minimizes the beam walk-off effect that is inherent to lens adjustments. These beam expanders can be mounted via either the 1/4"-20 or the M6-threaded hole in the base. They have threaded input apertures, which allow additional lenses and filters to be installed easily along the optical axis of the beam expander.

Accessories Microscope Components

Beam Expanders, Non-Rotating Optics

Optomechanics

UV Fused Silica Beam Expanders n Narrowband

AR Coating: 248 or 351 nm n AR Coating: Ravg < 0.2% n Damage Threshold (20 ns Pulses @ 20 Hz): 500 MW/cm2 ITEM # EXPANSION ELU-25-2.5X-248 2.5X ELU-25-2.5X-351

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

MAX INPUT 1/e2 INPUT SURFACE AR HOUSING BEAM DIAMETER* APERTURE QUALITY COATING DIMENSIONS PRICE 4.4 mm Ø9 mm 248 nm Ø38 x 126 mm $ 1,040.30

2.5X

4.4 mm

Ø9 mm

351 nm

Ø37.9 x 115 mm

1,040.30

2.2 mm

Ø10.9 mm

248 nm

Ø37.9 x 135 mm

1,040.30

ELU-25-5X-351

2.2 mm

Ø10.9 mm

Ø37.9 x 135 mm

1,040.30

10X

1.1 mm

Ø9 mm

10-5 Scratch-Dig

351 nm

ELU-25-10X-248

248 nm

Ø38 x 203 mm

1,040.30

ELU-25-10X-351

10X

1.1 mm

Ø10.9 mm

351 nm

Ø38 x 202.1 mm

1,040.30

ELU-25-20X-248

20X

0.6 mm

Ø3.5 mm

248 nm

Ø38 x 278 mm

1,252.40

ELU-25-20X-351

20X

0.6 mm

Ø3.8 mm

351 nm

Ø37.9 x 262.1 mm

ELU-25-5X-248

$ 1,252.40

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

AR Coatings • A (400 – 650 nm) • B (650 – 1050 nm) • E (3 – 5 µm) ITEM # EXPANSION EL-25-2.5X-A 2.5X EL-25-2.5X-B

n AR

Coating Reflectance • Ravg < 0.5% for A and B Coatings • Ravg < 2% for E Coating MAX INPUT 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 4.4 mm

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

Broadband Beam Expanders n Broadband

Optical Components

INPUT APERTURE Ø9 mm

n Damage

Threshold CW • 100 W/cm2 for A and B Coatings • 50 W/cm2 for E Coating

SURFACE QUALITY 10-5 Scratch-Dig

AR COATING RANGE 400 - 650 nm

HOUSING DIMENSIONS Ø38 x 126 mm

PRICE 999.90 999.90

2.5X

4.4 mm

Ø11 mm

10-5 Scratch-Dig

650 - 1050 nm

Ø37.9 x 115 mm

EL-25-3X-E

4.0 mm

Ø11 mm

20-10 Scratch-Dig

3 - 5 µm

Ø37.9 x 115 mm

$ 1,015.00

EL-25-5X-A

2.2 mm

Ø10.9 mm

10-5 Scratch-Dig

400 - 650 nm

Ø37.9 x 135 mm

999.90

EL-25-5X-B

2.2 mm

Ø10.9 mm

10-5 Scratch-Dig

650 - 1050 nm

Ø37.9 x 135 mm

999.90

EL-25-5X-E

2.2 mm

Ø11 mm

20-10 Scratch-Dig

3 - 5 µm

Ø37.9 x 115 mm

$ 1,015.00

EL-25-10X-A

10X

1.1 mm

Ø10.9 mm

10-5 Scratch-Dig

400 - 650 nm

Ø38 x 202.1 mm

EL-25-10X-B

10X

1.1 mm

Ø10.9 mm

10-5 Scratch-Dig

650 - 1050 nm

Ø38 x 202.1 mm

999.90

EL-25-20X-A

20X

0.6 mm

Ø3.8 mm

10-5 Scratch-Dig

400 - 650 nm

Ø37.9 x 262.1 mm

1,206.95

EL-25-20X-B

20X

0.6 mm

Ø3.5 mm

10-5 Scratch-Dig

650 - 1050 nm

Ø38 x 279 mm

1,206.95

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

999.90

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

1064 nm Beam Expanders n Narrowband

AR Coating: 1064 nm Coating: Ravg < 0.2% n Damage Threshold (20 ns Pulses @ 20 Hz): 2 GW/cm2 n AR

ITEM # EXPANSION ELQ-25-2.5X-1064 2.5X

MAX INPUT 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 4.4 mm

INPUT SURFACE APERTURE QUALITY Ø11 mm

AR COATING HOUSING RANGE DIMENSIONS PRICE 1064 nm ± 40 nm Ø38 x 126 mm $ 1,040.30

ELQ-25-5X-1064

2.2 mm

Ø37.9 x 135 mm

$ 1,040.30

10X

1.1 mm

Ø10.9 mm 10-5 Scratch-Dig Ø10.9 mm

1064 nm ± 40 nm

ELQ-25-10X-1064

1064 nm ± 40 nm

Ø38 x 202.1 mm

$ 1,040.30

ELQ-25-20X-1064

20X

0.6 mm

Ø3.5 mm

1064 nm ± 40 nm

Ø38 x 278 mm

$ 1,252.40

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

449

Accessories Microscope Components

Variable Beam Reducer/Expanders: 0.5X to 2X Range

Optomechanics

Applications

Microscope Objectives

n Match

Beam Diameter to the Entrance Pupil of an Objective n Match Beam Sizes when Illuminating an Object with Two Separate Beams n Functions as a Zero Magnification Collimation Device

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

BE052-A

Thorlabs’ 0.5X to 2X variable beam expanders allow the user to easily adjust the beam diameter without needing to adjust the alignment of the optical setup. In addition, the input lens can be translated in order to adjust the divergence/convergence of the output beam.

Features n Achromatic

The 11.0 mm wide mounting ring between the focus and magnification adjustment rings has a diameter of 1.20". As a result, our SM1RC Slip Ring (sold below) can be used to post mount the beam expander. Alternatively, the SM2A21 adapter presented below can be used to convert the mounting ring outer diameter to 2". 11.0 mm (0.43") Mounting Surface

SM1 (1.035"-40) External Thread

SM1 (1.035"-40) External Thread 30.5 mm 1.20"

Ø30.5 mm (Ø1.20")

SM05 (0.535"-40) Internal Thread

72.5 mm (2.85")

SM05 (0.535"-40) Internal Thread

Design Minimizes the Divergence of Multiwavelength Beams n Sliding Lenses to Reduce Beam Walk • Increase and Decrease Beam Size without Realigning the Setup

Specifications n Surface

Quality: 20-10 Scratch-Dig n Wavefront Error: <λ/4 with Beam Diameter 1/e2 < 6 mm n AR Coating: Ravg < 0.5% per Surface Over Coating Range n Input Clear Aperture: >9 mm n Magnification Range: 0.5X - 2X n Input/Output Mounting Threads • Internal: SM05 (0.535"-40) • External: SM1 (1.035"-40)

ITEM # BE052-A

MAX INPUT 1/e2 INPUT BEAM DIAMETER APERTURE AR COATING PRICE Ø6.0 mm (0.5X), Ø3.0 mm (2X) Ø10.0 mm 400 - 650 nm $ 790.00

BE052-B

Ø6.0 mm (0.5X), Ø3.0 mm (2X)

Ø10.0 mm

650 - 1050 nm

$ 790.00

Mounting Adapter The SM1RC Slim Lens Tube Slip Ring allows the BE052 series beam expanders to be post mounted by securing it in a mounting ring with a locking screw. Alternatively, the SM2A21 adapter allows a beam expander to fit in Ø2" holder equipped with SM2 (2.035"-40) external thread. ITEM #

450

PRICE

SM1RC

22.00

SM2A21

$ 42.90

SM1RC

SM2A21

DESCRIPTION Slim SM1 Lens Tube Slip Ring, Designed to Hold Ø1.20 Housings, 8-32-Tapped Hole for Mounting Ø1.20" to External SM2 (2.035"-40) Adapter

Accessories Microscope Components

Variable Beam Expanders Thorlabs’ BE series of variable Galilean beam Specifications expanders offer either 2X to 5X or 5X to 10X n 20-10 Scratch-Dig beam expansion. These lens-based expanders have n <λ/4 Wavefront Error antireflection-coated optics for maximum beam n Ravg < 0.5% over transmission and minimal back reflection over their Wavelength Range respective wavelength range. Three coating ranges are 2 available that cover 400 – 650 nm, 650 – 1050 nm, n 100 W/cm CW Damage Threshold or 1050 – 1620 nm.

Mounting is possible on the BE02-05 via 8-32 and M4 x 0.7 taps. The body has a 2" outside diameter for mounting in a kinematic mount such as the KS2 (visit our website at www. thorlabs.com). The BE05-10 has a 1/4"-20 and an M6 x 1.0 tap for post mounting.

n Expand

or Reduce the Diameter of a Collimated Monochromatic Beam n Match Beam Diameter to the Entrance Pupil of an Objective Lens n Match Beam Sizes when Illuminating an Object with Two Separate Beams

0.30

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Alignment Tools

BE02-05 BE05-10

Laser Safety

0.25 0.20

Lab Supplies

0.15 0.10

Microscope Objectives

Light Detection

Wavefront Error vs. Magnification

0.35

Wavefront Error

Each beam expander has a rotating zoom mechanism, which can be locked with a setscrew once the desired beam expansion is achieved. Lens-based beam expanders are well suited for expanding or reducing the diameter of a collimated monochromatic beam. These expanders are suitable for a broad wavelength range and thus offer adjustable focus to compensate for the wavelength of light you are expanding or reducing.

Optomechanics

Applications

Magnification (Ø3 mm Input)

189 - 195 mm (7.44" - 7.68")

Ø2" Mounting Ring

Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings.

Ø60 mm (Ø2.36")

BE02-05-C Internal SM1 Thread

BE02-05

Internal SM2 Thread

2X - 5X Beam Expanders ITEM # BE02-05-A

WAVELENGTH RANGE 400 – 650 nm

MAX 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 4.0 mm

INPUT APERTURE PRICE Ø8.0 mm $ 1,155.00

BE02-05-B

650 – 1050 nm

4.0 mm

Ø8.0 mm

$ 1,155.00

BE02-05-C

1050 – 1620 nm

4.0 mm

Ø8.0 mm

$ 1,320.00

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

251 mm (9.9")

BE05-10-B

Max Input Ø10 mm (Ø0.39")

SM05 Thread

Max Output Ø45 mm (Ø1.77") Internal SM2 Thread

BE05-10

Internal SM2 Thread

5X - 10X Beam Expanders ITEM # BE05-10-A

WAVELENGTH RANGE 400 – 650 nm

MAX 1/e2 BEAM DIAMETER* 2.3 mm

INPUT APERTURE PRICE Ø8.0 mm $ 1,895.00

BE05-10-B

650 – 1050 nm

2.3 mm

Ø8.0 mm

$ 1,895.00

BE05-10-C

1050 – 1620 nm

2.3 mm

Ø8.0 mm

$ 1,895.00

*For Diffraction-Limited Performance

451

Accessories Microscope Components

Reflective Beam Expanders

Optomechanics

Specifications

Microscope Objectives

n RMS

Wavefront Error: λ/10 • Ø1.5 mm Input for BE02R • Ø1 mm Input for BE04R • Ø0.5 mm Input for BE06R n Max 1/e2 Input (Expansion) Beam Diameter: 3 mm n Clear Input Aperture: Ø6 mm n Surface Quality: 40-20 Scratch-Dig n Protected-Silver Coating: Ravg > 97.5% from 450 nm to 2 µm

Targets and Reticles Optical Components

BE02R 2X

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

BE04R 4X

Alignment Tools

BE06R 6X

Laser Safety

Focal Length Shift Comparison

0.40 0.35 0.30

Diopters

Lab Supplies

Input is Angled Relative to Output Beam

0.05 0.00 -0.05 350

% Reflectance

Thorlabs’ Reflective Beam Expanders use a pair of prealigned protected-silver-coated spherical mirrors to provide 2X, 4X, or 6X beam expansion or reduction for a variety of applications, including single-photon excitation, optical tweezers, and Raman spectroscopy. Unlike our transmissive beam expanders, they exhibit virtually zero chromatic aberration, making them especially suitable for use with broadband sources and femtosecond pulsed lasers. The protected silver mirrors provide high reflectance over a broad spectral range (Ravg > 97.5% from 450 nm to 2 µm and Ravg > 96% from 2 µm to 20 µm), minimize the phase delays and absorption losses introduced by transmissive optics, and offer a low wavefront error of λ/10. 4.92" (125.0 mm)

0.25 0.20 0.15 0.10

100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90

400

450

500

0.4

16.4°

2.44" (62.0 mm)

76° BE02R

79° BE04R

5.87" (149.0 mm)

3.39" (86.0 mm)

79°

650

Wavelength (nm)

2.60" (66.0 mm)

3.39" (86.0 mm)

600

Protected Silver Coating, 12˚ AOI

2.60" (66.0 mm)

452

550

Wavelength (nm)

6.54" (166.0 mm) BE06R BE02R

Accessories Microscope Components

Reflective Beam Expanders To simplify alignment, the input and output ports of each beam expander have SM05 (0.535"-40), SM1 (1.035"-40), or SM30 (M30.5 x 0.5) threading for compatibility with our SM-threaded lens tubes, as well as four 4-40 tapped holes for compatibility with either our 16 mm or 30 mm cage systems. The SM threading and cage compatibility of each beam expander is detailed in the table to the right.

ITEM # Magnification

Output Port

METRIC ITEM #

BE04R(/M)

BE06R(/M)

16 mm

30 mm

Lens Tube

SM05

Cage System

16 mm

30 mm

Lens Tube

SM05

SM1

SM30

The table above gives the compatibility of these beam expanders with our cage systems and lens tubes. These beam expanders offer compatibility with our SM05-threaded (0.535"-40), SM30-threaded (M30.5-0.5), or SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) lens tubes. We also offer compatibility with our 16 mm Cage Systems (four Ø4 mm rods fit into holes spaced 16 mm apart) and our 30 mm cage systems (four Ø6 mm rods fit into holes spaced 30 mm apart). Please see our cage system and lens tube presentations on the web for more information.

To secure the beam expanders to an optical table, use two CL2, CL3, or CL6 Table Clamps to hold the lip of the housing against the table’s surface. Alternatively, the BE04R and BE06R beam expanders have through holes that accept 1/4"-20 and M6 cap screws, which can be used to mount the beam expander directly to the table or to elevate it using Ø1" Pedestal Pillar Posts. If vertical mounting is desired, each beam expander includes a mounting plate with four 8-32 (M4) tapped holes at 1" (25 mm) spacings, suitable for connecting the housing to Ø1/2" Posts. For more details about these products, please visit www.thorlabs.com. ITEM #

Cage System

Input Port

BE02R(/M)

PRICE

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Alignment into BE04R Beam Expander using CPA1 Alignment Plate, SM1D12D Ring-Activated Iris, and 30 mm Cage Rods (Visit our Website at www.thorlabs.com for More Details)

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

BE02R BE04R

BE02R/M

$ 563.00

DESCRIPTION 2X Reflective Beam Expander, 8-32(M4) Mounting Plate

BE04R/M

$ 750.00

4X Reflective Beam Expander, 8-32(M4) Mounting Plate

BE06R

BE06R/M

$ 850.00

6X Reflective Beam Expander, 8-32(M4) Mounting Plate

Have you seen our...

Femtosecond Ti:Sapphire Laser ◆ R obust

Design and Compact Footprint ◆ O ptimized for High-Power or Broadband Output

◆ P ulse

Widths of 6 fs or 10 fs ◆ R epetition Rate: 85 MHz

Spectrum Emitted by the OCTAVIUS-85M

OCTAVIUS-85M 85 MHz Ti:Sapphire Oscillator

See Pages 141 - 143 for More Information 453

Accessories Microscope Components

Pockels Cells

Optomechanics

Features n V oltage-Controlled

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

EO-PC-850

Thorlabs’ Pockels Cells offer fast, precise control of the output light’s polarization direction as a function of applied voltage. They can be thought of as voltage-controlled wave plates.

Wave Plate n I deal for Q-Switching n 3 Wavelength Range Options • 425 - 700 nm • 700 - 1000 nm • 1064 nm n L ongitudinal Pockels Cell n W edged Windows for 0° Offset and Minimal Back Reflection

Our family of Pockels cells uses a potassium di-deuterium phosphate (KD*P) crystal with the electric field applied in the longitudinal direction. Using the longitudinal orientation causes the drive voltage to be independent of aperture size, thus allowing for larger apertures than can be realized in a transverse Pockels cell.

EO-PC-550

Since the response is much faster than standard acousto-optic or liquid crystal devices, Pockels cells are ideal for Q-switching lasers. Our Pockels cells utilize wedged windows to ensure 0° offset and to minimize back reflections. The windows are AR coated for 425 - 700 nm, 700 - 1000 nm, or 1064 nm. We recommend a drive voltage no greater than 6 kV, as excessive voltage can damage the crystal. These Pockels cells can be modulated up to a frequency of 5 kHz. For general use, a power supply capable of up to 5 kHz modulation and 5 - 6 kV output is recommended. For applications such as Q-switching, fast rise times (on the order of 50 ns) are desired and the user should ensure that his or her power supply is capable providing such fast rise times. To create the electrical connections, these Pockels cells EO-PC-550 Pockels Cell in have two electrical sockets for 1 mm pins. KM200V Kinematic V-Clamp Mount (Sold Separately)

ITEM #

EO-PC-550

EO-PC-850

EO-PC-1064

Wavelength Range

425 - 700 nm

700 - 1000 nm

1064 nm

Design Wavelength

532 nm

785 nm

1064 nm

Aperture

Ø9.5 mm

Clear Aperture

Ø9.0 mm

Transmission Half-Wave Voltage Extinction Ratiob Capacitance aWe do not recommend applying a voltage bSpecified at the design wavelength.

454

>99% 3.3 kV @ 532 nm

5 kV @ 800 nm

6.6 kV @ 1064 nma

>250:1

>550:1

>1000:1

8 pF greater than 6 kV. If half-wave retardance is desired, we recommend setting the Pockels cell to act as a quarter-wave plate in a double-pass beam geometry.

Accessories Microscope Components

Pockels Cells Pockels Cell Extinction Ratio

1000

4.0

3.0

600

Voltage (kV)

Extinction Ratio

Microscope Objectives

3.5

800

400

Targets and Reticles

2.5

Optical Components

2.0

200 0 400

1.5

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1.0 400

1100

Adaptive Optics

500

600

700

Wavelength (nm)

1100

5 4 3

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

99.5 99.0

Transmission (%)

Voltage (kV)

1000

EO-PC-550 Transmission

Laser Safety

98.5

Lab Supplies

98.0 97.5

500

600

700

800

900

1000

97.0 400

1100

450

500

550

600

650

700

1150

1200

Wavelength (nm)

EO-PC-81064 Transmission

EO-PC-850 Transmission 100.0

100.0

99.5

99.0

Transmission (%)

900

100.0

98.5 98.0 97.5 97.0 600

800

Wavelength (nm)

Pockels Cell Half-Wave Voltage

2 400

Optomechanics

Pockels Cell Quarter-Wave Voltage

98.5 98.0 97.5

650

700

750

800

850

900

950

1000

97.0 900

950

Wavelength (nm)

1000

1050

1100

Wavelength (nm)

The shaded regions in the graphs above denote the recommended wavelength ranges for these Pockels Cells. In the EO-PC-1064 graph, the black line denotes the single recommended wavelength.

ITEM #* EO-PC-550

$ 2,200.00

DESCRIPTION Pockels Cell, 425 - 700 nm

EO-PC-850

2,200.00

Pockels Cell, 700 - 1000 nm

EO-PC-1064

2,200.00

Pockels Cell, 1064 nm

*Please

PRICE

note that Thorlabs does not currently offer Pockels cell drivers. Contact Tech Support for a recommendation.

Have you seen our...

Electro-Optic Modulators

EO-PM-NR-C2 Phase Modulator

EO-AM-NR-C3 Amplitude Modulator

Visit our website at www.thorlabs.com for more information. 455

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

Adaptive Optics Overview Applications n Microscopy n AO-OCT

Systems Imaging n Laser Communications n Interferometric Sensing n High Contrast Astronomical Imaging n Ultrafast Sciences n Ophthalmic

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Introduction Adaptive optics (AO) is a rapidly growing multidisciplinary field encompassing physics, chemistry, electronics, and computer science. AO systems are used to correct (shape) the wavefront of a beam of light. Historically, these systems have their roots in the international astronomy and US defense communities. Astronomers realized that if they could compensate for the aberrations caused by atmospheric turbulence, they would be able to generate higher resolution astronomical images; with sharper images comes an additional gain in contrast, which is also advantageous for astronomers since it means that they can detect fainter objects that would otherwise go unnoticed. While astronomers were trying to overcome the blurring effects of atmospheric turbulence, defense contractors were interested in improving their ability to image satellites. More recently, due to advancements in the sophistication and simplicity of AO components, researchers have utilized

WFS20-5C Fast CMOS-Based Wavefront Sensor (See Pages 474 - 479)

456

Deformable Mirror Head 140 Actuator Deformable Mirror See Pages 472 - 473

these systems to make breakthroughs in the areas of femtosecond pulse shaping, microscopy, laser communication, vision correction, and retinal imaging. Although dramatically different fields, all of these areas benefit from an AO system due to undesirable time-varying optical effects. Typically, an AO system is comprised from three components: (1) a wavefront sensor, which measures wavefront deviations, (2) an Close up of Deformable Mirror adaptive optical element, such as a deformable mirror, which can change shape in order to modify a highly distorted optical wavefront, and (3) real-time control software, which uses the information collected by the wavefront sensor to calculate the appropriate shape that the deformable mirror should assume in order to compensate for the distorted wavefront. Together, these three components operate in a closed-loop fashion. The changes in the wavefront are measured, the measured wavefront is assessed, and the control system sends new signals to the AO device to correct the wavefront. Differences between each measured wavefront and a reference wavefront generate a change in the control signal to the deformable mirror to compensate for the discrepancy. In principle, this closed-loop system is fundamentally simple; in the case of a Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor, the

Accessories Microscope Components

Adaptive Optics Overview

Optomechanics

x- and y-slopes of the wavefront are measured for numerous spots over the incident wavefront. The difference between these measured slopes and the slopes stored for a reference wavefront affect a change in the control signal to the deformable mirror to compensate for the differences. This process is repeated as long as the system is in correction mode. Through this procedure, the AO system is able to improve optical resolution of an image by removing aberrations from the wavefront of the light being imaged.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

WFS150-5C CCD-Based Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor (See Pages 474 - 479)

Aberration Compensation Abilities

Adaptive Optics Software Screen Capture

Aberrations arise from departures from ideal paraxial optics theory. When aberrations are present, the peak intensity will be reduced and the image or laser beam propagating to a target will not reach diffraction-limited resolution. Adaptive optics are capable of correcting all types of monochromatic aberrations (e.g., spherical aberration, coma, astigmatism, field curvature, and distortion) from a wavefront. Chromatic aberrations (multiple wavelengths), however, cannot be corrected using conventional adaptive optics.

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Adaptive Optics Kit Shown with 32 Actuator Deformable Mirror and CCD-Based Wavefront Sensor (Breadboard Not Included)

457

Accessories Microscope Components

Adaptive Optics Overview

Optomechanics

Monochromatic Aberrations Overview

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

Adaptive Optics systems are able to correct all five primary as well as higher order aberrations. The surface of the deformable mirror in an adaptive optics system is adjusted to compensate for all these aberrations. The primary aberrations include the following: n Spherical

n Coma

n Astigmatism

n Field

Curvature

n Distortion

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Spherical Aberration Spherical aberrations are caused by rays of light incident on the edges of a lens that undergo stronger refraction due to the sharper slope of the (a) (b) (c) (d) lens surfaces at the edges. As a result, the rays on the edges of the lens will converge at a different location than the central rays as shown in frame (c) above. Unlike a perfect lens (refer to frame a), there is not a unique axial focal point for the incoming light. Spherical aberrations degrade resolution by redistributing some light from the central bright spot (shown in frame b) to the concentric rings of the Airy diffraction pattern as shown in frame (d).

Coma Coma, or comatic aberration, is associated with off-axis object points. Off-axis light, incident on a lens, undergoes different amounts of refraction depending on where (a) (b) individual rays hit the lens (refer to frame a). As a result, each annulus of light focuses onto the image plane at different locations with a different spot size, leading to varying transverse magnifications. Coma leads to an asymmetrical, comet-like diffraction pattern, as shown in (frame b).

458

Accessories Microscope Components

Adaptive Optics Overview Astigmatism

Optomechanics

Sagittal Plane

Targets and Reticles

Optical Axis

Tangential Ray

Sagittal Lens

Chief Ray

Object Point

Microscope Objectives

Tangential Plane

Object Optical Axis

Optical Components

Tangential Focus

(a)

Sagittal Focus

Adaptive Optics

(b)

Astigmatism, similar to coma, arises when an object point is moved off axis (a). The incident cone of light will obliquely strike the lens, leading to a refracted wavefront characterized by two principle curvatures that create two different focal planes* (b).

(c)

(d)

The amount of astigmatism present dictates the distance between the two foci. Astigmatism leads to two elongated diffraction patterns, as shown in frames (c) and (d).

*Third-order astigmatism occurs in rotationally symmetric optical systems. Another form of astigmatism occurs in non-rotationally symmetric optical systems, such as a cylindrical lens. In such systems, on-axis object points will have multiple foci.

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Field Curvature

(a)

(b)

The final image of most optical systems is usually projected onto a planar surface. In actuality, a lens creates an image on a curved (Petzval) surface as shown in frame (a). Field curvature arises from forcing a curved image surface onto a flat plane.

Distortion

(a)

Pincushion

Ideal

(b)

Barrel

(c)

As a result, only certain regions of a plane will be in focus, such as the central portion (refer to frame b) if the image plane is in location A or the edges if the image plane is moved to location B (refer to frame c).

Distortion arises from imperfect lenses where different areas of the lens have different focal lengths and therefore magnifications. When transverse magnification increases with axial distance, pincushion distortion occurs (refer to frame a). When transverse magnification is decreased, barrel distortion occurs (frame c); an ideal lens will produce zero distortion (frame b). 459

Accessories Microscope Components

Adaptive Optics Kits

Optomechanics

Adaptive Optics Kit Shown with a 140 Actuator Deformable Mirror and CMOS-Based Wavefront Sensor (Breadboard Not Included)

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Minimal Assembly Required Overview Features n Complete

Kit for Wavefront Measurement and Control n Includes MEMS-Based Continuous Face-Sheet Deformable Mirror, Shack Hartmann Wavefront Sensor, and All Required Optics and Mechanics (Partially Pre-Assembled) n Control Software for Closed-Loop Operation n Software Development Kit Included n Operating Wavelength • 400 – 1100 nm (Aluminum-Coated DM) • 600 – 1100 nm (Gold-Coated DM) n Options • CCD- or CMOS-Based Wavefront Sensor • 1 40 (12 x 12 Array) or 32 (6 x 6 Array) Actuator Deformable Mirror • Gold- or Aluminum-Coated (12 x 12 Array Only) Deformable Mirror n 3.5 µm Stroke with 14-Bit Control and Zero Hysteresis, Provides Higher Repeatable Precision Wavefront Control than Other DM Technologies 460

Thorlabs’ Adaptive Optics (AO) Kits are designed to enable easy integration of wavefront correction into research imaging systems. Each kit includes a MEMS-based deformable mirror manufactured by Boston Micromachines Corporation, a Thorlabs Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor, all necessary imaging optics and mounting hardware, application software, a full-featured software development kit (SDK), and Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for integration of adaptive optics into end-user software. Three beam expander sections are shipped as pre-aligned optomechanical sections that only need to be arranged on a user-supplied breadboard, providing a near out-of-the-box solution for real-time wavefront analysis and correction. Thorlabs now offers six variations of AO Kits. Choose from either a gold- or aluminum-coated deformable mirror with 140 actuators or a goldcoated deformable mirror with 32 actuators and a CCD- or CMOS-based Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor. Details on all six AO Kit options are outlined on the next page.

Accessories Microscope Components

Adaptive Optics Kits

Optomechanics

Deformable Mirror n 6

x 6 (Mini-DM) or 12 x 12 (Multi-DM) Actuator Layout n 3.5 μm Maximum Actuator Displacement n High-Speed Operation up to 3.5 kHz n Zero Hysteresis Actuator Displacement

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

See Pages 472 - 473 for Additional Details

Adaptive Optics

Wavefront Sensor

Illumination Sources

n Two

Models: • CCD Based (Sensitivity up to l/50 rms) • High-Speed, CMOS Based (>800 fps) n Real-Time Wavefront and Intensity Distribution Measurements

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

See Pages 474 - 479 for Additional Details

Lab Supplies

Included Light Source Visit our Website to see Thorlabs’ Complete Line of Laser Diode Modules.

n Collimated

Laser Module n 635 nm Central Wavelength n 1 mW Output Power

Kit Specifications: Order & Pricing Information on Page 467 KIT ITEM # Deformable Mirror Item # Mirror Coating

AOK1-UM01

AOK1-UP01

AOK5-UM01a

AOK5-UP01a

DM140A-35-UM01

DM140A-35-UP01

DM140A-35-UM01

DM140A-35-UP01

Gold

Aluminum

Gold

Aluminum

DM32-35-UM01 Gold

12 x 12 (140 Actuators)b

6 x 6 (32 Actuators)b

3.5 µm (5.5 µm Available Upon Request)

Actuator Array Actuator Stroke (Max)

AOK6-UM01a

AOK2-UM01

Actuator Pitch

400 µm

Clear Aperture

4.4 mm x 4.4 mm

2.0 mm x 2.0 mm

Acceptance Angle

±18º

N/A

Average Step Size

<1 nm

Wavefront Sensorc

WFS150-5C

WFS20-5C

WFS150-5C

Sensor Type

CCD

CMOS

CCD

CMOS

Frame Rate (Max)d

8 Hz

>190 Hze

8 Hz

>190 Hze

Wavelength Range Camera Resolution (Max) Pixel Size Number of Lenslets (Max)h

300 – 1100 nm 1280 x 1024 Pixels (Selectable)f

1440 x 1080 Pixels (Selectable)g

1280 x 1024 Pixels (Selectable)f

1440 x 1080 Pixels (Selectable)g

4.65 µm x 4.65 µm

5.0 µm x 5.0 µm

4.65 µm x 4.65 µm

5.0 µm x 5.0 µm

21 x 21

23 x 23

21 x 21

Wavefront Dynamic Rangei Wavefront Sensitivityi Exposure Range a These

WFS20-5C

>100 l l/50 rms 77 µs - 66 ms

kits are in the final stages of development. Specifications are subject to change. b The 4 corner actuators are inactive. c All technical data is specified at 23 ± 5 ˚C and 45 ± 15% relative humidity. d This frame rate represents the maximum achievable frame rate when the wavefront sensor is used with the Adaptive Optics Kit. The CCD-based and CMOS-based wavefront sensors included in the kits are capable of achieving frame rates of up to 15 Hz and 880 Hz, respectively, when used independently. For complete specifications for the wavefront sensors, see page 479.

23 x 23 >100 l

l/100 rms

l/50 rms

l/100 rms

4 µs - 83.3 ms

77 µs - 66 ms

4 µs - 83.3 ms

eNo

graphics windows open; Control Loop Gain set at 100; Numeric display of RMS WFE and P-V WFE; Running on Windows 7 (64 bit) operating system; Intel Core i7-2600 (3.40 GHz) CPU; 8 GB RAM (Recommended). f Set to 768 x 768 g Set to 360 x 360 h This is preset in the AO Kit Software and cannot be changed. For the full range of specifications for these wavefront sensors when used independently of the AO Kit, see pages 476 - 479. i @ 633 nm

461

Accessories Microscope Components

Adaptive Optics Kits

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

Close up of Deformable Mirror

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

DM32-35-UM01

DM140A-35-UM01

32 Actuator Deformable Mirror Head

140 Actuator Deformable Mirror Head

Deformable Mirrors Thorlabs offers three Deformable Mirror (DM) options for the Adaptive Optics Kits. Four Kits incorporate Boston Micromachines Corporation’s (BMC’s) 140 actuator deformable mirror (Multi-DM) while the other two options incorporate BMC’s 32 actuator deformable mirror (Mini-DM). The Multi-DM is available with either an aluminum- or gold-coated mirror, while the Mini-DM is available with a gold-coated mirror.

Have you seen our...

Piezoelectric Deformable Mirror ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

Silver-Coated Mirror Designed for Ø10 mm Beams 40 Actuators Arranged in a Concentric Keystone Pattern Three Bimorph Arms for Tip/Tilt Correction 4 kHz Update Rate Built-In High-Voltage Driver Compact 64.0 mm x 60.0 mm x 30.9 mm Housing Thorlabs’ Piezoelectric Deformable Mirrors can correct highly distorted wavefronts of beams up to 10 mm in diameter. The mirror can correct for distortions that result from common sources of aberration and includes a separate mechanism to adjust for the tip/ tit. Each mirror is shipped with control software and a quick start guide.

See Pages 469 - 471 462

All DMs have a protective 6° wedged window in front of the mirror with a broadband AR coating for the 400 – 1100 nm range (custom AR coatings are available upon request). When combined with a Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor, the kits are designed for use in either the 600 – 1100 nm (gold-coated mirror) or the 400 – 1100 nm (aluminum-coated mirror) range. Micro-electro-mechanical (MEMS) deformable mirrors are widely used for wavefront shaping applications mainly due to their versatility and ability to produce sub-nanometer, highresolution wavefront correction. Unlike piezoelectric mirrors, the electrostatic actuation used with these DMs ensures deformation without hysteresis. Additionally, MEMS devices can be operated at faster speeds.

Deformable Mirror Composition Membrane Surface Actuator Post Actuator Surface Actuator Support Electrodes Silicone Substrate

Accessories

Adaptive Optics Kits 4.0

3.5

3.0

2.5

% Reflectivity

Reflectivity vs. Wavelength of AR Coating (Normal Incidence)

Deformable Mirror Coating Curves

100

60 50

Unprotected Gold Unprotected Aluminum

0.0 2000

2500

Targets and Reticles Optical Components

1.0 0.5

1500

Microscope Objectives

1.5

20 1000

Optomechanics

2.0

30 500

Microscope Components

3000

600

400

Wavelength (nm)

800

1000

Adaptive Optics

1200

Wavelength (nm)

Illumination Sources

A cross-like pattern is created on the deformable mirror surface by applying the voltages necessary for maximum deflection of the 44 actuators that comprise the middle two rows and middle two columns of the array. The frame on the left shows a screen shot of the AO kit software depicting the DM surface, whereas the frame on the right, which was obtained through quasi-dark field illumination, shows the actual DM surface when programmed to these settings. Note that the white light source used for illumination is visible in the lower right-hand corner of the image.

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Deformable Mirror Specifications: Order & Pricing Information on Page 473 KIT ITEM # Deformable Mirror Item # Mirror Coating

AOK1-UM01

AOK1-UP01

AOK5-UM01a

AOK5-UP01a

DM140A-35-UM01

DM140A-35-UP01

DM140A-35-UM01

DM140A-35-UP01

Gold

Aluminum

Gold

Aluminum

12 x 12 (140 Actuators)b

Actuator Array Actuator Stroke (Max)

Gold

3.5 µm (5.5 µm Available Upon Request) 400 µm

Clear Aperture

4.4 mm x 4.4 mm

2.0 mm x 2.0 mm

±18º

N/A

Acceptance Angle 600 – 1100 nm

400 – 1100 nm

600 – 1100 nm

400 – 1100 nm

Average Step Size

<1 nm

Hysteresis

None

600 – 1100 nm

>99%

Fill Factor Mechanical Response Time (10% - 90%)

DM32-35-UM01

6 x 6 (32 Actuators)b

Actuator Pitch

Mirror Coating

AOK6-UM01a

AOK2-UM01

<100 μs (~3.5 kHz) <20 nm (RMS)

Surface Quality Driver Specifications Frame Rate (Max)

8 kHz (34 kHz Bursts) 14 Bit

Resolution Head Dimensions Driver Dimensions

4.5" x 2.95" x 2.8" (114.3 mm x 74.9 mm x 71.1 mm) 4.0" x 5.25" x 1.25" (102 mm x 133 mm x 32 mm)

9.0" x 7.0" x 2.5" (229 mm x 178 mm x 64 mm)

Computer Interface

USB2.0

aThese

kits are in the final stages of development. Specifications are subject to change. bThe four corner actuators are inactive (i.e., the DM32 series has 32 active actuators and the DM140 series has 140).

463

Accessories Microscope Components

Adaptive Optics Kits Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors

Optomechanics

The role of the wavefront sensor in an adaptive optics system is to measure the wavefront deviations relative to a reference wavefront. Thorlabs’ Adaptive Optics Kits are available with either a CCD-Based (WFS150-5C) or a High-Speed, CMOS-Based (WFS20-5C) wavefront sensor. These wavefront sensors use a microlens array with a chrome mask and are designed for the 300 – 1100 nm wavelength range.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

Planar Wavefront

Microlens Array

Laser Safety

Distorted Wavefront

Lab Supplies

Displaced Dot

Microlens Array

Alignment Tools

CCD-Based

Wavefront Sensor The lenslet array divides an incoming beam into many smaller beams, each of which is imaged onto the camera sensor, which is placed at the focal plane of the lenslet array. If a uniform plane wave is incident on the Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor (see Figure 1), a focused spot is formed along the optical axis of each lenslet, yielding a regularly spaced grid of spots in the focal plane. However, if a distorted wavefront (i.e., any non-flat wavefront) is incident, the focal spots will be displaced from the optical axis of each lenslet. The amount of shift of each spot’s centroid is proportional to the local slope (i.e., tilt) of the wavefront at the location of that lenslet. The wavefront phase can then be reconstructed from the spot displacement information obtained.

CCD Sensor

Missing Dot

CCD Sensor

Figure 1. When a planar wavefront is incident on the

Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor’s microlens array, the light imaged on the sensor will display a regularly spaced grid of spots. If, however, the wavefront is aberrated, individual spots will be displaced from the optical axis of each lenslet; if the displacement is large enough, the image spot may even appear to be missing. This information is used to calculate the shape of the wavefront that was incident on the microlens array. ITEM #

AOK1-UM01

AOK1-UP01

Deformable Mirror

AOK5-UM01a

The AOK1-UM01, AOK1-UP01, and AOK2-UM01 utilize the high-sensitivity, CCD-Based WFS150-5C wavefront sensor, which operates at up to 15 frames per second. For high-speed applications, we have developed the AOK5-UM01, AOK5UP01, and AOK6-UM01 Adaptive Optics Kits, which utilize our WFS20-5C high-speed CMOS-Based wavefront sensor that operates at up to 880 frames per second. With this wavefront sensor, the adaptive optics kit can operate at 8 Hz or >190 Hz for the CCD- or CMOS-Based wavefront sensors, respectively, in correction mode, limited by the wavefront sensor speed at the set region of interest. With Thorlabs’ Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensors, users can measure the wavefronts of laser sources, characterize the wavefront aberrations caused by optical components, and provide real-time feedback for the control of the deformable mirror.

AOK5-UP01a

Wavefront Sensor

AOK6-UM01a

AOK2-UM01

Multi-DM (140 Actuators)

Mini-DM (32 Actuators)

WFS150-5C

WFS20-5C

WFS150-5C

Sensor Type

CCD

CMOS

CCD

CMOS

Frame Rate (Max)b

8 Hz

>190 Hzc

8 Hz

>190 Hzc

1280 x 1024 Pixels (Selectable)d

1440 x 1080 Pixels (Selectable)e

1280 x 1024 Pixels (Selectable)d

1440 x 1080 Pixels (Selectable)e

4.65 µm x 4.65 µm

5.0 µm x 5.0 µm

4.65 µm x 4.65 µm

5.0 µm x 5.0 µm

21 x 21

23 x 23

21 x 21

23 x 23

l/50 rms

l/100 rms

Wavelength Range

300 – 1100 nm

Camera Resolution (Max) Pixel Size Number of Lensletsf Lenslet Pitch

150 µm

Lenslet Diameter

146 µm

Effective Focal Length

3.7 mm

Wavefront Sensitivity @ 633 nm aThese

l/50 rms

l/100 rms

kits are in the final stages of development. Specifications are subject to change. bThis frame rate represents the maximum achievable frame rate when the wavefront sensor is used with the Adaptive Optics Kit. The CCD-based and CMOS-based wavefront sensors included in the kits are capable of achieving frame rates of up to 15 Hz and 880 Hz, respectively, when used independently. For complete specifications for the wavefront sensors, see page 479.

464

WFS20-5C

cNo

graphics windows open; Control Loop Gain set at 100; Numeric display of RMS WFE and P-V WFE; Running on Windows 7 (64 bit) operating system; Intel Core i7-2600 (3.40 GHz) CPU; 8 GB RAM (Recommended). dSet to 768 x 768 in the kit eSet to 360 x 360 in the kit fThis is preset in the AO Kit Software and cannot be changed. For the full range of specifications for these wavefront sensors when used independently of the AO Kit, see pages 476 - 479.

Accessories Microscope Components

Adaptive Optics Kits

Optomechanics

The Benefits of Adaptive Optics The deformable mirrorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s impressive wavefront correction abilities are demonstrated in these images. An incoming distorted wavefront will retain its aberrations upon reflection from a flat mirror (a); in contrast, a DM can modify its surface profile to compensate for aberrations so that the distorted incident wavefront is unaberrated upon reflection (b). Consequently, when using a flat mirror to image an air force target, the image is completely blurred, making it impossible to distinguish any structure (c). However, if a DM is used instead, the smallest lines, which are only separated by 2 Âľm, are now discernible (d).

Microscope Objectives

(a)

(b)

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

(c)

(d)

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Deformable Mirror Control n Real-Time

Representation of the Deformable Mirror Actuator Displacements (Based on Voltages Applied to the Mirror)

n Spreadsheet-Like

Numerical Interface Provides User-Input of Actuator Deflections n Save/Recall Mirror Surface Maps

The deformable mirror control shows a graphical plot of the DM surface shape as well a spreadsheetlike numerical interface that allows the user to input actuator deflections (in nanometers). The actuator deflection values may be changed individually or in selected groups. The actual shape of the DM will differ slightly due to a small influence of adjacent actuators. Specific mirror shapes can be loaded and saved from this window, allowing the creation of a library of unique and specialized mirror shapes that can be later recalled at the click of a button.

465

Adaptive Optics Kits Shack-Hartmann Control n Four

Tab Displays • Wavefront Sensor Spot Field Measured Directly from the Sensor • Wavefront Plot (See Example at Right) • Contour Wavefront Plot • Measured Zernike Coefficients n Wavefront Plot is Scalable / Rotatable n Easily Access Wavefront Sensor and Display Control Settings in Each Tab Display n Display Measured, Reference, or Difference Wavefront Plots n Min/Max Threshold Eliminate ‘Flickering’ Active/Inactive WFS Spots n User-Controllable Spot Centroid and Reference Spot Indicators (See Example to the Right)

Sample Wavefront Plot

There is a user-adjustable hysteresis setting for the inclusion or exclusion of spots in the wavefront measurements. This Spot Centroid and Reference Spot Indicators setting is primarily used to filter out spots for which the intensity fluctuation has fallen below a low-end cut-off threshold. Once a spot is excluded, it will not be reintroduced into the wavefront measurement until its intensity exceeds a high-end threshold. In the spot field window (bottom right), the camera’s exposure time and gain can be controlled. A pupil control allows the user to analyze the wavefront data within a user-defined circular pupil. The camera image of the spots (white spots in inset), spot centroid locations (red X’s), reference locations (yellow X’s), deviations (white lines between red and yellow X’s), and intensity levels may easily be displayed in the spot field window. In addition to the camera controls mentioned above, when viewing the wavefront, the user has the option to display the measured wavefront, target (reference) wavefront, or the difference between these two wavefronts. There are predefined view angles for the wavefront plot, or it can be continuously adjusted by the user.

Zernike Wavefront Generator Control n n n n

U ser-Controllable Reference Wavefront U ser-Defined Reference Using First 36 Zernike Terms User-Captured Reference Wavefront 3D Surface Plot or 2D Contour Plot Display

The Wavefront Generator control enables the user to create a reference wavefront by combining the first 36 Zernike polynomials in the spreadsheet-like grid. A graphical display of the created wavefront, along with the minimum, maximum, and peak-to-peak wavefront deviations is provided.

Wavefront Generator Control Window

The wavefront generator control window also allows the user to capture the current measured wavefront and set it as the reference wavefront. Reference wavefronts can be saved and later recalled by the user. 466

Accessories Microscope Components

Adaptive Optics Kits Assembled Adaptive Optics Kit

Broadband Fold Mirrors

Collimated 635 nm Laser Module

Optomechanics

30 mm Cage-Compatible U-Bench (Center-Located Pupil Plane for Sample Testing) Relay Optics

Microscope Objectives

DM Mounted on a Kinematic DM Pitch-Yaw Platform

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Pellicle Beamsplitter Mount

Open Light Path for Integration with Other Systems

(Breadboard Sold Separately. See Our Website for Details)

Adaptive Optics Kits with CCD-Based Wavefront Sensor ITEM # AOK1-UM01

PRICE 23,000.00

DESCRIPTION AO Kit with Gold-Coated Multi-DM (140 Actuators) and CCD Wavefront Sensor

AOK1-UP01

23,000.00

AO Kit with Aluminum-Coated Multi-DM (140 Actuators) and CCD Wavefront Sensor

AOK2-UM01

12,000.00

AO Kit with Gold-Coated Mini-DM (32 Actuators) and CCD Wavefront Sensor

Adaptive Optics Kits with High-Speed, CMOS-Based Wavefront Sensor ITEM # AOK5-UM01

PRICE 25,950.00

DESCRIPTION AO Kit with Gold-Coated Multi-DM (140 Actuators) and CMOS Wavefront Sensor

AOK5-UP01

25,950.00

AO Kit with Aluminum-Coated Multi-DM (140 Actuators) and CMOS Wavefront Sensor

AOK6-UM01

14,950.00

AO Kit with Gold-Coated Mini-DM (32 Actuators) and CMOS Wavefront Sensor

Have you seen our...

Multiphoton Essentials Kit ◆ Includes Core Components to Build a Multiphoton Imaging System ◆ Non-Descanned Design Directly Compatible with Thorlabs’ Cage System Components ◆ Microscope-Less Design Enables Imaging of Large Samples

MPM-2PKIT

Shown Mounted on an XT66 Series Rail and MB1218 Aluminum Breadboard (Rail and Breadboard are Not Included)

For More Details, See Pages 50 – 53 467

Accessories Microscope Components

Deformable Mirror Overview

Optomechanics

Piezoelectric Deformable Mirrors

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

n Coarse

Correction for Large Amplitude Wavefront Aberrations Actuators Arranged in Concentric Keystone Layout n Pupil Size: Ø10 mm n Stroke: Up to 13 µm (±6.5 µm Max) n ±2 mrad of Tip/Tilt Correction via 3 Spiral Arms n 40

Two Mirror Designs Provide Either Coarse or Fine Wavefront Correction DMP40-P01

Light Detection

40 Actuator Piezoelectric Deformable Mirror

Alignment Tools

MEMS-Based Deformable Mirrors

Laser Safety

n High

Lab Supplies

DM140A-35-UP01 140 Actuator MEMS-Based Deformable Mirror Head

Spatial Frequency of Actuators for Fine Correction of Wavefront Distortions n Actuator Array: 6 x 6 or 12 x 12 n Clear Aperture: 2.0 mm x 2.0 mm or 4.4 mm x 4.4 mm n Stroke: 3.5 µm (Max) n 32 x 32 Actuator Array Available by Special Request

Choosing a Deformable Mirror for Your Application Ideally, the deformable mirror (DM) needs to assume a surface shape that is conjugate to, but half the amplitude of, the aberration profile to compensate for aberrations and yield a flat wavefront. However, the actual range of wavefronts that can be corrected by a particular DM is limited by the actuator stroke and resolution, the number and distribution of actuators, and the model used to determine the appropriate control signals for the DM; the first two are physical limitations of the deformable mirror itself, whereas the last one is a limitation of the control software. The actuator stroke (i.e., the mechanical dynamic range or the maximum displacement) of the DM is an important performance parameter. Insufficient actuator stroke leads to poor performance and can prevent the convergence of an active control loop. The number of actuators determines the number of degrees of freedom for which the mirror can correct. 468

Thorlabs’ DMs are available with either square (MEMS-based DMs) or concentric keystone pattern (piezoelectric DMs) actuator arrays. Each DM type offers different advantages. The piezoelectric DMs have a lower spatial frequency of actuator segments than the MEMs-based DMs but are capable of providing a larger stroke and tip-tilt correction. They are also capable of handling a higher fluence than their MEMs-based counterparts. As a result, the piezoelectric DMs are useful for correcting large amplitude aberration profiles. In contrast, the MEMs-based DMs are better suited for correcting lower amplitude deformations to the wavefront that are present on smaller spatial scales. If your system requires both types of corrections, consider using piezoelectric and MEMs-based DMs in tandem to provide coarse and fine adjustments to the wavefront, respectively.

Accessories Microscope Components

Piezoelectric Deformable Mirrors

Optomechanics

Features n Controllable

Arbitrary Wavefront Correction n 10 mm Pupil Diameter n 40 Actuator Concentric-Keystone Array (24 Within Pupil Diameter) n ±6.5 µm Maximum Stroke n Three Spiral Arms Provide up to ±2 mrad of Tip/Tilt Correction n 4 kHz Update Rate n >97.5% Average Reflectance from 450 nm to 2 µm (>96% from 2 to 20 µm) n Built-In High-Voltage Driver n Compact 64.0 mm x 60.0 mm x 30.9 mm Housing n 30 mm Cage System Compatible and Post Mountable n Front Plate with SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads n Control Software and Quick Start Guide Included

Thorlabs’ Piezoelectric Deformable Mirrors can correct highly distorted wavefronts of beams 10 mm in diameter. The silver-coated mirror is for use with light in the 450 nm to 20 µm range. This deformable mirror can compensate for common sources of wavefront aberrations, such as astigmatism and coma, and includes a separate mechanism to adjust for tip/tilt. Each mirror is shipped with mirror control software and a quick start guide.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

DMP40-P01

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Mirror Composition Piezoceramic Disk Reflective Coating

Glass Substrate

Adhesive Direction of Deformation

≈ 340 µm

Common Electrode (0 V)

Segment Electrodes (0-200 V)

Electrical Field

Construction and Operation To construct the mirror assembly, a thin, protected-silver-coated glass disk is glued to a circular piezoceramic disk. The electrode attached to the back of the disk is divided into 40 single segments arranged in a circular keystone pattern. Each segment is controlled independently by applying a voltage between 0 and 200 V. The mirror is designed so that the surface is flat when 100 V are applied across each electrode. A lower voltage will result in a concave mirror shape while a higher voltage will lead to a convex shape. Pure spherical shapes can be generated by applying the same voltage to each electrode. In addition to the 40 actuators, three spiral arms are attached to the edge of the piezoelectric disk. These arms, with one end attached to the mirror and the other to a carrier board, are constructed as bimorphs: two piezoelectric layers are bonded together so that one layer will shrink while the other expands as an applied voltage is increased. Applying a voltage to an arm will change the height of the mirror at the connection point. By utilizing three identical arms, the mirror can be tilted in any direction within ±2 mrad. Applying the same voltage to each arm will move the mirror parallel to its surface while holding the tilt constant, which can be used for optical phase modulation. 469

Accessories

Optomechanics

Piezoelectric Deformable Mirrors PHYSICAL STROKEa Aberrationb

Correction

Defocus

±6.5 µmc,d

Astigmatism

±6.0 µmc

Coma

±1.0 µmc

Optical Components

Third Order Spherical Aberration

±0.45 µmc

Trefoil

±1.9 µmc

Adaptive Optics

Tetrafoil

±1.4 µmc

Secondary Astigmatism

±1.3 µmc

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Reflectance (%)

Microscope Components

100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 0.4

Potected Silver Coating, 12º AOI

P-Polarized S-Polarized Unpolarized

a Maximum

Peak-to-Valley stroke at mirror surface within the 10 mm pupil diameter. The wavefront amplitudes are twice as high. bSee pages 458 - 459 for a discussion on Aberrations. c Maximum correction for this aberration assuming that no other aberrations are corrected for at the same time except for Tip/Tilt, which is controlled by a separate mechanism. When more than one type of aberration is corrected for simultaneously, these numbers will decrease. dAlthough the total range of 13 µm is guaranteed, the defocus range may have an asymmetry of 30% max. For instance, the range may be shifted to -4.45 - 8.45 µm.

40 Actuator Concentric Keystone Array

Bimorph Spiral Arm Tilt Arm 1

Connection Point Between Mirror and Spiral Arm (3 Places)

39 9

27 11 28

14 30

36 35

18 34

31 33

Tilt Arm 2

Pupil Diameter = 10 mm Clear Aperture = 11.5 mm

Actuator Inside of Pupil Actuator Outside of Pupil

38 22

Typical reflectance plot for the protected silver coating. The blue shaded region denotes the specified wavelength range for this coating.

Lab Supplies

470

Wavelength (µm)

Tilt Arm 3

Accessories Microscope Components

Piezoelectric Deformable Mirrors SPECIFICATIONSa Number of Actuators

40 Total (Elements 1 - 24 Inside Pupil Diameter, Elements 25 - 40 Outside Pupil Diameter)

Tip/Tilt

3 Spiral Arms

Segment Voltage Range

0 to +200 V (Default: +100 V for Flat Mirror)

Tilt Voltage Range

0 to +200 V (Default: +100 V for Non-Tilt Mirror) ±2.0 mrada

Tip/Tilt Range

15% Typical, 20 %Maxb

Hysteresis of Piezoceramic Material Optical Mirror Coating

Protected Silver >97.5% (450 nm - 2 μm) >96% (2 - 20 μm)

Average Reflectivity Pupil Diameterc

10 mm

Surface Flatness (RMS)

100 nm (Defocus Term Actively Flattened)

Damage Threshold

1 J/cm2 (1064 nm, 10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø10 mm) 4 W (CW, 450 nm - 2 µm)

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Dynamical Pattern Update Rate

4.0 kHz via USB 2.0 (Over Entire Voltage Range)

Mirror Response Time

0.5 ms (Full Stroke)

Tip/Tilt Response Time

5 ms (Full Stroke)

Lab Supplies

Interfaces High Speed USB 2.0, USB1.1 Compatible, Mini USB Connector (Use Shielded, High-Speed USB Cable of Max 3 m Length) Current: 1 nA - 10 mA, Voltage: 0 - 2.5 V, 2.5 mm Stereo Plug (Uncalibrated Readout, Use Shielded Cable Less than 3 m in Length)

PC Analog Feedback Inputs Housing Dimensions

64.0 mm x 60.0 mm x 30.9 mm (2.52" x 2.36" x 1.22")

Weight

180 g (0.4 lbs)

Visible Aperture

Ø11.5 mm

Post Mounting

8-32 (M4) and 1/4"-20 (M6) Taps

Power Power Supply

12 V/18 W (CE Compliant) via Adapter Rated for 100 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz

a Equivalent cThe

to 20 µm over 10 mm pupil diameter. pupil diameter is related to the Zernike pupil diameter.

ITEM # DMP40-P01

METRIC ITEM # DMP40/M-P01

bThe

control software for these mirrors features built-in hysteresis compensation that greatly reduces the effect on mirror performance.

PRICE 4125.00

DESCRIPTION 40-Actuator Deformable Mirror, Silver Coating, 8-32 (M4) and 1/4"-20 (M6) Taps

Have you seen our...

Complete Line of Cage Components Thorlabs’ cage systems are designed to facilitate the alignment of multiple components along a common optical axis. They are manufactured in three sizes (16 mm, 30 mm, and 60 mm) for use with Ø1/2", Ø1", and Ø2" optics, respectively. Adapters are available to switch between different cage standards. In addition, cage systems can be integrated into optical setups using mounting posts and/or lens tubes.

For More Details, Visit www.thorlabs.com 471

Accessories Microscope Components

MEMs-Based Deformable Mirrors

Optomechanics

Driver

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

DM140A-35-UP01

Optical Components

Multi-DM 12 x 12 Actuator Array

Head

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Features n 32 (Mini-DM) or 140 (Multi-DM) Actuator Models Available n 3.5 µm Maximum Actuator Displacement n High-Speed Operation up to 34 kHz n 400 µm Center-to-Center Actuator Spacing and Low Inter-Actuator Coupling Result in High Spatial Resolution n Zero Hysteresis Actuator Displacement n 14-Bit Drive Electronics Yield Sub-Nanometer Repeatability

Through our partnership with Boston Micromachines Corporation (BMC), Thorlabs is pleased to offer BMC’s Mini- and Multi-Deformable Micro-electromechanical systems-based (MEMS-based) mirrors. These deformable mirrors (DMs) are ideal for advanced optical wavefront control; they can correct monochromatic aberrations (spherical, coma, astigmatism, field curvature, or distortion) in a highly distorted incident wavefront. MEMS deformable mirrors are currently the most widely used technology in wavefront shaping applications given their versatility, maturity of technology, and the high resolution wavefront correction capabilities they provide. Thorlabs’ DMs, fabricated using polysilicon surface micromachining fabrication methods, offer sophisticated aberration compensation in easy-to-use packages. The mirror consists of a mirror membrane that is deformed by either 32 electrostatic actuators (i.e., a 6 x 6 actuator array with four inactive corner actuators for the MiniDM) or 140 electrostatic actuators (i.e., a 12 x 12 actuator array with four inactive corner actuators for the Multi-DM). These actuators provide 3.5 µm of stroke with zero hysteresis. 472

n Compact

Driver Electronics with Built-In High Voltage Power Supply Suitable for Benchtop or OEM Integration n Operating Wavelengths • 400 – 1100 nm (Aluminum-Coated DM, Multi-DM Only) • 600 – 1100 nm (Gold-Coated DM) n Protective Window with 6° Wedge and Broadband AR Coating (400 – 1100 nm) n Custom Coating Available Upon Request

Mirror Composition Membrane Surface Actuator Post Actuator Surface Actuator Support Electrodes Silicone Substrate

The Multi-DM is available with either a gold (Au) or aluminum (Al) coated mirror and the Mini-DM is available with a gold-coated mirror. Each is packaged with a protective 6° wedged window that has a broadband AR coating for the 400 – 1100 nm range (See the graphs on the next page for coating curves. Please contact our Technical Support Team if you have an interest in a different stroke or coating range). Although the use of DMs in astronomy is well known, these miniature, precision wavefront control devices are also helping researchers to make breakthroughs in beam forming, microscopy, laser communication, and retinal imaging.

Accessories Microscope Components

MEMs-Based Deformable Mirrors

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

DM32-35-UM01 Mini-DM 6 x 6 Actuator Array

Driver

Adaptive Optics

Head

4.0

Reflectivity vs. Wavelength of Window AR Coating (Normal Incidence)

Illumination Sources

Deformable Mirror Coating Curves

100

Light Detection

3.5

% Reflectivity

80 2.5 1.5 1.0

Alignment Tools

70 60 Gold Aluminum

40 0.5

Laser Safety

Lab Supplies

0.0

20 400

600

800

1000

500

1200

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

Wavelength (nm)

Typical reflectivity plots for aluminum- and gold-coated surfaces (without the protective window) as well as the AR Coating Curve for the protective 6° wedge. The data for the unprotected aluminum and gold coatings was obtained using unpolarized light incident at 45°. ITEM # Actuator

DM32-35-UM01 Arrayb

DM140A-35-UM01

KILO-DMa

DM140A-35-UP01

6x6

12 x 12

32 x 32

Actuator Stroke (Max.)

3.5 µm

1.5 µm

Actuator Pitch

400 µm

300 µm

Clear Aperture

2.0 mm x 2.0 mm

Mirror Coating

Gold

4.4 mm x 4.4 mm Gold

9.3 mm x 9.3 mm Aluminum

Average Step Size

Gold or Aluminum

<1 nm

Hysteresis

None

Fill Factor

>99%

Acceptance Angle

N/A

Mechanical Response Time

±18º

N/A

<100 μs (~3.5 kHz)

Surface Quality

<20 μs <20 nm (RMS)

Driver Specifications Frame Rate (Max)

8 kHz (34 kHz Bursts)

Resolution Driver Dimensions (W x D x H)

Up to 60 kHz 14 Bit

4.0" x 5.25" x 1.25" (102 mm x 133 mm x 32 mm)

Computer Interface

9.0" x 7.0" x 2.5" (229 mm x 178 mm x 64 mm)

19.0" x 18.5" x 5.25" (483 mm x 470 mm x 133 mm)

USB2.0

aThe Kilo-DM is available through Boston Micromachines Corporation (BMC). bThe four corner actuators are inactive (i.e., the DM32 series has 32 active actuators,

PCI Card

the DM140 series has 140, and the Kilo-DM series has 1020)

Deformable Mirror, 6 x 6 Actuator Array Plus Driver ITEM # DM32-35-UM01

PRICE 7,500.00

DESCRIPTION Mini-DM 6 x 6 Deformable Mirror with Gold Coating

Deformable Mirrors, 12 x 12 Actuator Array Plus Driver ITEM # DM140A-35-UM01

PRICE 17,500.00

DM140A-35-UP01

17,500.00

DESCRIPTION Multi-DM 12 x 12 Deformable Mirror with Gold Coating Multi-DM 12 x 12 Deformable Mirror with Aluminum Coating

473

Accessories Microscope Components

Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor Tutorial

Optomechanics

Introduction

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

A Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor, which is designed to measure the wavefront deviation from a reference wavefront, uses a lenslet array to divide an incoming beam into an array of smaller beams, each of which is imaged onto a camera that is placed at the focal plane of the lenslet array (see Fig. 1). A uniform plane wave that is incident on a Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor normal to the lenslet array forms a focused spot along the optical axis of each lenslet, yielding a regularly spaced grid of spots in the focal plane. A distorted wavefront, however, produces focal spots that are displaced from the optical axis of each lenslet. The amount of shift of each spot’s centroid is proportional to the local slope (i.e., tilt) of the wavefront at the location of that lenslet. The wavefront phase can be reconstructed from the spot displacement information obtained (see Fig. 2).

WFS150-5C

CCD-Based Wavefront Sensor

Four parameters that influence the performance of a Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor are the number of lenslets that cover the camera’s active area, the dynamic range, the measurement sensitivity, and the lenslet focal length. The number of lenslets restricts the maximum number of Zernike coefficients that a reconstruction algorithm can reliably calculate. See the section on Zernike modes on the next page for more information regarding the number of lenslets and wavefront measurement. Sensitivity (qmin) is a function of the minimum detectable spot displacement (dymin), as described in Fig. 3. This parameter determines the minimum detectable phase. Dynamic Range (qmax) is a measure of the maximum extent of phase that can be measured. Planar Wavefront

Displaced Dot

Microlens Array

Distorted Wavefront

Sensor

Missing Dot

Figure 1. A planar wavefront incident on the Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor’s lenslet array and imaged on the CCD sensor will display a regularly spaced grid of spots. An aberrated wavefront, however, will cause individual spots to be displaced from the optical axis of each lenslet; if the displacement is large enough, the image spot may even appear to be missing. This information is used to calculate the shape of the wavefront that was incident on the microlens array.

(a)

(b) Figure 2. Two Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor screen captures are shown: the spot field (a) and the calculated wavefront based on that spot field information (b).

474

Accessories Microscope Components

Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor Tutorial A Shack-Hartmann sensor’s Distorted Wavefront Planar Wavefront Spot Position measurement accuracy (i.e., the Microlens (Diameter = d) minimum wavefront slope that can Δz be measured reliably) depends on δy its ability to precisely measure the θ θ displacement of a focused spot with Z Planar Wavefront respect to a reference position. Special Spot Position algorithms are implemented in the fML Thorlabs wavefront sensor software, Sensor Distorted Wavefront allowing a spot to be followed even Figure 3. Detail of an individual microlens. The spot positions will only be directly behind the lens when outside its regular detection (green spot) if the incident wavefront is flat and parallel to the plane of the lenslets. A distorted wavefront will cause a spot to be deviated in X and Y (red spot) so that every spot lies area, increasing the dynamic range of away from the optical axis Z by an angle q. The equations provided for the Minimum Slope: the sensor. The dynamic range of a measurement sensitivity and the dynamic range below are obtained using δy θ = the small angle approximation. qmin is the minimum wavefront slope that fML system can also be increased by using can be measured by the wavefront sensor; the measurement sensitivity is Dynamic Range: inversely proportional to this angle. dy is the minimum detectable spot min a lenslet with either a larger diameter δy d /2 displacement and is limited by the pixel size, the centroid algorithm, and θ = = fML fML the signal to noise ratio of the sensor. q or a shorter focal length. Increasing the max is the maximum wavefront slope that can be measured by the wavefront sensor and depends on d, the dynamic range by increasing the lenslet diameter of the microlens. diameter decreases the number of Zernike coefficients available to represent the wavefront. Conversely, increasing the dynamic range by shortening the lenslet focal length decreases the sensor’s sensitivity. Ideally, a lenslet with the longest focal length that meets both the dynamic range and measurement sensitivity requirements should be used. min

min

max

Shack-Hartmann Zernike Modes

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Minimum Pupil and Beam Diameter

3.5 3

Min. Diameter (mm)

Thorlabs’ wavefront sensors (WFS) can fit the measured wavefront to a Zernike polynomial, up to the 10th order (i.e., 66 Zernike modes). In general, the minimum number of Shack-Hartmann spots required to fit a wavefront to a Zernike polynomial is equal to the number of Zernike modes to be fit. Therefore, in addition to the wavefront sensor’s specifications, the number of WFS lenslets used must be taken into account to ensure the desired number of Zernike mode coefficients can be calculated.

max

Optomechanics

WFS300x, WFS20-14AR WFS150x, WFS20-5C, WFS20-7AR

2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0

Calculated Zernike Order

Additionally, when using the wavefront sensor and a deformable mirror for AO control, the ratio of the number of used wavefront sensor lenslets to the number of deformable mirror actuators needs to be considered. Published results show the performance is significantly improved with a ratio of roughly 2:1. A 1:1 magnification 4F optical relay (two equal focus lenses aligned in a confocal configuration) is used between the DM and the WFS in Thorlabs’ AO Kits; therefore, the lenslet-to-actuator ratio is 2.7:1 (i.e., 400 µm / 150 µm). This ensures the AO Kits operate in a regime where stable AO control can be achieved. WFS CAMERA RESOLUTION (PIXELS) 320 x 320

WAVEFRONT SPOTS WFS150-7AR WFS150-14AR WFS300-14AR APERTURE SIZE 7 x 7 (49) 3 x 3 (9) 1.49 mm x 1.49 mm

WFS CAMERA RESOLUTION (PIXELS) 360 x 360

WAVEFRONT SPOTS WFS20-5C WFS20-7AR WFS20-14AR APERTURE SIZE 11 x 11 (121) 5 x 5 (25) 1.80 mm x 1.80 mm

512 x 512

13 x 13 (169)

5 x 5 (25)

2.38 mm x 2.38 mm

512 x 512

15 x 15 (225)

7 x 7 (49)

2.56 mm x 2.56 mm

768 x 768

21 x 21 (441)

9 x 9 (81)

3.57 mm x 3.57 mm

768 x 768

23 x 23 (529)

11 x 11 (121)

3.84 mm x 3.84 mm

1024 x 1024

29 x 29 (841)

13 x 13 (169)

4.76 mm x 4.76 mm

1080 x 1080

35 x 35 (1225)

17 x 17 (289)

5.40 mm x 5.40 mm

1280 x 1024

37 x 29 (1073)

17 x 13 (221)

5.95 mm x 4.76 mm

1440 x 1080

47 x 35 (1645)

23 x 17 (391)

7.20 mm x 5.40 mm

475

Accessories

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors Features n Wavelength

Range: 300 - 1100 nm or 400 - 900 nm n Sensitivities Up to λ/200 n F rame Rates Up to 1020 fps Available n R eal-Time Wavefront and Intensity Distribution Measurements n Nearly Diffraction-Limited Spot Size n For CW and Pulsed Light Sources n Flexible Data Export Options (Text or Excel) n Live Data Readout via TCP/IP n Imperial and Metric Mounting Options Available • CCD-Based Sensors Include Base Plate with 8-32 and M4 Taps • CMOS-Based Sensors have 8-32 (Imperial) or M4 (Metric) Taps in Housing Thorlabs’ Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors provide accurate measurements of the wavefront shape and intensity distribution of beams. Standard and fast versions are available with a CCD or CMOS sensor format, respectively. We also offer kits that include two exchangeable microlens arrays. Our CCD-based wavefront sensors feature 1.3 megapixel resolution. The high resolution allows these cameras to make wavefront measurements using the spot field with a high degree of accuracy (up to λ/50) and sensitivity (up to λ/200). The CMOS-based wavefront sensors also offer excellent resolution (1440 x 1080 pixels max) with the added benefit of high frame rates up to 1020 fps. High

WFS20-14AR High-Speed, CMOSBased Wavefront Sensor with Control Box and Included Cable

Camera Responsivity Comparison

100 80

Relative Response (%)

Microscope Components

60 40 20 0

CCD Based CMOS Based 400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

frame rates allow the wavefront sensor to acquire more measurements per second and thus detect faster wavefront fluctuations.

Measurement Speed The CCD-based wavefront sensors have a measurement speed of 15 fps that is independent of the spot count. By contrast, the measurement speed of the wavefront sensors with CMOS cameras will decrease as the spot count increases. The plots below provide a comparison of performance, which is also dependent on the pitch of the microlens array. WFS20-5C and WFS20-7AR Measurement Speed

Frame Rate (fps)

400 200

High Speed Modea Normal Mode, Bin 2 Modeb Normal Mode

800 600 400 200

200

400

600

800

1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

Spot Count 476

1000

Frame Rate (fps)

High Speed Modea Normal Mode, Bin 2 Modeb Normal Mode

600

WFS20-14AR Measurement Speed

1200

1000 800

aIn high speed mode, the FPGA Box performs wavefront measurement bPerforms 2 x 2 binning of the pixels in the CMOS sensor.

1100

Wavelength (nm)

100

150

200

250

300

350

Spot Count calculations, decreasing the ammount of data that must be transfered to the PC and increasing the measurement speed.

400

Accessories

Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors

Microscope Components

Choosing a Microlens Array for Your Application

Optomechanics

Our wavefront sensors are available with either a chrome-masked microlens array for use in the 300 - 1100 nm range or an AR-coated microlens array for use in the 400 - 900 nm range. The former has a lenslet pitch of 150 μm, whereas the latter is available with a lenslet pitch of either 150 or 300 μm. These three offerings allow the end user to select a system that offers high spatial resolution, enhanced ITEM # WFS150-5C WFS20-5C(/M)

HIGH SPOT CONTRAST

contrast, or high wavefront accuracy. Please note that calibration of the microlens-camera pair is required; to purchase a new lenslet array for a previously purchased Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor, please contact Technical Support for a quotation on the microlens array and calibration service. The table below provides a general guide to the benefits provided by the microlens included with each item.

HIGH WAVEFRONT ACCURACY

HIGH SPATIAL RESOLUTION

✔

WFS150-7AR WFS20-7AR(/M) WFS300-14AR WFS20-14AR(/M)

LOW BACK REFLECTION

✔ ✔

WFS150-5C and WFS20-5C Microlens Arrays These sensors include a chrome-masked microlens array, which prevents light from passing between the microlenses. This leads to high contrast in the spot field but will considerably increase the amount of back reflections compared to the AR-coated microlens arrays. This microlens can be used over an extended wavelength range of 300 nm to 1100 nm. The array incorporates a 150 µm lens pitch, which results in a larger number of spots and thus a higher resolution of the wavefront. Each lenset also features a short focal length, providing a wider wavefront dynamic range.

WFS150-7AR, WFS20-7AR, WFS300-14AR, and WFS20-14AR Microlens Arrays

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

✔ ✔

Alignment Tools

Wavefront Sensor Kits In addition to the base camera unit, which is available with one of three microlens arrays, kits are also offered that combine two microlens arrays, the base CMOS or CCD camera with preloaded calibration data for both arrays, and a pickup tool for interchanging the mounted arrays. The microlens arrays are mounted in a patented magnetic holder (US Patent No: 8,289,504) that precisely positions the array correctly every time. Kits are ideal for situations where more than one light source or optical setup needs to be analyzed.

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Mounting and Accessories Each Shack-Hartmann sensor and kit comes in a convenient storage and carrying case. An external C-Mount to SM1 thread (1.035"-40) adapter is provided for mounting Ø1" lens tubes and mounted optics such as neutral density filters (see www.thorlabs.com). The CMOS-based wavefront sensors feature three 8-32 (M4) taps on the bottom for post mounting while the CCD-based versions include a baseplate with one 8-32 and one M4 tap.

These sensors include a microlens array that is AR coated for the 400 nm to 900 nm wavelength range, making them ideal for applications that are sensitive to back reflections. Like the WFS150-5C and WFS20-5C(/M), the WFS150-7AR and WFS20-7AR(/M) include a microlens array with a 150 µm lens pitch that results in a large number of SM1A9 C-Mount to spots and thus a high resolution of the wavefront. SM1 Adapter Each lenset has a short focal length of 5.0 mm, providing a wide wavefront dynamic range. The WFS300-14AR and WFS20-14AR(/M) include a microlens array with a 300 µm lens pitch, which offers higher wavefront accuracy and sensitivity than the 150 µm pitch microlens arrays at the expense of dynamic range and spatial resolution.

Coverplate

Baseplate

477

Accessories Microscope Components

Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors

Optomechanics

Software Features

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

The software package included with each wavefront sensor offers a user-friendly graphical interface with tools for choosing camera setting, calibration, analysis, and display options. The display options include the raw spotfield image, Zernike coefficients, measured and reconstructed 3D wavefront, and the irradiance distribution. Data export options include tabulated output, text or Excel file, and live data readout via TCP/IP or DataSocket Server. Drivers are also provided for C Compilers, LabVIEWTM, LabWindows/CVITM, and .Net for integration into custom system control and data collection software. Software screen shots are shown on page 474.

Trigger Option

For applications where an external trigger is required, cables are available to connect the trigger signal to the wavefront sensor. Please see the trigger specifications in the table below.

CAB-WFS20-T1 Trigger Cable for the Fast Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

A screen capture from the wavefront sensor software showing the irradiance profile of the incident beam.

CCD-BASED WAVEFRONT SENSORS WFS150-5C

ITEM # Camera Specifications

WFS150-7AR

Detector Array Camera Resolution (Max)

FAST, CMOS-BASED WAVEFRONT SENSORS

WFS300-14AR

WFS20-5C(/M)

WFS20-7AR(/M)

WFS20-14AR(/M)

CCD

CMOS

1280 x 1024 Pixels, Software Selectable

1440 x 1080 Pixels, Software Selectable

Pixel Size

4.65 µm x 4.65 µm

5.0 µm x 5.0 µm

Aperture Size (Max)

5.95 mm x 4.76 mm

7.20 mm x 5.40 mm

Frame Rate (Max)

15 Hz

960 Hz

1080 Hz

Microlens Array Specifications Wavelength Range

300 – 1100 nm

Effective Focal Length

3.7 mm

Lenslet Pitch Lens Size Coating

400 – 900 nm 5.2 mm

14.2 mm

400 – 900 nm

3.7 mm

5.2 mm

14.2 mm

150 µm

300 µm

150 µm

300 µm

Ø146 µm

300 µm x 300 µm

Ø146 µm

300 µm x 300 µm

Chrome Mask

Substrate Material

300 – 1100 nm

Antireflection

Chrome Mask

Antireflection

Fused Silica (Quartz)

General Specifications Wavefront Accuracy @ 633 nmb

l/15 rms

l/50 rms

l/30 rms

l/60 rms

Wavefront Sensitivity @ 633 nmc

l/50 rms

l/150 rms

l/100 rms

l/200 rms

Wavefront Dynamic Range @ 633 nmd

>100 l

>50 l

>100 l

>50 l

Number of Lenslets (Max)

39 x 31

19 x 15

47 x 35

23 x 17

Local Wavefront Curvaturee

>7.4 mm

>10 mm

>40 mm

>7.4 mm

>10 mm

>40 mm

Optional External Trigger Specifications Trigger Slope

Software Selectable: Low-High or High-Low

Maximum Low Level

1.5 V

Minimum High Level

3.5 V

Input Current (Max)

10 mA

–

>100 kW

Input Impedance Mounting Post

Baseplate with 8-32 and M4 Taps

Input Aperture a To

achieve these frame rates, a resolution of 320 x 320 pixels must be used. This PC hardwaredependent speed is achieved without graphical display, assumes a 4th order Zernike fit at the specified camera resolution, and minimum exposure time. b Absolute accuracy using internal reference. Measured for spherical wavefronts with a known radius of curvature (in Normal Mode for WFS20 sensors).

478

Three 8-32 (M4) Taps C-Mount (1.000"-32) Threads c Typical

relative accuracy with respect to a reference wavefront (user calibration). Reference and each measurement values are averaged over 10 frames (in Normal Mode for WFS20 sensors).

d Over entire aperture of wavefront sensor. e Radius of wavefront curvature over single

lenslet aperture.

Accessories Microscope Components

Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors CCD-Based Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors ITEM # WFS150-5C

PRICE 3,810.00

DESCRIPTION High-Resolution Shack-Hartmann WFS, 150 µm Pitch, Chrome Masked, 300 - 1100 nm

WFS150-7AR

3,810.00

High-Resolution Shack-Hartmann WFS, 150 µm Pitch, AR Coated: 400 - 900 nm

WFS300-14AR

3,810.00

High-Resolution Shack-Hartmann WFS, 300 µm Pitch, AR Coated: 400 - 900 nm

ITEM # WFS-K1

PRICE $ 4,610.00

WAVEFRONT SENSOR TYPE CCD Based

MICROLENS ARRAY 1 150 µm Pitch, Chrome Masked: 300 - 1100 nm

MICROLENS ARRAY 2 300 µm Pitch, AR Coated: 400 - 900 nm

WFS-K2

$ 4,610.00

CCD Based

150 µm Pitch, AR Coated: 400 - 900 nm

300 µm Pitch, AR Coated: 400 - 900 nm

CCD-Based Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor Trigger Cable (Optional) $

PRICE 78.00

DESCRIPTION USB and Trigger Cable for CCD-Based Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors

METRIC ITEM #

PRICE

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

Fast CMOS-Based Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors ITEM #

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

CCD-Based Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor Kits

ITEM # CAB-DCU-T2

Optomechanics

WFS20-5C WFS20-5C/M $ 5,900.00

DESCRIPTION Fast Shack-Hartmann WFS, CMOS Sensor, 150 µm Lenslet Pitch, Chrome Masked, 300 - 1100 nm, 8-32 (M4) Taps

Alignment Tools

WFS20-7AR WFS20-7AR/M $ 5,900.00

Fast Shack-Hartmann WFS, CMOS Sensor, 150 µm Lenslet Pitch, AR Coated: 400 - 900 nm, 8-32 (M4) Taps

Laser Safety

WFS20-14AR WFS20-14AR/M $ 5,900.00

Fast Shack-Hartmann WFS, CMOS Sensor, 300 µm Lenslet Pitch, AR Coated: 400 - 900 nm, 8-32 (M4) Taps

Lab Supplies

Fast CMOS-Based Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor Kits* ITEM #

METRIC ITEM # PRICE

WFS TYPE

MICROLENS ARRAY 1

MICROLENS ARRAY 2

150 µm Pitch, 300 µm Pitch, WFS20-K1 WFS20-K1/M $ 6,700.00 Fast CMOS-Based Chrome Masked: 300 - 1100 nm AR Coated: 400 - 900 nm 150 µm Pitch, 300 µm Pitch, WFS20-K2 WFS20-K2/M $ 6,700.00 Fast CMOS-Based Chrome Masked: 300 - 1100 nm AR Coated: 400 - 900 nm *Imperial kits have three 8-32 taps and Metric kits have three M4 taps in the wavefront sensor housing.

Fast CMOS-Based Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor Trigger Cable (Optional) ITEM # CAB-WFS20-T1

PRICE 68.97

DESCRIPTION Trigger Cable for Fast CMOS-Based Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors

Have you seen our...

Microlens Arrays: Unmounted and Mounted ◆ Plano-Convex Lens Shape ◆ Near Diffraction-Limited Spot Sizes ◆ AR-Coated (400 – 900 nm) or Chrome Masked (300 – 1000 nm)

◆ 10 mm x 10 mm UV Fused Silica Unmounted Array ◆ Available in Ø1" Mount

Thorlabs’ Microlens Arrays are fabricated from UV fused silica and are available with round or square lenslets. Used in conjunction with a CCD chip, they can constitute the core of a Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor. Please Note: Pre-assembled Shack-Hartman wavefront sensors will need to be re-calibrated if these microlenses are used in place of the microlenses already built into the system. To order additional microlens arrays for Thorlabs’ Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors, please contact our Tech Support team.

Mounted Microlens Array

MLA150-5C Not to Scale

Visit www.thorlabs.com for More Details 479

Accessories Microscope Components

4-Channel, Fiber-Coupled Laser Source

Optomechanics

Features n Four

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

LASER RADIATION

MCLS1

AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM

CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

400 - 1550 nm Pulse

<100 mW

Thorlabs’ 4-Channel, Fiber-Coupled, Customizable Laser Source consists of four independently controlled fiber-pigtailed laser diodes. Although 32 laser diodes with different power/wavelength combinations are currently available on our website, the seven options featured here are ideal for use in the life sciences. The four laser output channels feature FC/PC connectors as well as a green LED indicator to easily determine which light source(s) is activated. Each unit is shipped with a power cord, USB cord, and manual. Each laser diode is operated from an independent, high-precision, low-noise, constant-current source and temperature control unit. An intuitive LCD interface allows the user to view and set the laser current and temperature control independently for each laser. The display indicates the channel number selected, the output wavelength of the source, the operating power calculated from the laser diode monitor diode, and the actual temperature to which the laser is set. This device includes a microcontroller to fully control the laser’s optical power, its temperature, and to monitor the system for fault conditions. The laser source includes a USB connection that allows remote adjustment of power, temperature, and enabling. On the rear panel, analog inputs are available to modulate the lasers with an external signal. To prevent damage, the SPECIFICATIONS microcontroller will disable Fiber Ports the output if the analog input Display plus the internal set point Input Power Connection Modulation Input Connector exceeds the laser limits. Interlock

480

Laser Output Channels with FC/PC Connectors n 7 Available Source Wavelengths Ideal for Life Science Applications n Independent Temperature Control Leads to High Temperature Stability n Low Noise Output n USB Interface n Low-Profile Package

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Display Power Accuracy

±10%

Current Set Point Resolution

0.01 mA

Temperature Adjust Range

20.00 to 30.00 °C

Temperature Set Point Resolution Noise

±0.01 °C <0.5% Typical (Source Dependent)

Rise/Fall Time Modulation Input Modulation Bandwidth

<5 µs 0 - 5 V = 0 - Full Power 80 kHz Full Depth of Modulation

FC / PC LCD, 16 x 2 Alphanumeric Characters IEC Connector BNC (Referenced to Chassis) 2.5 mm Mono Phono Jack

Available Wavelengths* • 405 nm • 473 nm • 488 nm • 520 nm • 638 nm • 642 nm • 660 nm

Communications

*Additional Wavelengths Available Online

Operating Temperature

15 to 35 °C

Storage Temperature

0 to 50 °C

Communications Port COM Connection USB Cable Included

USB 2.0 USB Type B Connector 2 m USB Type A to Type B Cable (Replacement Part Number USB-A-79)

General AC Input Input Power Fuse Fuse Size Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight

100 - 240 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz 35 VA (Max) 250 mA [IEC60127 - 2/III, (250 V, Slow Blow Type ‘T’)] 5 mm x 20 mm 12.6" x 2.5" x 10.6" (320 mm x 64 mm x 269 mm) 8.5 lbs (3.9 kg)

Accessories Microscope Components

4-Channel, Fiber-Coupled Laser Source The table below lists the seven laser diodes with wavelength/ power combinations ideal for the life sciences. Choose up to four laser diodes and add the individual cost of each source to the MCLS1 base unit price. Additional wavelength options are available on our website.

MCLS1 with fiber-pigtailed laser diodes providing output at 405 nm, 520 nm, 642 nm, and 660 nm costs: $3,600.00 + $1,390.00 + $875.00 + $650.00 + $336.00 = $6,851.00. EXAMPLE

Wavelength Options (Choose Four) TYPICAL MINIMUM ITEM #

TYPICAL LASER POWER POWER TYPE FIBERa PRICE

MCLS1-405-30

405 nm

24 mW

28 mW

Fabry-Perot

S405-HP

$ 1,390.00

MCLS1-473-20

473 nm

15 mW

20 mW

Fabry-Perot

460HP

$ 5,200.00

MCLS1-488

488 nm

18 mW

22 mW

Fabry-Perot

460HP

$ 4,800.00

MCLS1-520

520 nm

8.0 mW

10.0 mW

Fabry-Perot

460HP

875.00

MCLS1-638

638 nm

10 mW

15 mW

Fabry-Perot

SM600

460.00

MCLS1-642

642 nm

15 mW

20 mW

Fabry-Perot

SM600

650.00

MCLS1-660

660 nm

15 mW

17 mW

Fabry-Perot

SM600

336.00

aThis

fiber is incorporated in the unit behind each bulkhead.

aPrice

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

MCLS1 Laser Source ITEM # MCLS1a

Optomechanics

PRICE 3,600.00

DESCRIPTION 4-Channel Laser Source, TEC Stabilized, USB, Controller Only

Laser Safety

listed is for base system, excluding sources. The unit must be purchased with at least one pigtail installed. If you leave a channel blank, the laser will be shipped without a pigtail in that channel.

Lab Supplies

Single Mode, Fiber-Coupled Laser Source Features n Output

Wavelength: 635 nm n Single Mode FC/PC Fiber Interface n Low Noise, Stable Output n Front Panel Control of Laser Power (0 to Full Power)

S1FC635 FC/PC Connector

SPECIFICATIONS Wavelength

635 nm

Full Output Power

2.5 mW (Min) 15 min: ±0.05 dB, 24 hr: ±0.1 dB (After 1 hr Warm-up at 25 ± 10 ºC Ambient)

Stability Display Accuracy

±10%

Setpoint Resolution

0.01 mW

Adjustment Range

~0 mW to Full Power 15 to 35 ºC

Operating Temperature

0 to 50 ºC

Storage Temperature Output Fiber Connector

FC/PC, Wide 2.1 mm Key Compatible SM600 Single Mode Fiber (Approximate Core Size: 4.3 µm)*

Fiber

This Fiber-Coupled Laser Source conveniently packages a 635 nm pigtailed Fabry-Perot laser diode and current controller into a single benchtop unit. The laser diode is pigtailed to a single mode fiber that is terminated at an FC/PC bulkhead (wide 2.1 mm key compatible) attached to the front panel of the unit. The front panel includes a display that shows the output power in milliwatts, an on/off key, an enable button, and a knob to adjust the laser power.

Additional Wavelengths Available on Our Website

The back panel includes an input that allows the laser diode drive current to be controlled via an external voltage source and a remote interlock input. All of our fiber-pigtailed lasers utilize an angled fiber ferrule at the internal laser/fiber launch point to minimize reflections back into the laser diode, thereby increasing the stability of the laser diode’s output. *The Mode Field Diameter is 4.3 µm at 633 nm. This is a nominal, calculated value, estimated at the operating wavelength, using a typical NA and cutoff wavelength.

ITEM # S1FC635

PRICE 1,331.10

DESCRIPTION FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source, 635 nm, 2.5 mW, Class 3R, SM Fiber

481

Accessories Microscope Components

TEC-Cooled, Single Mode, Fiber-Coupled Laser Source

Optomechanics

These Fiber-Coupled Laser Sources feature an integrated TEC element that is used to stabilize the temperature of a FabryPerot laser diode, which in turn stabilizes the output power and wavelength of the laser diode for a given drive current. The laser diode is pigtailed to a single mode fiber that is terminated at an FC/PC bulkhead connector (wide 2.1 mm key compatible) on the front panel. The front panel includes a display that shows the output power in milliwatts, an on/off key, an enable button, and a knob to adjust the laser power.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

Features n Output

Wavelength: 405, 473, or 488 nm Mode FC/PC Fiber Interface n Front Panel Control of Laser Power (0 to Full Power) n Thermoelectric Temperature Stabilization n Low Noise, Highly Stable Output n Adjustable Temperature Set Point: 20 to 30 °C n Single

The back panel includes an input that allows the laser diode drive current to be controlled via an external voltage source Lab and a remote interlock input. All of our Supplies fiber pigtailed lasers utilize an angled fiber Additional ferrule at the internal laser/fiber launch Wavelengths point to minimize reflections back into the Available on laser diode, thereby increasing the stability Our Website of the laser diode’s output. Laser Safety

ITEM # Center Wavelength (Typical) Wavelength Rangea Output Power

S3FC405 Actively Stabilized Power and Temperature

S3FC405

S3FC473

405 nm

473 nm

488 nm

395 - 415 nm

468 - 478 nm

483 - 488 nm

6.0 mW (Max)

20 mW (Max)

S405-HP Single Mode Fiber (Approximate Core Size: 2.9 µm)b

Fiber

S460-HP Single Mode Fiber (Approximate Core Size: 3.4 µm)c

15 min: ±0.05 dB, 24 hr: ±0.1 dB (After 1 hr Warm-up at 25 ± 10 ºC Ambient)

Stability Display Accuracy (mW)

±10 % of Actual

Set Point Resolution

0.01 mW

Adjustment Range

~0 mW to Full Power

TEC Specifications Stability

0.005 °C / 1 °C

Set Point Accuracy

±0.25 °C

Set Point Resolution

±0.1 °C

Adjustment Range

20 ± 1 °C to 30 ± 1 °C

Environmental Operating Temperature

15 to 35 °C

Storage Temperature

0 to 50 °C

AC Input

115/230 VAC (Switch Selectable) 50 - 60 Hz

Modulation Input

0 - 5 V = 0 - Full Power, DC or Sine Wave Input Only

Modulation Bandwidth

5 kHz Full Depth of Modulation; 30 kHz Small Signal Modulation

aThe center wavelength is a nominal value. The actual wavelength may vary. bThe Mode Field Diameter is 2.9 µm at 405 nm. This is a nominal, calculated value, estimated at the operating wavelength, using a typical NA and cutoff wavelength. cThe Mode Field Diameter is 3.4 µm at 460 nm. This is a nominal, calculated value, estimated at the operating wavelength, using a typical NA and cutoff wavelength.

482

S3FC488

ITEM # S3FC405

PRICE 1,950.00

DESCRIPTION FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source with TEC, 405 nm, 6 mW, Class 3B

S3FC473

7,635.92

FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source with TEC, 473 nm, 20 mW, Class 3B

S3FC488

7,981.50

FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source with TEC, 488 nm, 20 mW, Class 3B

Accessories Microscope Components

Multimode Fiber-Coupled Laser Source

Optomechanics

Features n Output

Wavelength: 473 nm n Multimode FC/PC Fiber Interface n Low Noise, Stable Output n Front Panel Control of Laser Power (0 to 50 mW)

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

S1FC473MM

This Fiber-Coupled Laser is an ideal source for many Optogenetics applications. It includes a pigtailed Fabry-Perot laser diode and current controller in a single benchtop unit. The laser diode is pigtailed to a multimode fiber that is terminated at an FC/PC bulkhead (wide 2.1 mm key compatible) attached to the front panel of the unit. The front panel includes a display that shows the output power in milliwatts, an on/off key, an enable button, and a knob to adjust the laser power. The back panel includes an input that allows the laser diode drive current to be controlled via an external voltage source and a remote interlock input. All of our fiber-pigtailed lasers utilize an angled fiber ferrule at the internal laser/fiber launch point to minimize reflections back into the laser diode, thereby increasing the stability of the laser diode’s output. ITEM # S1FC473MM

FC/PC Connector ITEM #

S1FC473MM 473 nm

Wavelength Output Power*

50 mW (Max) 15 min: ±0.05 dB, 24 hr: 0.1 dB (After 1 hr Warm-Up at 25 ± 10 °C Ambient)

Stability Display Accuracy

±10%

Set Point Resolution

0.1 mW

Adjustment Range

~0 mW to Full Power

Operating Temperature

15 to 35 °C

Storage Temperature

0 to 50 °C SFS105/125Y Multimode Fiber (Core Size: Ø105 µm)

Fiber

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

*Output power ranges from 0 - 50 mW. Due to variations between laser diodes, maximum output power may be higher.

Front Panel of S1FC473MM

Back Panel of S1FC473MM

PRICE DESCRIPTION $ 6,910.00 FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source, 473 nm, Class 3B, MM Fiber

Do you need a...

Patch Cable? The following patch cables are compatible with the fiber-coupled laser sources sold on pages 480 - 483. Please visit our website to view our complete selection of patch cables.

WAVELENGTH 405 nm 473 nm 488 nm

COMPATIBLE SOURCE(S)

1 m FC/PC CABLE

2 m FC/PC CABLE

5 m FC/PC CABLE

MCLS1, S3FC405

P1-305A-FC-1: $77.52 P1-405B-FC-1: $72.42

P1-305A-FC-2: $93.84 P1-405B-FC-2: $81.60

P1-405B-FC-5: $ 95.88

MCLS1, S3FC473

P1-405B-FC-1: $72.42 P1-460B-FC-1: $71.40

P1-405B-FC-2: $81.60 P1-460B-FC-2: $78.54

P1-405B-FC-5: $95.88 P1-460B-FC-5: $96.19

S1FC473MM

M43L01: $64.41

M43L02: $66.91

M43L05: $74.40

MCLS1, S3FC488

P1-460B-FC-1: $71.40

P1-460B-FC-2: $78.54

P1-460B-FC-5: $96.19

520 nm

MCLS1

P1-460B-FC-1: $71.40

P1-460B-FC-2: $78.54

P1-460B-FC-5: $96.19

635 nm

S1FC635

P1-630A-FC-1: $63.24

P1-630A-FC-2: $68.34

P1-630A-FC-5: $82.01

638 nm

MCLS1

P1-630A-FC-1: $63.24

P1-630A-FC-2: $68.34

P1-630A-FC-5: $82.01

642 nm

MCLS1

P1-630A-FC-1: $63.24

P1-630A-FC-2: $68.34

P1-630A-FC-5: $82.01

660 nm

MCLS1

P1-630A-FC-1: $63.24

P1-630A-FC-2: $68.34

P1-630A-FC-5: $82.01

483

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Thorlabs offers a range of mounted, collimated, and fiber-coupled LEDs within the 365 - 940 nm spectral range, as well as three white light sources. All of these LEDs incorporate an EEPROM chip that prevents each from being over-driven when using a Thorlabs DC2100 controller.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Mounted LEDs The mounted LEDs are available uncollimated or collimated. In either case, a single LED is mounted to the end of a heat sink with internal SM1 (1.035"-40) threads, making it directly compatible with Thorlabs’ SM1 series of lens tubes. Mounted LED

Collimated LEDs

Alignment Tools

The collimated LEDs can be easily connected to standard and epiillumination ports on commercial microscopes, including Leica, Olympus, Nikon, and Zeiss. Interchange LEDs by unscrewing the collimator from the front of the mount of one LED and then screwing it onto the front of another mounted LED.

Laser Safety

Fiber-Coupled LEDs

Light Detection

Lab Supplies

Each fiber-coupled LED consists of a single LED that is coupled to the fiber using a technique called butt-coupling. During this process, the fiber connector is positioned so that the end of the fiber is as close as possible to the emitter, thereby minimizing losses and maximizing output power.

Collimated LED

The following pages contain our selection of LEDs ideal for use in Life Science applications. They are arranged by color (i.e., wavelength) with each page containing all configurations for that wavelength LED as well as all compatible drivers. Fiber-Coupled LED (Ø400 µm Patch Cable Not Included)

Stability of Optical Output Power

Normalized Power

1.0 Thorlabs’ LEDs for Imaging LED without Thermal Management

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2

Mounted LED with Collimation Adapter Shown on an Olympus IX71 Microscope

484

0.0 0

20 30 40 Time after Switching On (s)

The graph above shows the decrease of optical output power due to increasing LED temperature.

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

UV (365 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives

M365F1

Targets and Reticles

Fiber-Coupled LED

Optical Components

M365L2-C5

M365L2

Collimated LED

Adaptive Optics

Mounted LED

1.0

Normalized Intensity

Features n 365

nm (UV) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Illumination Sources

UV (365 nm) LED Spectrum

Light Detection

0.8

Alignment Tools

0.6 0.4

Laser Safety

0.2 0.0 340

350

360

370

380

390

Wavelength (nm)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

M365L2-C1

UV (365 nm) Collimated LED

Olympus BX & IX

120 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 703.00

M365L2-C2

UV (365 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

60 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 703.00

M365L2-C4

UV (365 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

80 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 703.00

M365L2-C5

UV (365 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

80 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 735.00

M365L2

UV (365 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

190 mW

>10,000 hours

$ 455.00

M365F1

UV (365 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

3.0 mWb

>10,000 hours

$ 515.00

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Lab Supplies

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the UV LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Interface Power Supply Price

Analog

USB 2.0

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

485

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

UV (385 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives

M385F1

Targets and Reticles

Fiber-Coupled LED

Optical Components

M385L2-C1 Collimated LED

Adaptive Optics

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Mounted LED

UV (385 nm) LED Spectrum

1.0

Features n 385

Normalized Intensity

Illumination Sources

M385L2

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 350

360

370

380

390

400

410

420

Wavelength (nm)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

M385L2-C1

UV (385 nm) Collimated LED

Olympus BX & IX

170 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 703.00

M385L2-C2

UV (385 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

90 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 703.00

M385L2-C4

UV (385 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

110 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 703.00

M385L2-C5

UV (385 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

120 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 735.00

M385L2

UV (385 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

270 mW

>10,000 hours

$ 455.00

M385F1

UV (385 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

9.0 mWb

>10,000 hours

$ 505.00

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

486

DC2100

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

UV (395 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives

M395L3 Mounted LED

Targets and Reticles

M395F2 Fiber-Coupled LED

Features n 395

nm (UV) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Normalized Intensity

1.0

UV (395 nm) LED Spectrum

Optical Components Adaptive Optics

0.8 0.6

Illumination Sources

0.4 0.2 0.0 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 420 440

Wavelength (nm)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

UV (395 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

420 mW

>10,000 hours

$ 275.00

M395F2

UV (395 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

3.5 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 425.00

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

COP4-A

Alignment Tools

PRICE

M395L3 aWhen

Light Detection

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Collimated UV LEDs are not available from stock. Alternatively, we offer collimation adapters for the mounted LED (M395L3). The SM1A2 and SM2T2 Adapters are required to attach the collimators to the LED Housing. COLLIMATION ITEM # PRICE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION COP1-A $ 175.70 Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm COP2-A

SM1A2 SM2T2

COP4-A

Choose One Choose One $ 175.70

COP5-A

$ 207.90

SM1A2

$ 24.00

SM2T2

$ 175.70

Required Required $ 34.00

Collimation Adapter for Leica DMI, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm Collimation Adapter for Zeiss Axioskop, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm Collimation Adapter for Nikon Eclipse, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm Adapter with External SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads and Internal SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads SM2 (2.035"-40) Coupler, External Threads

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

487

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

UV (405 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M405F1 Fiber-Coupled LED

Optical Components

M405L2-C2

Adaptive Optics

Collimated LED

M405L2 Mounted LED

Illumination Sources

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

UV (405 nm) LED Spectrum

1.0

Features Normalized Intensity

Light Detection

n 405

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 370

380

390

400

410

420

440

430

450

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Olympus BX & IX

440 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 703.00

UV (405 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

260 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 703.00

UV (405 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

360 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 703.00

UV (405 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

360 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 735.00

M405L2

UV (405 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

410 mW

100,000 hours

$ 455.00

M405F1

UV (405 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

3.0 mWb

>10,000 hours

$ 425.00

M405L2-C1

UV (405 nm) Collimated LED

M405L2-C2 M405L2-C4 M405L2-C5

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

488

DC2100

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Violet (420 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives

M420L3 Mounted LED

Targets and Reticles

M420F2 Fiber-Coupled LED

Features n 420

nm (Violet) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

Normalized Intensity

1.0

Optical Components

Violet (420 nm) LED Spectrum

Adaptive Optics

0.8 0.6

Illumination Sources

0.4 0.2 0.0 380

400

420

440

Wavelength (nm)

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

460

480

Alignment Tools

Violet (420 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

750 mW

>10,000 hours

$ 275.00

M420F2

Violet (420 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

8.90 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 425.00

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

COP2-A

Laser Safety

PRICE

M420L3 aWhen

Light Detection

Lab Supplies

Collimated Violet LEDs are not available from stock. Alternatively, we offer collimation adapters for the mounted LED (M420L3). The SM1A2 and SM2T2 Adapters are required to attach the collimators to the LED housing. COLLIMATION ITEM # PRICE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION COP1-A $ 175.70 Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm COP2-A

SM1A2 SM2T2

COP4-A

Choose One Choose One $ 175.70

COP5-A

$ 207.90

SM1A2

$ 24.00

SM2T2

$ 175.70

Required Required $ 34.00

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Violet LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

489

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Royal Blue (455 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M455F1

M455L3-C4

Optical Components

Fiber-Coupled LED

Collimated LED

Adaptive Optics

M455L3 Mounted LED

Illumination Sources

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Features Normalized Intensity

Light Detection

1.0

n 455

nm (Royal Blue) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Royal Blue (455 nm) LED Spectrum

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 380

400

420

440

460

480

500

520

Wavelength (nm)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

M455L3-C1

Royal Blue (455 nm) Collimated LED

Olympus BX & IX

500 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

M455L3-C2

Royal Blue (455 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

360 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

M455L3-C4

Royal Blue (455 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

430 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

M455L3-C5

Royal Blue (455 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

400 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 540.00

M455L3

Royal Blue (455 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

900 mW

100,000 hours

$ 260.00

M455F1

Royal Blue (455 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

9.5 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Royal Blue LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED.

ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Interface Power Supply Price

490

LEDD1B

Analog

USB 2.0

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Blue (470 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M470F1 Fiber-Coupled LED

Optical Components

M470L3-C1 Collimated LED

Adaptive Optics

M470L3 Mounted LED

1.0

Normalized Intensity

Features n 470

nm (Blue) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Illumination Sources

Blue (470 nm) LED Spectrum

Light Detection

0.8

Alignment Tools

0.6 0.4

Laser Safety

0.2 0.0 400

425

450

475

500

525

550

Lab Supplies

Wavelength (nm)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Olympus BX & IX

350 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

Blue (470 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

250 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

Blue (470 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

310 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

Blue (470 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

300 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 540.00

M470L3

Blue (470 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

650 mW

100,000 hours

$ 260.00

M470F1

Blue (470 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

8.0 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

M470L3-C1

Blue (470 nm) Collimated LED

M470L3-C2 M470L3-C4 M470L3-C5

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Blue LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

491

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Blue (490 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Fiber-Coupled LED

Mounted LED

Features

1.0

n 490

Normalized Intensity

Optical Components

M490F2

M490L3

Targets and Reticles

Blue (490 nm) LED Spectrum

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600

Wavelength (nm)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

M490L3

Blue (490 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

200 mW

>10,000 hours

$ 260.00

M490F2

Blue (490 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

1.5 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 366.00

aWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

COP1-A

Collimated Blue LEDs are not available from stock. Alternatively, we offer collimation adapters for the mounted LED (M490L3). The SM1A2 and SM2T2 Adapters are required to attach the collimators to the LED housing. COLLIMATION ITEM # PRICE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION COP1-A $ 175.70 Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm COP2-A

SM1A2 SM2T2

COP4-A

Choose One Choose One $ 175.70

COP5-A

$ 207.90

SM1A2

$ 24.00

SM2T2

$ 175.70

Collimation Adapter for Leica DMI, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm Collimation Adapter for Zeiss Axioskop, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm Collimation Adapter for Nikon Eclipse, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm

Required Required $ 34.00

Adapter with External SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads and Internal SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads SM2 (2.035"-40) Coupler, External Threads

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Interface Power Supply Price

492

LEDD1B

Analog

USB 2.0

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Cyan (505 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M505F1

Optical Components

Fiber-Coupled LED

M505L3-C5 Collimated LED

Adaptive Optics

M505L3 Mounted LED

1.0

Normalized Intensity

Features n 505

nm (Cyan) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Illumination Sources

Cyan (505 nm) LED Spectrum

Light Detection

0.8

Alignment Tools

0.6 0.4

Laser Safety

0.2 0.0 400

425

450

475

500

525

575

550

600

Lab Supplies

Wavelength (nm)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

M505L3-C1

Cyan (505 nm) Collimated LED

Olympus BX & IX

210 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

M505L3-C2

Cyan (505 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

150 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

M505L3-C4

Cyan (505 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

180 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

M505L3-C5

Cyan (505 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

170 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 540.00

M505L3

Cyan (505 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

400 mW

100,000 hours

$ 260.00

M505F1

Cyan (505 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

7.0 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Cyan LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

493

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Green (530 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M530F1

Optical Components

Fiber-Coupled LED

M530L3-C2 Collimated LED

M530L3

Adaptive Optics

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Features

1.0

n 530

0.8

nm (Green) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Normalized Intensity

Illumination Sources

Mounted LED

Green (530 nm) LED Spectrum

0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 450

475

500

525

550

575

600

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Olympus BX & IX

170 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

Green (530 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

130 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

Green (530 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

150 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 508.00

Green (530 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

150 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 540.00

M530L3

Green (530 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

350 mW

100,000 hours

$ 260.00

M530F1

Green (530 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

4.0 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

M530L3-C1

Green (530 nm) Collimated LED

M530L3-C2 M530L3-C4 M530L3-C5

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Green LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

494

LEDD1B

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Green Yellow (565 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives

M565L3 Mounted LED

M565F1

Targets and Reticles

Fiber-Coupled LED

Features

Green Yellow (565 nm) LED Spectrum

nm (Green Yellow) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

1.0

Normalized Intensity

n 565

Adaptive Optics

0.8 0.6

Illumination Sources

0.4 0.2 0.0 400

450 500

550 600

650 700

Wavelength (nm)

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

Light Detection

750

Alignment Tools

Green Yellow (565 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

880 mW

>10,000 hours

$ 205.00

M565F1

Green Yellow (565 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

1.8 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 629.00

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

COP5 -A

Laser Safety

PRICE

M565L3 aWhen

Optical Components

Lab Supplies

Collimated Green Yellow LEDs are not available from stock. Alternatively, we offer collimation adapters for the mounted LED (M565L3). The SM1A2 and SM2T2 Adapters are required to attach the collimators to the LED housing. COLLIMATION ITEM # PRICE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION COP1-A $ 175.70 Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm COP2-A

SM1A2 SM2T2

COP4-A

Choose One Choose One $ 175.70

COP5-A

$ 207.90

SM1A2

$ 24.00

SM2T2

$ 175.70

Required Required $ 34.00

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Green Yellow LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

495

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Amber (590 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M590F1 Fiber-Coupled LED

Optical Components

M590L3-C4 Collimated LED

Adaptive Optics

M590L3 Mounted LED

Illumination Sources

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Features

1.0

n 590

0.8

nm (Amber) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Normalized Intensity

Light Detection

Amber (590 nm) LED Spectrum

0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 525

550

575

600

625

650

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Olympus BX & IX

80 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 435.50

Amber (590 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

60 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 435.50

Amber (590 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

70 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 435.50

Amber (590 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

70 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 468.00

M590L3

Amber (590 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

160 mW

100,000 hours

$ 187.51

M590F1

Amber (590 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

2.5 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

M590L3-C1

Amber (590 nm) Collimated LED

M590L3-C2 M590L3-C4 M590L3-C5

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Amber LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. LEDD1B ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

496

DC2100

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Phosphor-Converted Amber (595 nm) LED

M595L3

Microscope Objectives

Mounted LED

Phosphor-Converted Amber (595 nm) LED Spectrum

Normalized Intensity

1.0

Features n 595

nm (Amber) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 450

Targets and Reticles

500

550

600

650

700

750

800

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # DESCRIPTION M595L3

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

Phosphor-Converted Amber (595 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

COP2-A

N/A

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME 445 mW

>10,000 hours

Light Detection Alignment Tools

PRICE

Laser Safety

$ 205.00

Collimated Amber LEDs are not available from stock. Alternatively, we offer collimation adapters for the mounted LED (M595L3). The SM1A2 and SM2T2 Adapters are required to attach the collimators to the LED Housing.

Lab Supplies

COLLIMATION ITEM # PRICE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION COP1-A $ 175.70 Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm COP2-A

SM1A2 SM2T2

COP4-A

Choose One Choose One $ 175.70

COP5-A

$ 207.90

SM1A2

$ 24.00

SM2T2

$ 175.70

Required Required $ 34.00

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Amber LED sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Interface Power Supply Price

Analog

USB 2.0

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

497

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Orange (617 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M617F1

M617L3-C4

Optical Components

Fiber-Coupled LED

Collimated LED

Adaptive Optics

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Mounted LED

Features

1.0

n 617

0.8

nm (Orange) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

Orange (617 nm) LED Spectrum

0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 550

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

575

600

625

650

Wavelength (nm)

675

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

100,000 hours

$ 435.50

Leica DMI

230 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 435.50

Zeiss Axioskop

280 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 435.50

Nikon Eclipse

260 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 468.00

Orange (617 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

600 mW

100,000 hours

$ 187.51

Orange (617 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

9.0 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

Orange (617 nm) Collimated LED

M617L3-C2

Orange (617 nm) Collimated LED

M617L3-C4

Orange (617 nm) Collimated LED

M617L3-C5

Orange (617 nm) Collimated LED

M617L3 M617F1

Collimation Package

bWhen

Olympus BX & IX

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Orange LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Power Supply Price

498

LEDD1B

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Interface

700

320 mWa

M617L3-C1

aAfter

Normalized Intensity

Illumination Sources

M617L3

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Red (625 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M625F1

Optical Components

Fiber-Coupled LED

M625L3-C2 Collimated LED

M625L3

Adaptive Optics

Mounted LED 1.0

Normalized Intensity

Features n 625

nm (Red) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

Red (625 nm) LED Spectrum

Illumination Sources

0.8

Light Detection

0.6

Alignment Tools

0.4

Laser Safety

0.2 0.0 575

600

625

650

675

700

Wavelength (nm)

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Olympus BX & IX

380 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 435.50

Red (625 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

270 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 435.50

Red (625 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

330 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 435.50

Red (625 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

300 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 468.00

M625L3

Red (625 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

700 mW

100,000 hours

$ 187.51

M625F1

Red (625 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

8.0 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

M625L3-C1

Red (625 nm) Collimated LED

M625L3-C2 M625L3-C4 M625L3-C5

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Lab Supplies

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Red LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

499

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Deep Red (660 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M660F1

Optical Components

Fiber-Coupled LED

M660L3-C4 Collimated LED

Adaptive Optics

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Mounted LED

1.0

Features n 660

nm (Deep Red) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Normalized Intensity

Illumination Sources

M660L3

Deep Red (660 nm) LED Spectrum

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 600

620

640

660

680

700

720

740

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

M660L3-C1

Deep Red (660 nm) Collimated LED

Olympus BX & IX

600 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 453.00

M660L3-C2

Deep Red (660 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

370 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 453.00

M660L3-C4

Deep Red (660 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

420 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 453.00

M660L3-C5

Deep Red (660 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

410 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 485.00

M660L3

Deep Red (660 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

640 mW

100,000 hours

$ 205.00

M660F1

Deep Red (660 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

13.0 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Deep Red LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Interface Power Supply Price

500

LEDD1B

Analog

USB 2.0

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Far Red 735 nm LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M735F1 Fiber-Coupled LED

M735L3-C1

Optical Components Adaptive Optics

M735L3

Collimated LED

Mounted LED

Features

1.0

n 735

0.8

Normalized Intensity

nm (Far Red) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Illumination Sources

Far Red (735 nm) LED Spectrum

Light Detection Alignment Tools

0.6 0.4

Laser Safety

0.2 0.0 650

675

700

725

750

775

Wavelength (nm)

800

825

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

M735L3-C1

Far Red (735 nm) Collimated LED

Olympus BX & IX

160 mWa

>65,000 hours

$ 483.00

M735L3-C2

Far Red (735 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

100 mWa

>65,000 hours

$ 483.00

M735L3-C4

Far Red (735 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

140 mWa

>65,000 hours

$ 483.00

M735L3-C5

Far Red (735 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

130 mWa

>65,000 hours

$ 519.00

M735L3

Far Red (735 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

260 mW

>65,000 hours

$ 205.00

M735F1

Far Red (735 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

2.7 mWb

>10,000 hours

$ 366.00

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

850

Lab Supplies

PRICE

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Far Red LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Interface Power Supply Price

Analog

USB 2.0

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

501

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

IR (780 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M780F2 Collimated LED

Adaptive Optics

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

M780L3 Mounted LED

IR (780 nm) LED Spectrum

1.0

Features n 780

nm (IR) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Normalized Intensity

Illumination Sources

Fiber-Coupled LED

M780L3-C1

Optical Components

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 675

700

725

750

775

800

825

850

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Olympus BX & IX

210 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 483.00

IR (780 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

130 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 483.00

IR (780 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

180 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 483.00

IR (780 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

170 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 519.00

M780L3

IR (780 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

200 mW

>10,000 hours

$ 205.00

M780F2

IR (780 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

5.5 mWb

>10,000 hours

$ 366.00

M780L3-C1

IR (780 nm) Collimated LED

M780L3-C2 M780L3-C4 M780L3-C5

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the IR LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. LEDD1B ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

502

DC2100

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

IR (850 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M850F2

Optical Components

Fiber-Coupled LED

M850L3-C5 Collimated LED

M850L3

Adaptive Optics

Mounted LED

Features

1.0

n 850

0.8

Normalized Intensity

Illumination Sources

IR (850 nm) LED Spectrum

Light Detection

0.6

Alignment Tools

0.4

Laser Safety

0.2 0.0

775

800

825

850

875

900

Lab Supplies

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Olympus BX & IX

480 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 483.00

IR (850 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

330 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 483.00

IR (850 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

400 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 483.00

IR (850 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

370 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 519.00

M850L3

IR (850 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

900 mW

100,000 hours

$ 205.00

M850F2

IR (850 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

10.5 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

M850L3-C1

IR (850 nm) Collimated LED

M850L3-C2 M850L3-C4 M850L3-C5

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Interface Power Supply Price

Analog

USB 2.0

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

503

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

IR (880 nm) LEDs

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Features

M880F2

Fiber-Coupled LED

n 880

IR (880 nm) LED Spectrum

1.0

Normalized Intensity

Microscope Objectives

M880L3 Mounted LED

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0

775

800

825

850

875

900

925

950

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

M880L3

IR (880 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

300 mW

>10,000 hours

$ 205.00

M880F2

IR (880 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

2.7 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 366.00

aWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

COP2-A

Collimated IR LEDs are not available from stock. Alternatively, we offer collimation adapters for the mounted LED (M880L3). The SM1A2 and SM2T2 Adapters are required to attach the collimators to the LED housing. COLLIMATION ITEM # PRICE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION COP1-A $ 175.70 Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm COP2-A

SM1A2 SM2T2

COP4-A

Choose One Choose One $ 175.70

COP5-A

$ 207.90

SM1A2

$ 24.00

SM2T2

$ 175.70

Collimation Adapter for Leica DMI, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm Collimation Adapter for Zeiss Axioskop, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm Collimation Adapter for Nikon Eclipse, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm

Required Required $ 34.00

Adapter with External SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads and Internal SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads SM2 (2.035"-40) Coupler, External Threads

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

504

LEDD1B

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

IR (940 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

M940F1 Fiber-Coupled LED

M940L3-C2 Collimated LED

Optical Components

M940L3

Adaptive Optics

Mounted LED

IR (940 nm) LED Spectrum

1.0

Normalized Intensity

Features n 940

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

Illumination Sources

0.8

Light Detection

0.6

Alignment Tools

0.4

Laser Safety

0.2 0.0 750

800

850

900

950

1000

1050

Wavelength (nm)

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Olympus BX & IX

430 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 483.00

IR (940 nm) Collimated LED

Leica DMI

320 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 483.00

IR (940 nm) Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

380 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 483.00

IR (940 nm) Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

340 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 519.00

M940L3

IR (940 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

800 mW

100,000 hours

$ 205.00

M940F1

IR (940 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

5.5 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 366.00

M940L3-C1

IR (940 nm) Collimated LED

M940L3-C2 M940L3-C4 M940L3-C5

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Lab Supplies

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

505

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Broadband (470 - 850 nm) LEDs

Microscope Objectives

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

Fiber-Coupled LED

Mounted LED

Features n 470

– 850 nm Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Lab Supplies

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 400

Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Broadband (470 - 850 nm) LED Spectrum

1.0

Normalized Intensity

Optical Components

MBB1F1

MBB1L3

Targets and Reticles

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

500

600

700

800

Wavelength (nm)

900

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

1000

PRICE

MBB1L3

Broadband (470 - 850 nm) Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

70 mW

10,000 hours

$ 480.00

MBB1F1

Broadband (470 - 850 nm) Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

0.8 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 650.00

aWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

COP4-A

Collimated Broadband LEDs are not available from stock. Alternatively, we offer collimation adapters for the mounted LED (MBB1L3). The SM1A2 and SM2T2 Adapters are required to attach the collimators to the LED housing. COLLIMATION ITEM # PRICE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION COP1-A $ 175.70 Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm COP2-A

SM2T2

SM1A2

COP4-A

Choose One Choose One $ 175.70

COP5-A

$ 207.90

SM1A2

$ 24.00

SM2T2

$ 175.70

Collimation Adapter for Leica DMI, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm Collimation Adapter for Zeiss Axioskop, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm Collimation Adapter for Nikon Eclipse, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm

Required Required $ 34.00

Adapter with External SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads and Internal SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads SM2 (2.035"-40) Coupler, External Threads

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Broadband LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Interface Power Supply Price

506

LEDD1B

Analog

USB 2.0

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Warm White (3,000 K) LEDs

Microscope Objectives

MWWHF1

MWWHL3

Targets and Reticles

Fiber-Coupled LED

Mounted LED

Warm White (3000 K) LED Spectrum

1.0

Normalized Intensity

Features n 3,000

K (Warm White) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

Optical Components Adaptive Optics

0.8 0.6 0.4

Illumination Sources

0.2

Light Detection

0.0

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

400

450

500

550

600

Wavelength (nm)

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

650

700

Warm White Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

500 mW

>50,000 hours

$ 187.51

MWWHF1

Warm White Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

6.0 mWa

>10,000 hours

$ 365.95

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

COP1-A

Laser Safety

PRICE

MWWHL3 aWhen

Alignment Tools

Lab Supplies

Collimated Warm White LEDs are not available from stock. Alternatively, we offer collimation adapters for the mounted LED (MWWHL3). The SM1A2 and SM2T2 Adapters are required to attach the collimators to the LED housing. COLLIMATION ITEM # PRICE ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION COP1-A $ 175.70 Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX, AR Coating: 350 - 700 nm COP2-A

SM1A2 SM2T2

COP4-A

Choose One Choose One $ 175.70

COP5-A

$ 207.90

SM1A2

$ 24.00

SM2T2

$ 175.70

Required Required $ 34.00

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Warm White LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

507

Accessories Microscope Components

LEDs for Imaging Applications

Optomechanics

Cold White (6,500 K) LEDs

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

MCWHF1 Fiber-Coupled LED

Optical Components Adaptive Optics

MCWHL5-C5

MCWHL5

Collimated LED

Mounted LED

Illumination Sources

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

n 6,500

K (Cold White) Nominal Wavelength n Integrated EEPROM to Prevent Overdriving the LED When Used with DC2100 Driver n Stable Output Power n Collimation Adapters Available Separately for the Mounted LEDs (Please See Our Website for Details)

Normalized Intensity

Light Detection

1.0

Features

Cold White (6,500 K) LED Spectrum

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 400

450

500

550

600

650

700

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # DESCRIPTION

COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPE

MINIMUM OUTPUT POWER LIFETIME

PRICE

Olympus BX & IX

440 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 465.00

Cold White Collimated LED

Leica DMI

320 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 465.00

Cold White Collimated LED

Zeiss Axioskop

380 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 465.00

Cold White Collimated LED

Nikon Eclipse

340 mWa

100,000 hours

$ 501.00

MCWHL5

Cold White Mounted, Uncollimated High-Power LED

N/A

800 mW

100,000 hours

$ 187.51

MCWHF1

Cold White Fiber-Coupled High-Power LED, SMA

N/A

6.0 mWb

>50,000 hours

$ 365.95

MCWHL5-C1

Cold White Collimated LED

MCWHL5-C2 MCWHL5-C4 MCWHL5-C5

aAfter

Collimation Package

bWhen

Using Thorlabs’ M28L01 1 m Long MM Patch Cable, Ø400 µm Core, 0.39 NA, $81.60. Over 20 Additional Options Available Online

Compatible Drivers These LED drivers are compatible with the Cold White LEDs sold above. Both drivers feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control; however, the analog interface of the LEDD1B is not compatible with the EEPROM in the LED. LEDD1B ITEM # Description Max LED Driver Current

LEDD1B

DC2100

T-Cube LED Driver

High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Modulation

1.2 A

2.0 A

Compatible with EEPROM Overdrive Protection

Yes

Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input

5 kHz, Sine Wave

100 kHz, Sine Wave

Analog

USB 2.0

Interface Power Supply Price

508

DC2100

TPS001: $25.00

Included

$284.00

$1,770.00

Accessories Microscope Components

4-Wavelength High-Power LED Source

Optomechanics

Features n Rapid Switching and Intensity Adjustments via LED Current Settings n Compatible with DC4100 or DC4104 Driver n Light Port Adapters Available for Most Commercial Microscopes as well as Liquid Light Guides n 14 Available Wavelengths with 223 Available Configurations

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

LED4D Series 4-Wavelength LED Source

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Thorlabs’ 4-Wavelength Customizable LED Source combines four user-chosen LED beams into a single collimated emission beam (see chart on next page for available combinations). Together with the DC4100 or DC4101 4-Channel LED Driver, the LED4D provides a versatile light source with rapid switching and modulation of individual LEDs. Compared to nonLED sources, the LED4D provides a higher signal-to-noise ratio due to narrow bandwidth emission, simple operation without maintenance cycles, and no active cooling requirements. Microscope adapters are available and listed at the bottom of the next page.

4-Wavelength LED Source (LED4C) with Driver (DC4100) and Lamphouse Adapter (LED4A1) Mounted on Olympus Microscope

Normalized Intensity

1.0

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.0 350

450

550

650

750

365 nm 385 nm 405 nm 420 nm 455 nm 470 nm 490 nm 505 nm 530 nm 565 nm 590 nm 617 nm 625 nm 660 nm

Wavelength (nm) 509

Accessories Microscope Components

4-Wavelength High-Power LEDâ&#x20AC;&#x2C6;Source

Optomechanics

Available Wavelengths for 4-Wavelength LED Source COLOR

NOMINAL WAVELENGTH

MIN. OUTPUT POWER

BANDWIDTH (FWHM)

LIFETIME

Microscope Objectives

365 nm

85 mW

7.5 nm

>10,000 hours

385 nm

95 mW

10 nm

>10,000 hours

Targets and Reticles

405 nm

290 mW

13 nm

100,000 hours

Violet

420 nm

30 mW

12 nm

>10,000 hours

Royal Blue

455 nm

310 mW

18 nm

100,000 hours

Blue

470 nm

250 mW

25 nm

100,000 hours

Blue

490 nm

50 mW

27 nm

>10,000 hours

Cyan

505 nm

170 mW

30 nm

100,000 hours

Green

530 nm

100 mW

33 nm

100,000 hours

Green Yellow

565 nm

106 mW

104 nm

50,000 hours

Amber

590 nm

65 mW

18 nm

100,000 hours

Orange

617 nm

210 mW

18 nm

100,000 hours

Red

625 nm

240 mW

18 nm

100,000 hours

Deep Red

660 nm

210 mW

25 nm

>65,000 hours

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Our most popular wavelength combinations for use in the Life Sciences are 405 nm/470 nm/530 nm/617 nm (LED4D119) and 405 nm/470 nm/530 nm/590 nm (LE4D118); however, we do offer over 200 different configurations. Due to the optical configuration, certain wavelengths cannot be combined within the same source. Please visit www.thorlabs.com if your application would benefit from a different configuration. Rugged Optical System ITEM # LED4D118

PRICE $ 2,495.00

DESCRIPTION 4-Wavelength High-Power LED Head (405/470/530/590 nm)

LED4D119

$ 2,495.00

4-Wavelength High-Power LED Head (405/470/530/617 nm)

Compatible 4-Channel Drivers Both of these LED drivers are compatible with the 4-Wavelength LED source sold above. They feature three operation modes as well as pulse width and frequency control. ITEM # Max LED Driver Current Max Modulation Frequency Using External Input Trigger Input Channels Interface Description Price aAutomatically limits to LEDs max current via EEPROM bMaximum Modulation Frequency for Sine Waves

510

DC4100

DC4104 DC4100a

DC4104a

1.0 A per Channel

100 kHz (Simultaneous Across all Channels)b

100 kHz (Independently Controlled Channels)b

One (Controls All LEDs)

Four (Independent Channel for Each LED)

USB 2.0

Power and Control Up to Four LEDs Simultaneously $2,505.00

$2,759.00

Accessories Microscope Components

4-Wavelength High-Power LED Source

Optomechanics

Microscope Adapters for LED4D

Microscope Objectives

These adapters mate the LED4D Series of 4-Wavelength, High-Power LED Sources (featured above) to the illumination port of common commercially available microscopes.

LED4A1

ITEM # LED4A1

PRICE DESCRIPTION $ 60.00 Olympus IX or BX Microscope Lamphouse Port Adapter, External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads

LED4A2

$ 60.00

Leica DMI Microscope Lamphouse Port Adapter, External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads

LED4A4

$ 60.00

Zeiss Axioskop Microscope Lamphouse Port Adapter, External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads

LED4A5

$ 101.12

Nikon Eclipse Ti Microscope Lamphouse Port Adapter, External SM2 (2.035"-40) Threads

Targets and Reticles

LED4A2

Optical Components Adaptive Optics

LED4A4

LED4A5

Liquid Light Guides

Light Detection

Features

Alignment Tools

n Excellent

Transmission from 340 – 800 nm (See Plot for Details) n Outstanding White Light Illumination n Numerical Aperture of 72° n -5 to 35 °C Long-Term Temperature Range

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

LLG0338-6

Transmission of Liquid Light Guides

80 70

% Transmission

Thorlabs’ Liquid Light Guides, which are available in 4', 6', and 8' lengths with either a Ø3 mm or Ø5 mm core, offer outstanding transmission from 340 – 800 nm for white light illumination applications. For large core diameters, liquid light guides are a more efficient transmission solution than fiber bundles as they eliminate the void space that fiber bundles have. These light guides are recommended for use with the following light sources: tungsten halogen, xenon, and metal halide. The long-term temperature range for the liquid light guides range from -5 to 35 °C.

Illumination Sources

60 50 40 30 20 Ø5 mm Core, 6 m Long

10 0 300

350

400

450

500

550

Ø5 mm Core, 2 m Long 600

650

700

750

800

Wavelength (nm)

ITEM # LLG0338-4

PRICE $ 345.00

DESCRIPTION Ø3 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 4' (1.2 m) Length

OUTER DIAMETER OF TIP 5 mm

LLG0338-6

$ 405.00

Ø3 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 6' (1.8 m) Length

5 mm

LLG0338-8

$ 465.00

Ø3 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 8' (2.4 m) Length

5 mm

LLG0538-4

$ 445.00

Ø5 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 4' (1.2 m) Length

7 mm

LLG0538-6

$ 525.00

Ø5 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 6' (1.8 m) Length

7 mm

LLG0538-8

$ 595.00

Ø5 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 8' (2.4 m) Length

7 mm

LLG Attached to the LED4D 4-Wavelength LED Source Using the LED4B1 Adapter

This adapter contains a collimating aspheric lens to focus light AD5LLG from an LED4D source into an LLG held in the appropriate LLG-to-SM1 adapter (not included). The internally SM1-threaded AD3LLG output port of the adapter accepts the AD3LLG SM1 adapter for Ø3 mm core LLGs or AD5LLG SM1 adapter for Ø5 mm core LLGs. ITEM # LED4B1

PRICE $ 129.00

DESCRIPTION Liquid Light Guide Adapter for the 4-Wavelength LED Source

AD3LLG

31.50

Ø3 mm LLG to SM1 Adapter

AD5LLG

31.50

Ø5 mm LLG to SM1 Adapter

LED4B1 511

Accessories Microscope Components

FLIM LED Source: 10 MHz to 100 MHz Modulation

Optomechanics

FLIM (Fluorescence Lifetime Imaging) is an imaging technology that utilizes the exponential decay rate of the fluorescence from a fluorescent sample. It is mainly used with confocal microscopy and other microscope systems. The image in FLIM is based on the lifetime of the fluorophore signal, rather than its intensity. Since the excited state has a lifetime, the fluorescence signal is delayed with respect to the excitation signal plus reduced in amplitude. The lifetime can be determined from this phase shift and the amplitude reduction. This minimizes photon scattering in thick layers of the sample.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

Excitation Emission

φ a

m= b 0

Modulated Excitation and Fluorescence Signal used in Frequency Domain FLIM

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

3 Operation Modes n Internal

Modulation Mode up to 100 MHz External Trigger Mode up to 100 kHz n Constant Current Mode n

FLIM Source: Driver and LED Head

Thorlabs’ DC3100 Series of Modulated LED Sources is designed for frequency domain Fluorescence Lifetime Imaging (FLIM) and other microscopy applications that require advanced, modulated, high-brightness LED sources. Our FLIM LED sources include a high-current, high-power LED driver with three operation modes, an LED head with modulating electronics that are designed for high-brightness LEDs with high thermal dissipation losses, and the LED itself. There are four standard wavelengths available: 365 nm, 405 nm, 470 nm, and 630 nm. Other wavelengths are available upon request. In addition to the controls on the unit, the LED driver can be remotely operated using the USB 2.0 connector and the included software package with an intuitive GUI and an extensive driver set that supports integrated operations.

LED Head

DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LED Current

0 to 1 A

SM2 Threads (2.035"-40)

Internal Modulation Mode Modulation Frequency

10 – 100 MHz in 0.1 MHz Steps*

Modulation Depth

0 to 100%

Trigger Output

Sine Wave

External Modulation Mode Drive Voltage Modulation Modulation Frequency *LED Dependent

512

0 to 10 V (1 V/100 mA) Arbitrary 0 to 100 kHz (Sine Wave)

2.34" (59.5 mm) Ø0.26" (Ø6.5 mm) 4.02" (102.5 mm) 4.98" (126.5 mm)

Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings.

Accessories Microscope Components

FLIM LED Source: 10 MHz to 100 MHz Modulation DC3100-365

180

DC3100-405

180

0.0

-0.5

-1.5 Phase Difference (º)

-7.5

-90 Phase Difference Amplitude

-180

40 60 Frequency (MHz)

-3.5 -5.0

-6.5

-90

-9.0

-8.0 Phase Difference Amplitude

-10.5 80

100

-12.0

-180

50 Frequency (MHz)

DC3100-470

180

-9.5 100

-10

-90

-12 Phase Difference Amplitude

-180

Phase Difference (º)

-8

-90 Phase Difference Amplitude

-14

50 Frequency (MHz)

100

-16

-180

50 Frequency (MHz)

100

1.5 0.0 -1.5 -3.0 -4.5 -6.0 -7.5 -9.0 -10.5 -12.0 -13.5 -15.. -16.5

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

Amplitude (dB)

-6 0

Amplitude (dB)

Phase Difference (º)

-4

-11.0

DC3100-630

180

-2 90

Microscope Objectives

-2.0

Amplitude (dB)

-6.0

Amplitude (dB)

-4.5 0

Phase Difference (º)

-3.0

Optomechanics

1.0

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Four collimating lens housings are offered that adapt our LED sources directly to the illumination port of the Olympus IX/BX, Leica DMI, Zeiss Axioskop, or Nikon Eclipse microscopes. They collimate the light emitted by the LED modules using an AR-coated (350 - 700 nm) aspheric condensing lens.

LED Head Shown with an Olympus BX & IX Collimation Adapter

Collimation Adapters COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPES

OLYMPUS BX & IX MICROSCOPES

LEICA DMI MICROSCOPES

ZEISS AXIOSKOP MICROSCOPES

NIKON ECLIPSE MICROSCOPES

Photograph

Item #

COP1-A

COP2-A

COP4-A

COP5-A

Choose an LED Source (Includes Driver and Head) ITEM # PRICE

CENTER WAVELENGTH

MAX CURRENT

CUTOFF FREQUENCY

Additional LED Heads Available as Make to Order (365 - 850 nm)

DESCRIPTION

DC3100-365

$ 2,510.00

365 nm

700 mA

90 MHz

Modulated LED Source with a 365 nm Head

DC3100-405

$ 2,210.00

405 nm

1000 mA

95 MHz

Modulated LED Source with a 405 nm Head

DC3100-470

$ 2,210.00

470 nm

1000 mA

80 MHz

Modulated LED Source with a 470 nm Head

DC3100-630

$ 2,210.00

630 nm

1000 mA

70 MHz

Modulated LED Source with a 630 nm Head

Choose a Collimation Adapter (AR Coating: 350 – 700 nm) ITEM # COP1-A

PRICE $ 175.70

DESCRIPTION Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX

COP2-A

$ 175.70

Collimation Adapter for Leica DMI

COP4-A

$ 175.70

Collimation Adapter for Zeiss Axioskop

COP5-A

$ 207.90

Collimation Adapter for Nikon Eclipse

513

Accessories Microscope Components

High-Power White Light Sources

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

HPLS243

Thorlabs’ High-Power Light Sources are solidstate, plasma light sources (LIFI®) that combine the best features of solid-state electronics and full-spectrum plasma emitters. These sources incorporate a dielectric resonant cavity to efficiently couple power from a solid-state power amplifier into a high-intensity discharge vessel, resulting in a light source with a long lifetime and a complete color spectrum. They are ideal for applications such as endoscopy, fluorescence microscopy, reflectance microscopy, and other medical lighting and inspection applications.

The output port of a HPLS200 Series Light Source features a Liquid Light Guide (LLG) mount that accepts Thorlabs’ Ø3 mm or Ø5 mm LLGs. The design enables airflow and monitoring of the LLG tip temperature, which prevents overheating. To further protect the LLG, a hot mirror is placed just before the LLG tip. Adapters are available to integrate these light sources into popular microscopes. The HPLS200’s high-intensity output can be mated to the illumination port of many popular microscopes using a collimation adapter (see next page).

100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0

HPLS243

Wavelength Range

Included Liquid Light Guide

Ø5 mm Core

Ø3 mm Core

Power Consumption

230 W

Optical Power @ LLG Tip

6.0 W

2.5 W 0.66b

Numerical Aperture (NA) Rated Average Lifetime

10,000 Hours at 50% Intensity

Dimming Range

30 – 100%

Electrical AC Line Voltage

85 VAC to 264 VAC

aPrior to LLG bThe focusing

lens inside the nose cone of the light source has a NA of 0.66. The LLG is placed at the focal point of this lens.

LIFI® Plasma Light Source vs XE Blub Lifetime

HPLS200 Series Emission Spectrum

1.0

Output at LLG Tip

LIFI® Plasma Light Source 300 W Xe Bulb 0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

Hours of Operation

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 390

435

480

525

570

615

Wavelength (nm)

The lifetime of the LIFI® Plasma Light Sources exceeds many Xenon and Mercury vapor arc lamp light sources, as illustrated in the plot above.

514

HPLS245

400 to 700 nm

Color Rendering Indexa

Normalized Intensity

Lumen Maintenance (%)

Each light source is packaged in a compact housing that incorporates both the power supply and lamp assembly. A three-digit display, controls, and power switch are located on the front of the unit. The lamp can be enabled, and its intensity can be adjusted using the front panel. Alternatively, the lamp can be controlled via computer software using a USB connection. The rear of the unit features connections for a USB cable, an AC power cable, and a liquid light guide.

ITEM #

ITEM # HPLS243

PRICE $ 3,810.00

DESCRIPTION Solid State Plasma Light Source (Ø3 mm, 4' (1.2 m) Long LLG Included)

HPLS245

$ 3,910.00

Solid State Plasma Light Source (Ø5 mm, 4' (1.2 m) Long LLG Included)

660

705

750

Accessories Microscope Components

Liquid Light Guides Thorlabs’ Liquid Light Guides, which are available in 4', 6', and 8' lengths with either a Ø3 mm or Ø5 mm core, offer outstanding transmission from 340 – 800 nm (see the plot below) for white light LLG0338-6 illumination applications. For large core diameters, liquid light guides are a more efficient transmission solution than fiber bundles as they eliminate the void space. These light guides are recommended for use with the Transmission of Liquid Light Guides following light sources: tungsten halogen, xenon, and metal halide. The long-term temperature range for the liquid light guides range from -5 to 35 °C.

% Transmission

70 60 50 40 30 10 0 300

350

400

450

500

550

Ø5 mm Core, 2 m Long 600

650

700

750

800 LLG Shown with HPLS White Light Source and Microscope Collimating Adapter

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # LLG0338-4

PRICE DESCRIPTION NAa TIP DIAMETER $ 345.00 Ø3 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 4' (1.2 m) Length 0.59 5 mm

LLG0338-6

$ 405.00 Ø3 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 6' (1.8 m) Length 0.59

5 mm

LLG0338-8

$ 465.00 Ø3 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 8' (2.4 m)Length 0.59

5 mm

LLG0538-4

$ 445.00 Ø5 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 4' (1.2 m)Length 0.59

7 mm

LLG0538-6

$ 525.00 Ø5 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 6' (1.8 m) Length 0.59

7 mm

LLG0538-8

$ 595.00 Ø5 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 8' (2.4 m) Length 0.59

7 mm

aNumerical

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

20 Ø5 mm Core, 6 m Long

Optomechanics

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Aperture

Collimating Microscope Adapters COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPES

OLYMPUS BX & IX MICROSCOPES

LEICA DMI MICROSCOPES

ZEISS AXIOSKOP MICROSCOPES

NIKON ECLIPSE TI MICROSCOPES

Item Photo

Item #

LLG3A1-A

LLG5A1-A

LLG3A2-A

LLG5A2-A

LLG3A4-A

LLG5A4-A

LLG3A5-A

LLG5A5-A

3 mm

5 mm

3 mm

5 mm

3 mm

5 mm

3 mm

5 mm

LLG Diameter

Thorlabs offers collimation adapters with AR-coated aspheric condenser lenses (EFL = 40 mm) for collimating the output from our Liquid Light Guides (LLGs). Five different collimator housings are available; each is designed to mate to the illumination port on an Olympus IX/ BX, Leica DMI, Nikon Eclipse, Nikon Eclipse Ti, or Zeiss Axioskop microscope. ITEM # LLG3A1-A

PRICE $ 300.00

DESCRIPTION Ø3 mm LLG Collimating Adapter, Olympus BX / IX

LLG5A1-A

$ 300.00

Ø5 mm LLG Collimating Adapter, Olympus BX / IX

LLG3A2-A

$ 300.00

Ø3 mm LLG Collimating Adapter, Leica DMI

LLG5A2-A

$ 300.00

Ø5 mm LLG Collimating Adapter, Leica DMI

LLG3A4-A

$ 300.00

Ø3 mm LLG Collimating Adapter, Zeiss Axioskop

LLG5A4-A

$ 300.00

Ø5 mm LLG Collimating Adapter, Zeiss Axioskop

LLG3A5-A

$ 395.00

Ø3 mm LLG Collimating Adapter, Nikon Eclipse Ti

LLG5A5-A

$ 395.00

Ø5 mm LLG Collimating Adapter, Nikon Eclipse Ti

OPTIC SPECIFICATIONS Item # AR Coating Focal Length NA Magnification Surface Quality Centration

Uncollimated LLG Output

ACL5040-A 350 nm - 700 nm 40.00 mm ± 5% 0.554 Infinite 60-40 Scratch-Dig <30 arcmin

Collimated LLG Output

515

Accessories Microscope Components

Stabilized Broadband Tungsten-Halogen Light Source: 300 - 2600 nm

Optomechanics

Features

Microscope Objectives

n 300

- 2600 nm Stabilized Light Source a Fiber Patch Cable with SMA Connectors and a Universal Power Supply n >10 mW Coupled Power Through Included Patch Cable n Constant Intensity and Color Temperature n Accepts Ø1" and Ø25 mm Filters n Includes

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

SLS201 Stabilized Tungsten-Halogen Light Source (Included Filter Holder and Fiber are Shown in the Image)

Illumination Sources

This Stabilized Fiber-Coupled Tungsten-Halogen Light Source provides a constant-intensity, 10 mW blackbody radiation spectrum between 300 and 2600 nm. Since the blackbody spectrum spans both the visible and nearinfrared spectral ranges, this source is ideal for integration into optical measurement equipment. Combine the stabilized light source with a reflection probe and spectrometer for diffuse reflection and fluorescence measurements, or use it to back-illuminate a test target as part of a detector calibration system. It can also be used as an illumination source in a white light interferometer for applications such as mapping surface structure.

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

The SLS201(/M) is shipped with a 1 m long, 0.39 NA, step-index, multimode SMA fiber patch cable with a Ø400 µm core size. This configuration provides 10 mW of coupled output power. Smaller core sizes and numerical apertures or longer fibers can be used at the expense of output power, while a larger core size or shorter fiber length can be used to increase the output power. This source employs an internal feedback system to achieve a highly stable power output. The compact design (dimensions given in table to right) gives the user flexibility with positioning this light source on a crowded optical table.

SPECIFICATIONS Wavelength Range

300 - 2600 nm

Center Wavelength

1000 nm

Included Multimode SMA Fiber Patch Cable

0.39 NA, Ø400 µm Core, 1 m Long

Power Drift per Hour

0.01%

Power Drift per °C

0.1%

Color Temperature

2796 ± 15 K

Lifespan

10,000 Hours

Dimensions (L × W × H)

194.1 mm × 55 mm x 57.5 mm (7.64" × 2.17" x 2.26")

Removable Filter Holder The removable filter holder allows the user to mount Ø25 mm or Ø1" optics up to 8.0 mm thick inside the stabilized light source. (For additional filter holders purchase a CFH2-F online.) The front face of the light source features four 4-40 tapped holes, making it compatible with our 30 mm cage system.

0.8

98 97 96 95

SLS201 Stabilized Halogen Light Source Traditional Halogen Light Source 0

Time (hours)

ITEM # METRIC ITEM # PRICE SLS201 SLS201/M $ 990.00

516

Visit...

SLS201 Spectral Power Distribution 1.0

Power (a.u.)

Relative Power (%)

SLS201 Stability Comparison 100

www.thorlabs.com For Collimation Adapters for the SLS201 and SLS202

0.6 0.4 0.2

0.0 200

600

1000

1400

1800

2200

2600

Wavelength (nm) DESCRIPTION Stabilized Fiber-Coupled Light Source w/ Universal Power Adapter, 300 - 2600 nm, Patch Cable Included, 1/4"-20 (M6) Tap

Accessories

Stabilized Broadband Tungsten Light Source: 450 - 5500 nm

Microscope Components Optomechanics

Features n 450

- 5500 nm Stabilized Light Source n Includes a Universal Power Supply n >100 mW Power Measured Over the Clear Aperture of the SMA Port n Recommended for Use with our Fluoride Fiber n Constant Intensity and Color Temperature n Accepts Ø1" and Ø25 mm Filters

SLS202 Stabilized Tungsten Light Source

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

This Stabilized Fiber-Coupled Tungsten Light Source provides a constant-intensity blackbody radiation spectrum between 450 and 5500 nm. Since the blackbody spectrum spans the visible and mid-infrared spectral ranges, this source is ideal for integration into Mid-IR measurement and analysis systems. The S120-SMA fiber adapter on the front of the source is removable and can be replaced with any internally SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) fiber adapter. An MIR Fluoride fiber is recommended for use with this device. The included filter holder is anodized red and machined to match the height of the housing. However, the housing also accepts our CFH2-F filter holder, which is sold online if additional filter mounts are required. Either filter holder can be used for Ø1" (Ø25 mm) optics up to 8.0 mm thick.

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

This source employs an internal feedback system to achieve a highly stable power output. The compact design (see table below for specific dimensions) gives the user flexibility with positioning this light source on a crowded optical table. SPECIFICATIONS Wavelength Range

450 - 5500 nm

Center Wavelength

1500 nm

Power Drift per Hour

0.1%

Color Temperature

1900 ± 15 K

Lifespan

10,000 Hours

Dimensions (L × W × H)

194.1 mm × 55.0 mm x 57.5 mm (7.64" × 2.17" x 2.26")

SLS202 Stability Comparison

SLS202 Spectral Power Distribution

100

1.0

0.8

Power (a.u.)

Relative Power (%)

The CFH2-F replacement filter holder (sold separately) allows the user to mount Ø25 mm or Ø1" optics inside the stabilized light source.

0.01%

Power Drift per °C

98 97 96 95

SLS202

Time (hours)

ITEM # METRIC ITEM # PRICE SLS202 SLS202/M $ 1,500.00

Fluoride Fiber

0.6 0.4 0.2

SLS202 Stabilized Halogen Light Source Traditional Halogen Light Source 0

Have you seen our...

0.0 200

1000

1800

2600

3400

Wavelength (nm)

4200

5000

5800

Visit www.thorlabs.com for More Details

DESCRIPTION Stabilized Fiber-Coupled Light Source w/ Universal Power Adapter, 450 - 5500 nm, 1/4"-20 (M6) Tap

517

Accessories Microscope Components

Stabilized Quartz-Tungsten-Halogen (QTH) Light Source: 300 - 3800 nm

Optomechanics

Features SLS301

Microscope Objectives

n 300

– 3800 nm Stabilized Halogen Light Source n 1.7 W Collimated Free-Space Output n Closed-Loop Control for Constant Intensity and Color Temperature n Accessible Rear Port for Mounting Custom Optics n Vibration-Free Operation n Universal Power Supply Included n Compatible with 30 mm and 60 mm Cage Systems

Stabilized Quartz-Tungsten-Halogen (QTH) Benchtop Light Source

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

The SLS301(/M) Stabilized Quartz-Tungsten-Halogen (QTH) Benchtop Light Source provides a constantintensity 1.7 W, collimated blackbody radiation spectrum between 300 and 3800 nm. The broad spectrum spans both visible and near-infrared spectral ranges, making this source ideal for use in alignment, testing, and high-power illumination applications.

Each light source consists of a main lamp housing and a separate control box. The lamp housing incorporates a 150 W quartz-tungsten-halogen bulb, a front-port-located collimation unit consisting of an adjustable Ø2" lens tube and an uncoated plano-convex lens, and a mechanical LIGHT SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS shutter with an open/close knob to block light output. To facilitate Wavelength Range 300 – 3800 nm the use of custom optics, the front and back of the housing are each Power Drift per Hour 0.02% equipped with four 4-40 tapped holes for compatibility with our Power Drift per °C 0.1% 60 mm and 30 mm cage systems, respectively. The housing does Lamp Housing Dimensions 220 mm x 217 mm x 268 mm (L x W x H) (8.66" x 8.54" x 10.55") not incorporate a built-in cooling fan, making it suitable for use on Control Box Dimensions 308 mm x 200 mm x 94 mm vibration-sensitive surfaces. (L x W x H) (12.11" x 7.87" x 3.71") Included Power Supply

90 – 264 VAC @ 47 – 63 Hz

BULB SPECIFICATIONS Bulb Power

150 W

Center Wavelength

850 nm

Output Power

1700 mW

Color Temperature

3400 ± 15 K

Lifespan

1000 Hours

1.0

Relative Power (%)

100

Visit www.thorlabs.com for More Details

99 98 97 96

SLS301 Stabilized Halogen Light Source Traditional Halogen Light Source

95 0

518

Time (Hours)

ITEM # METRIC ITEM # PRICE SLS301 SLS301/M $ 3,800.00 SLS361

Spectral Power Distribution (Theoretical)

Stability Comparison

Have you seen our...

Color-TemperatureBalancing Filters

The control box that comes with the SLS301 is equipped with an on/off switch as well as three LED indicators for temperature, bulb, and lifetime status. An internal feedback system is employed to achieve the highly stable power output and color temperature. Electronic safety controls prevent damage to the bulb regardless of the power setting. The control box can be placed remotely and is connected to the lamp via a 1.5 m (4.9') cable.

Relative Power (a.u.)

Illumination Sources

36.00

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 200

600 1000 1400 1800 2200 2600 3000 3400 3800

Wavelength (nm)

DESCRIPTION Stabilized Quartz-Tungsten-Halogen Light Source with Universal Power Adapter, 300 – 3800 nm, 1/4"-20 (M4) Tap 150 W Replacement Bulb for the Stabilized Quartz-Tungsten-Halogen Light Source

Accessories Microscope Components

Broadband Halogen Fiber-Optic Illuminator

Optomechanics

Features

Microscope Objectives

n 150

W, 3200 K Halogen Bulb n Continuously Variable Output Power n SM1-Threaded Output Port with 91 cm (36") Long Fiber Bundle

Targets and Reticles Optical Components

Thorlabs’ OSL2 High-Intensity Fiber Light Source delivers OSL2 cool-temperature white light for brightfield microscopy, laboratory, and illumination applications. The output illumination intensity is exponentially variable from 0 to 100% using a knob on the front of the unit. The 150 W EKE halogen bulb has a 3200 K color temperature and is user replaceable (see page 521 for replacement bulb options).

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

The OSL2 comes equipped with a removable, 91 cm (36") long, Ø6.4 mm (Ø0.25") effective core fiber bundle. Additionally, this light source has an internally SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) output port for custom integration into optomechanical setups. This source also features a built-in universal power supply, and a location-specific detachable power cord is included for compatibility with 100 – 200 VAC as well as 220 – 240 VAC.

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Optional accessories are also available for use with the OSL2 light source: a bifurcated fiber Y-bundle with two goosenecked legs, a microscope ring illuminator, collimation and focusing packages for the end of the fiber bundle, and replacement bulbs. Please see pages 520 - 521 for details. LAMP SPECIFICATIONS

1.4 W

Included Bulb

OSL2B (150 W EKE, 3200 K)

Color Temperature of Included Bulba

3200 K

Time to Full Brightness

4 s (Typical), 7 s (Max)

Output Power Stability

±0.5% over 8 Hours

Lamp Lifetime

1000 – 10,000 Hours at 50% Brightness

Input Voltage

100 – 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 220 – 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Operating Temperature aAt

-20 to 40 °C

Maximum Bulb Intensity

FIBER BUNDLE SPECIFICATIONS Bundle Length

91 cm (36")

Numerical Aperture (NA)

0.57

Effective Core Diameter

Ø6.4 mm (Ø0.25")

Fiber Attenuation

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 400

500

600

400 – 1300 nm

Number of Fibers (Calculated)

6718

Bundle Minimum Bend Radius

100 mm

Operating Temperature

0 to 135 °C

PRICE 750.00

700

800

900

1000

Wavelength (nm)

OSL2 Long-Term Stability

1.000

0.999

0.998

0.997

Time (Hours)

<0.6 dB/m at 940 nm

Operating Wavelength Range

ITEM # OSL2

Normalized Intensity

40,000 Foot-Candles (~430,000 Lux)

Tipa

Normalized Intensity

Total Light Output of Bulb (Max) Power at Fiber

OSL2 Emission Intensity Distribution

1.0

28.4 mm (1.12")

Ø6.4 mm (0.25")

13.1 mm (0.52")

Ø7.9 mm (0.31")

Ø12.1 mm (0.48")

DESCRIPTION High-Intensity Fiber-Coupled Illuminator with 91 cm (36") Long Fiber Bundle

519

Accessories Microscope Components

Goosenecked Fiber Y-Bundle for the OSL2 Fiber Light Source

Optomechanics

The OSL2YFB Fiber Y-Bundle (Bifurcated) Cable splits the output of the OSL2 Fiber Light Source presented on the previous page into two independently positionable beams, allowing larger work areas to be illuminated. Unlike the fiber bundle included with the OSL2, each leg of this bifurcated cable is goosenecked for easy positioning by hand.

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

OSL2YFB Bundle with OSL2 Light Source

The OSL2YFB fiber bundle is used in place of the one included with the OSL2. Its Ø7.9 mm (Ø0.31") fiber tips have the same outer dimensions as the bundle included with the OSL2 light source. ITEM # OSL2YFB

PRICE 150.00

DESCRIPTION Gooseneck Fiber Y Bundle for OSL2 Fiber Light Source, 20" (51 cm) Legs

Microscope Ring Illuminator for the OSL2 Fiber Light Source

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Features Provides Lighting Along the Microscope’s Optical Axis n Large Optimal Working Distance Range: 50 - 140 mm n Provides a Bright, Uniform, 360° Shadow-Free Illumination Area n

Thorlabs’ FRI61F50 Fiber Ring Illuminator has a 915 mm (36.02") long fiber bundle that couples light from our OSL2 Fiber Light Source presented on the previous page into a Ø55 mm FRI61F50 ring illuminator composed of five fiber rings. The illuminator is compatible with any objective housing with a diameter between 52 and 60 mm and easily mounts onto most standard upright microscopes via three nylon-tipped thumbscrews that provide adequate holding friction without scratching or marring the microscope.

FRI61F50 Mounted on a Zoom Microscope

SPECIFICATIONS Operating Wavelength Range Transmission

46%

Working Distance (WD)

50 – 170 mm, 50 – 140 mm (Optimal)

Compatible Objective Housing Diameter Fiber Ring Width

ITEM # FRI61F50

520

365 – 900 nm

52 – 60 mm 0.5 mm

PRICE 390.00

Illuminated Diameter (mm)

Ring illuminators create overlapping beams incident upon the sample plane, which ensures a shadowless sample field and enables a relatively long working distance (WD). This ring illuminator provides lighting that Illuminated Spot Size at Sample Plane is very nearly aligned to the optical axis and is uniform across the 7 sample plane over the entire WD range. Y-Diameter X-Diameter

1 70

100

110

120

Working Distance (mm)

DESCRIPTION Fiber Ring Illuminator for OSL2 Fiber Light Source, WD = 50 - 170 mm

130

140

Accessories Microscope Components

Collimation and Focusing Packages for Fiber Bundles

Optomechanics ITEM #

OSL2COL

OSL2FOC

Use

Collimation

Focusing

20 mm

Ø17.8 mm x 47.3 mm

Ø17.8 mm x 56.0 mm

Working Distance (WD) Outer Dimensions Threads on Output Port

OSL2COL

Spot Size at 20 mm WD

Internal SM05 (0.535"-40) Threads Ø14.5 mm

Ø5.5 mm

The OSA2COL Collimation and OSA2FOC Focusing Packages are designed for use with the fiber bundle included with the OSL2 presented on page 519 or the OSL2YFB bifurcated fiber bundle on page 520. Two 6-32 setscrews that accept a 1/16" hex key secure the tip of the fiber bundle into the back of the collimation or focusing package. Internal SM05 (0.535"-40) threads on the front of each package and a 0.70" (17.8 mm) outer diameter make these directly compatible with our family Comparison of the light output from the fiber bundle included with the OSL2 broadband light source of Ø1/2" lens tubes and components. (a) with no lens assembly attached, (b) with the OSL2COL Collimating Package attached to the end of the bundle, and (c) with the OSL2FOC Focusing Packaging mated to the bundle.

ITEM # OSL2COL

PRICE $ 89.00

DESCRIPTION Collimation Package for OSL2-Compatible Fiber Bundles

OSL2FOC

$ 120.00

Focusing Package for OSL2-Compatible Fiber Bundles, WD = 20 mm

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Replacement Bulbs for the OSL2 Fiber Light Source ITEM # Bulb Type

OSL2B

OSL2BIR

150 W EKE, 3200 K

150 W EKE, 3200 K Aluminum-Coated Reflector

1000 Hours

200 Hours

Lifetime Voltage

Normalized Intensity

1.0 0.8

21 V

OSL2B and OSL2BIR Emission Spectra OSL2B OSL2BIR

0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 400

500

600

700

800

Wavelength (nm) ITEM # OSL2B

PRICE $ 47.00

OSL2BIR

60.00

900

1000

Thorlabs offers two replacement bulb options for our OSL2 fiber light source featured on page 519. The OSL2B 150 W, OSL2 3200 K replacement Light Bulb Replacement bulb is a direct Access Door replacement for the one included with the source. It has an integrated hot mirror that blocks most of the IR light. Alternatively, we also offer the OSL2BIR 3200 K Enhanced IR Replacement Bulb, which has an aluminum-coated reflector and no integrated hot mirror, thereby providing illumination from the visible into the near infrared. Spectra for each bulb are shown to the left.

DESCRIPTION 3200 K Replacement Bulb for OSL2, 1000 Hour Lifetime 3200 K Enhanced IR Replacement Bulb for OSL2, 200 Hour Lifetime

521

Accessories Microscope Components

Popular Power Meter Solutions in the Life Sciences: Overview

Optomechanics

Power Meter Console Options

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

Thorlabs offers five power meter console options that can be combined with over 30 sensor heads to create a power meter solution. The systems presented in this catalog pair our popular touch screen and digital power meters with the most commonly used sensor heads for life science applications. Additional power meter consoles, including analog, handheld, and dual-channel benchtop versions are available on our website: www.thorlabs.com.

Digital Console

Features n External

2 GB SD Memory Card for Storing and Transferring Data n USB 2.0 Remote Operation

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Simulated Analog Needle View on the PM100D

PM100D See Pages 532 - 533 for Details

Touch Screen Console Features

Lab Supplies

n Advanced

Spectral Correction Support n Data Storage and Transfer: Internal Memory or USB Stick n USB 2.0 Remote Operation

Additional Options

PM200

Simulated Analog Needle View on the PM200

See Pages 534 - 537 for Details

PM320E

ITEM #

PM100D

PM200

Digital Power and Energy Meter Console

Touch Screen Power and Energy Meter Console

7.09" x 4.13" x 1.50" (180 mm x 105 mm x 38 mm)

6.70" x 4.93" x 1.48" (170.2 mm x 125.1 mm x 37.5 mm)

Description Housing Dimensions (H x W x D) External Trigger Input Power

PM100USB

ď ?

Battery or via USB or Included Adapter

Battery or via Included Power Supply

Display Type

320 x 240 Pixel Backlit Graphical LCD

Touch Screen Color Display with VGA Resolution

Dimensions

3.17" x 2.36" (80.4 mm x 60.0 mm)

4.65" x 3.48" (118.0 mm x 88.5 mm)

Refresh Rate

20 Hz

15 Hz

Type

SD Card

Nand Flash

Size

2 GB

128 MB

Internal Memory

PM100A

Available Online

All-In-One Wireless Power Meters Thorlabs has also designed two all-in-one handheld power meters. These compact devices can provide a calibrated power reading locally via an OLED screen or be controlled remotely via a PC or mobile device. Applications for remote power meter control can be downloaded from the App StoreSM (for mobile devices running iOS) or from Google Play (for the Androidâ&#x201E;˘ operating system). See pages 524 - 525 for details.

522

PM160 Wireless Power Meter

Accessories Microscope Components

Popular Power Meter Solutions in the Life Sciences: Overview Sensor Selection A selection of Thorlabs’ popular power sensors are outlined below, each shown with a compatible console. Details are provided in the following pages. To explore the full range of sensor head options that we offer, visit our website at www.thorlabs.com.

Ideal for Measuring Power at the Sample Stage of a Microscope

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

S170C Photodiode Sensor with PM200 Console, 350 - 1100 nm

S175C Photodiode Sensor with PM100D Console, 300 - 10.6 µm

See Pages 526 - 527

Ideal for Low-Power Laser Diodes and LED Sources

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

S120C Photodiode Sensor with PM200 Console, 400 - 1100 nm

S130C Photodiode Sensor with PM200 Console, 400 - 1100 nm

S151C Photodiode Sensor with PM100D Console, 400 - 1100 nm

See Pages 528 - 529

(Post, Post Holder, and Base Plate Not Included)

Ideal for High-Power and Femtosecond Laser

S305C Thermal Sensor with PM200 Console, 190 nm - 25 µm

S310C Thermal Sensor with PM100D Console, 190 nm - 25 µm (Post Included)

S350C Thermal Sensor with PM200 Console, 190 nm - 1100 nm and 10.6 µm (Post Included) (Post, Post Holder, and Base Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted)

S401C Thermal Sensor with PM100D Console, 190 nm - 10.6 µm

S470C Thermal Sensor with PM200 Console, 250 nm - 10.6 µm

See Pages 530 - 531 523

Accessories Microscope Components

All-In-One Handheld Wireless Power Meters

Optomechanics

PM160 Photodiode Sensor Power Meter

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

PM160T Thermal Sensor Power Meter

n Wavelength Range: 190 nm to 10.6 µm Wavelength Range: 400 to 1100 nm n Measures Optical Powers from 10 nW to 2 mW n Measures Optical Powers from 100 µW to 2 W and up to 200 mW with Slideable Neutral Density n Relatively Flat Spectral Response Ideal for (ND) Filter Broadband Power Measurements n Ultra-Slim 3.5 mm Thick Sensor End n Ultra-Slim 5.5 mm Thick Sensor End (6 mm with ND Filter) n Includes Detachable SM1-Threaded (1.035"-40) n Includes Detachable SM05-Threaded (0.535"-40) Adapter with MIR Viewing Target Adapter Plate n

S120-FC

PM20-FC SM05-Threaded (0.535"-40) Adapter

FC/PC Adapter Cap (Not Included)

Adapter with SM1 (1.035"-40) Thread & MIR Viewing Card

Alignment Tools Laser Safety

PM160

PM160T

Power Meter with Photodiode Sensor Head

Power Meter with Thermal Sensor Head

ND Filter Slides, Detent at On/Off Positions

Lab Supplies

Additional Features Sensor Arm Rotates up to 270˚ n Graphical OLED Display on Unit n Remote Operation • Bluetoothwith Transmitting Distance up to 8 m • USB for Recharging and PC Connection n Up to 20 Hours of Battery-Powered Operation

Locally and Remotely Controlled Power Measurements • Control Directly from Power Meter Interface • GUI for Remote Control from a PC Running a Windows Operating System • Applications for Android™ or iOS® for Wireless Operation from a Mobile Device (Not Included)

Thorlabs’ Wireless Power Meters consist of an ultra-slim sensor connected to a portable power meter with a built-in graphical Organic LED (OLED) display. Versions are available with either a silicon photodiode (PM160) or a thermal (PM160T) sensor that can measure powers from 10 nW to 200 mW or 100 µW to 2 W at wavelengths between 400 to 1100 nm or 190 nm to 10.6 µm, respectively.

The ultra-slim sensor end of the device connects to the handle with a joint mechanism that allows 270° of rotation. When rotating the sensor arm, there is a detent every 90° and enough friction in the joint mechanism that the sensor arm can be positioned at any angle within the allowed rotation range.

The PM160 includes an integrated ND filter that slides over the sensor, increasing the maximum measurable power from 2 mW to 200 mW. The unit automatically detects the position of the neutral density filter to display the correctly calibrated power measurement. These wireless power meters can fit into tight spaces and pick up an incident beam from any direction. 524

n Supports

Three taps compatible with 8-32 and M4 screws allow these power meters to be post mounted in a variety of orientations.

The PM160 Photodiode Power Meter with the ND Filter Over the Sensor

Accessories Microscope Components

All-In-One Handheld Wireless Power Meters

Optomechanics

Integrated Display These wireless power meters can be controlled locally by the four buttons located on the sides of the OLED display’s housing. The image to the right shows an example of the standard measurement screen. The function of each button is indicated by a label or icon at each corner of the screen. The menus on the OLED display can also be used to rotate the text in 90° steps for ease of reading.

Remote Operation

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

Sample Measurement Screen

A USB stick with a software development kit and a graphical user interface is included to remotely control the power meter from a PC via USB or Bluetooth. Alternatively, the GUI can be downloaded from our website. These wireless power meters can also be operated from mobile devices. The Optical Power Meter application for Apple® mobile devices running iOS is available free of charge at the App StoreSM. They can also be remotely controlled using the Thorlabs Optical Power Meter Android application, available from Google Play. iPad Mini Not Included ITEM # Sensor Properties Wavelength Range Optical Power Measurement Range Optical Power Resolution Recalibration Servicea Accuracy Power Linearity Active Area Uniformity Slideable Optical Filter Average Power Density (Max) Sensor Aperture Sensor Coating Power Meter Remote Interface Power Supply Battery-Powered Operation Dimensions and Mounting Thickness of Sensor End Distance to Sensor from Top Surface of Housing Overall Dimensions Weight Adapter Plate with Aperture Thread Post Mounting Operating Temperature

PM160

PM160T

400 nm – 1100 nm 10 nW – 2 mW (1 µW to 200 mW with Filter) 100 pW (10 nW with Filter) CAL-S130 ±3% (451 nm - 1000 nm) ±5% (Over Rest of Range)

190 nm – 10.6 µm

10 µW CAL-S200 ±3% (@ 1064 nm) ±5% (Entire Range)

±1% ±1% Reflective ND (OD 1.5) with Diffuser

None

1 W/cm² (20 W/cm² with Filter) Ø9.5 mm (Ø0.37") None

500 W/cm² Ø10 mm (Ø0.39") Black Broadband

3.5 mm (6.0 mm with Filter) 5.5 mm 1.7 mm (4.2 mm with Filter) 2.6 mm 172.7 mm x 36.4 mm x 13.0 mm (6.80" x 1.43" x 0.51") 60 g (0.13 lbs) External SM05 (0.535"-40) External SM1 (1.035"-40) 8-32 and M4 Tap, 3 Positions 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

To ensure accurate measurements, we recommend recalibrating our sensors annually. Please contact our Technical Support Team for more information.

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

100 µW – 2 W

USB 2.0, Bluetooth (Class II) External: 5 V DC via USB, Internal: LiPo+ 380 mAhb Up to 20 Hours

Optical Components

The battery is recharged through the USB connection.

A Screenshot of the PM160 GUI for Windows Operating Systems

Included Components Power Meter n SM Thread Adapter n 1.5 m Long USB Cable w/ USB Type A and Micro B Connectors n USB Flash Drive with Software and User Manual n Certificate of Calibration n Quick Reference User Manual n 0.9 mm Hex Key (PM160T Only) n

Photodiode Sensor Power Meter and Accessories ITEM # PM160 CAL-S130 PM20-FC

DESCRIPTION Si Sensor Power Meter with Bluetooth and USB Operation, 400 - 1100 nm, 10 nW - 2 mW and 1 µW - 200 mW Recalibration Service for Si Power Meter Sensors for S130 Series and PM160 FC/PC Fiber Adapter Cap with Internal SM05 (0.535"-40) Threads

PRICE $ $ $

1,080.00 155.00 31.00

DESCRIPTION Thermal Sensor Power Meter with Bluetooth and USB Operation 190 nm - 10.6 µm, 100 µW - 2 W

PRICE 1,090.00

Recalibration Service for Thermal Sensors FC/PC Fiber Adapter Cap with Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads

$ $

170.00 38.00

Thermal Sensor Power Meter and Accessories ITEM # PM160T CAL-S200 S120-FC

525

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Microscope Slide Power Meter Features Measure Optical Power at the Sample Plane n Compatible with Most Standard Upright and Inverted Microscopes n Wavelength Range: 350 nm to 1100 nm n Sensitive to Optical Powers from 10 nW to 150 mW n Silicon Photodiode with Large 18 mm x 18 mm Active Area n

Light Detection

Novel Optical Design to Accommodate High NA Objectives n 20 mm x 20 mm Indentation Above Detector Accepts Immersion Medium n Information Stored in Connector • Sensor Data • NIST- and PTB-Traceable Calibration Data n Post Mountable via 8-32 (M4) Tap n

The S170C Microscope Slide Power Sensor Head is a silicon photodiode sensor designed to measure optical power at the sample in microscopy setups. The 76.0 mm x 25.2 mm x 5.0 mm sensor head has the same footprint as a standard microscope slide and is compatible with most standard upright and inverted microscopes. The large-area silicon photodiode, with an active area of 18 mm x 18 mm, can detect wavelengths between 350 nm and 1100 nm at optical powers between 10 nW and 150 mW.

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

S170C Microscope Slide Power Meter Sensor Head used with a 1.30 NA Objective and shown on an MLS203-1 Motorized Scanning Stage Equipped with an MLS203P2 Slide Holder.

The sensor is contained within a sealed housing, behind a neutral density (ND) filter with OD 1.5. The sensor head features a novel optical design that supports power measurements for objectives with NAs up to 1.45 (see the drawing below).

Novel Optical Design The illustration to the right shows the behavior of light exiting a high NA objective after it enters the S170C microscope power sensor head compared to a typical photodiode sensor. For objectives with NAs greater than 1.0 and a detector without index matching gel in the gap, some of the light will also undergo total internal reflection at the ND filter-air interface, causing additional losses before the light reaches the sensor.

S170C Sensor

Immersion Oil

ND Filter Index Matching Gel Sensor Housing *Do not place immersion oil or other immersion media directly on the ND filter of any Thorlabs photodiode detector other than the S170C, as they are not designed for this application and the oil cannot be cleaned from the filter surface.

526

Thorlabs’ Free-Space Photodiode Sensors

Sensor Active Area A = 9.0 mm 18.0 mm Total Width

Immersion Oil*

ND Filter Air Sensor Housing Sensor Active Area B = 4.75 mm 9.5 mm Total Width

Accessories Microscope Components

Microscope Slide Power Meter A 20 mm x 20 mm indentation above the surface of the ND filter is sized to accept standard microscope cover slips. An immersion medium (water, glycerol, oil, etc.) may be placed in this well directly over the ND filter, or a cover slip may be inserted first to simplify clean up. The cover slip and the top surface of the housing are easy to clean using the same procedures as used with focusing optics.

Optical Components

SPECIFICATIONS 350 - 1100 nm

Optical Power Working Range

Adaptive Optics

10 nW - 150 mW

Average Power Density

20 W/cm² (Max)

Detector Type

Illumination Sources

Silicon Photodiode

Recalibration Servicea

CAL1

Linearity

±0.5%

Resolutionb Calibration

Light Detection

1 nW

Alignment Tools

±3% (531 - 1000 nm) ±5% (Over Rest of Range)

Uncertaintyc

Neutral Density Filter

Reflective (OD 1.5)

Cooling

Laser Safety

Convection

Response Time

<1 µs

Active Detector Area

18 mm x 18 mm

Input Aperture

20 mm x 20 mm

Cable Length

Lab Supplies

1.5 m

Post Mounting

8-32 (M4) Thread

To ensure accurate measurements, we recommend recalibrating our sensors annually. Please contact our Technical Support Team for further information. b Measured with PM100D console in low bandwidth setting. c Beam diameter > 1 mm.

Using the engraved alignment grid on the back of the S170C sensor housing, a user can position the stage so that when the sensor is flipped, the beam strikes the center of the sensor.

Coming Soon

The Microscope Slide Sensor Connected to the PM200 Touch Screen Power Meter Console

In response to the popularity of our S170C microscope slide photodiode sensor head, Thorlabs is developing a thermal sensor with a housing that shares the same footprint as a standard microscope slide. Although thermal sensors have a slower response time than photodiode sensors, they offer a relatively flat response curve that is excellent for broadband power measurements.

A 1.5 m cable attached to the side of the sensor head leads to a D-sub 9-pin male connector. Sensor specifications and the NIST- and PTB-traceable calibration data are stored in non-volatile memory in the sensor connector and can be read out by the latest generation of Thorlabs power meter consoles.

Wavelength Range:* 300 nm – 10.6 µm n Power Range:* 100 µW to 2 W n Flat Spectral Response for Broadband Power Measurements n Large 18 mm x 18 mm Active Area n

For updates on our selection of microscope slide sensor heads, visit www.thorlabs.com. *This sensor head is in the final stages of development. Specifications are subject to change.

Microscope Slide Sensor ITEM # S170C

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

The bottom of the sensor housing features a laser-engraved grid that marks the sensor active area to aid in aligning and focusing the beam. Wavelength Range

Optomechanics

DESCRIPTION Microscope Slide Power Sensor, 350 - 1100 nm, 150 mW

PRICE 1,059.00

DESCRIPTION Compact Power and Energy Meter Console, Digital 4" LCD

PRICE 999.00

Touch Screen Power and Energy Meter Console, 5.7" Color LCD

1,545.00

PRICE 134.00

S175C

Choose a Power Meter Console ITEM # PM100D PM200

Recalibration Service for Microscope Slide Sensor Head ITEM # CAL1

DESCRIPTION Recalibration Service for Silicon Power Meter Sensors Except S130 Series

PM200

PM100D

Touch Screen Console (See Pages 534 - 537 for Details)

Digital Console (See Pages 532 - 533 for Details)

527

Accessories Microscope Components

Power Meters with a Silicon Photodiode Sensor

Optomechanics

Features Information Stored in Sensor Connector • Sensor Data • NIST- and PTB-Traceable Calibration Data

Measure Laser Power in Confocal and Optogenetics Applications n Wavelength Range: 400 nm to 1100 nm n Standard, Slim, and Fiber Sensor Formats

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

These power meters have a general-purpose silicon photodiode sensor that offers a fast response for precise low-power measurements.

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

The S120C photodiode sensor used with the S120-FC fiber adapter provides a quick and easy solution for measuring the power of lowpower or fiber-coupled laser sources.

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Calibration Non-volatile memory in the sensor connector contains sensor information and the NIST- and PTB-traceable calibration data. For accurate measurements, we recommend recalibrating these sensors annually.

S120C Standard Photodiode Sensor n Recommended

for Labs with Free-Space and Fiber-Coupled Sources (with S120-FC Adapter, Available Separately)

n IR

Disk Around the Sensor to Help Locate IR Beams

n SM1

S120-FC S120C

(1.035"-40) External Threads • Compatible with Thorlabs’ Lens Tube Systems • Mount Filters, Irises, and Lenses on Front of Sensor • Integrate into Setup for Permanent Power Monitoring • Use Thorlabs’ Extensive Selection of Adapters to Integrate into Custom Setups

(Post Not Included)

S130C Slim Photodiode Sensor n Recommended

for Applications Requiring Power Measurements in Tight Setups n

S130C

Sensor End is Only 5 mm Thick

Integrated Neutral Density Filter Designed to Slide Over Sensor (Position of the Filter is Automatically Detected to Provide Accurate Power Measurements) n

n SM1A29

Adapter with UV/IR Target for Mounting Light Shields, Filters, Fiber Adapters, and Other SM1-Threaded Components Available Separately 528

SM1A29

Accessories Microscope Components

Power Meters with a Silicon Photodiode Sensor

Optomechanics

S151C Compact Fiber Photodiode Sensor n Compact n

Solution for Labs with Fiber-Coupled Laser Sources

Microscope Objectives

Silicon Sensor Integrated into the Power Meter Connector

External SM05 (0.535"-40) Threads are Compatible with a Variety of Fiber Adapters n

FC/PC and SMA Fiber Adapters Included

Included SMA Adapter

ITEM #

Illumination Sources

S120C

S130C

S151C

50 nW – 50 mW

400 – 1100 nm 500 pW – 5 mW Up to 500 mWa 20 W/cm2

1 nW - 20 mW (-60 dBm to 13 dBm) 10 W/cm2

Wavelength Range

20 W/cm2

Average Power Density (Max) Detector Type

Si Photodiode

Recalibration Service

CAL1

Target Sensitivity

VIS/IR

CAL-S130

Alignment Tools

CAL1

Laser Safety

N/A

Reflective ND (OD2)

N/A

Resolutionc

1 nW

100 pW

100 pW (-70 dB)

Measurement Uncertainty

Light Detection

N/A

Sliding ND Filterb

Lab Supplies

±3% (451 – 1000 nm), ±5% (Over Rest of Range)

Response Time

<1 µs

Aperture

Ø9.5 mm

Cable Length Mountingd

Optical Components Adaptive Optics

S151C

Optical Power Range

Targets and Reticles

Ø5 mm

1.5 m

N/A

Universal 8-32/M4 Tap

8-32 and M4 Tapped Holes

N/A

Lens Tube Compatibility

External SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads

via Adapter (SM1A29)

External SM05 Threads

Included Fiber Adapters

N/A

FC and SMA Included

aValid when the sliding ND filter is in front of the sensor. bValid for devices with serial numbers of 1203xxx or higher.

Previous versions had Absorptive ND (Schott NG9) for the S130C.

cMeasured with PM100D console in low bandwidth setting. dS120C devices with serial numbers before 1203xxx had an 8-32

tap and came with an M4 Adapter

Choose a Silicon Photodiode Sensor ITEM # S120C S130C S151C aValid

DESCRIPTION Standard Photodiode Power Sensor, Si, 400 - 1100 nm, 50 mW Slim Photodiode Power Sensor, Si, 400 - 1100 nm, 500 mWa Compact Fiber Photodiode Power Sensors, Si, 400 - 1100 nm, 20 mW

PRICE 285.00

$ 475.00 $

325.00

DESCRIPTION Compact Power and Energy Meter Console, Digital 4" LCD

PRICE 999.00

Touch Screen Power and Energy Meter Console, 5.7" Color LCD

1,545.00

when the sliding ND filter is in front of the sensor.

Choose a Power Meter Console ITEM # PM100D PM200

Digital Console (See Pages 532 - 533 for Details)

FC/PC Fiber Adapter ITEM # S120-FC

DESCRIPTION FC/PC Fiber Adapter Cap with Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Thread for the S120C Sensor

PM100D

PRICE $

38.00

PRICE 39.00

Thread Adapter for Slim Photodiode Sensor ITEM # SM1A29

DESCRIPTION SM1 Thread Adapter for the S130C Slim Photodiode Sensors

PM200

Recalibration Service for Standard Photodiode Sensor (Recommended Annually) ITEM # CAL1

DESCRIPTION Recalibration Service for Si Power Meter Sensors Except S130 Series

PRICE 134.00

PRICE 155.00

Touch Screen Console (See Pages 534 - 537 for Details)

Recalibration Service for Slim Photodiode Sensor (Recommended Annually) ITEM # CAL-S130

DESCRIPTION Recalibration Service for Si Power Meter Sensors for S130 Series and PM160

529

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics

Power Meters with Thermal Sensors

Adaptive Optics

These thermal sensors are ideal for measuring the average power of pulsed laser sources and high-power CW laser sources. Other applications include power measurements of light sources with a broadband spectrum like ASE, LED, filament lamps, or swept sources because these sensors have a flat response over the specified wavelength range.

Illumination Sources

Calibration

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Features n Measure

Average Power of Pulsed Femtosecond Lasers n Flat Response Curve from UV to IR Ideal for Measuring Broadband Sources n Adapter for Fiber-Coupled Sources Available n 1.5 mm Cable with NIST-Traceable Data Stored in Connector n Ideal for CW and Long Pulsed Sources such as Diode, Argon Ion, Krypton Ion, Dye, He-Cd, and Nd:YAG Lasers

Each sensor is individually calibrated and shipped with a calibration certificate. The NIST- and PTB-traceable calibration data and sensor information is stored in non-volatile memory in the sensor’s connector so that the meter’s readings are wavelength corrected and accurate regardless of which power meter console is connected. For accurate measurements, we recommend recalibrating these sensors annually.

S305C Slim Thermal Sensor Measure Optical Power from 10 mW to 5 W in Tight Spaces n Very Compact Sensor Head: 40.6 mm x 40.6 mm x 18 mm (1.6" x 1.6" x 0.71") n 30 mm Cage System Compatible via Three 4-40 Tapped Holes n External SM1 Threads Compatible with Lens Tubes and Fiber Adapters n High Temperature Alert Sensor n

Fiber Adapter

S305C

S310C Standard Thermal Sensor n Measure

The S120-FC fiber adapter cap accepts FC/PC connectorized fibers. The internal SM1 thread provides compatibility with many of our power and energy sensors, including the S305C, S310C, S401C, and S470C thermal sensors available here. 530

S310C

Optical Power from 10 mW to 10 W n Four 4-40 Tapped Holes for 30 mm Cage Compatibility n Externally SM1-Threaded Adapter for Compatibility with Lens Tubes and Fiber Adapters n High Temperature Alert Sensor

(Post Included)

S401C High-Sensitivity Thermal Sensor Broadband Optical Power Measurements Down to 10 µW Compact Sensor Head: 33.0 mm x 43.0 mm x 18.5 mm (1.30" x 1.69" x 0.73") n Externally SM1-Threaded Adapter for Compatibility with Lens Tubes and Fiber Adapters n Includes 29.4 mm (1.16") Long, Removable Light Shield n

n Very

S401C Included Light Shield

Accessories Microscope Components

Power Meters with Thermal Sensors

Optomechanics

S350C Thermal Sensor for Excimer Lasers Large Ø40 mm Aperture and 40 W Max Power (CW) for Use with High-Power, Large-Spot-Size Lasers n Optimized for Excimer Laser Wavelengths: 0.19 – 1.1 µm and 10.6 µm n High Temperature Alert Sensor n

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

S350C (Post included)

Optical Components

S470C Thermal Sensor for YAG Lasers Optimized for Lasers with Low Average Power and High Peak Power Pulses n Measure Average Powers from 100 µW to 5 W n 35 W/cm2 Max Average Power Density n 100 GW/cm2 Max Peak Power Density for a 1 ns Pulse n External SM1 Threads for Compatibility with Lens Tubes and Fiber Adapters n

ITEM #

S305C

S310C

Wavelength Range

0.19 - 25 µm

Optical Power Range Max Intermittent Power

S470C

Light Detection

S401C

S350C

S470C

0.19 - 10.6 µm

0.19 - 1.1 µm, 10.6 µm

0.25 - 10.6 µm

Alignment Tools

10 mW - 5 W

10 mW - 10 W

10 μW - 1 W

10 mW - 40 W

100 µW - 5 W

15 W (2 min Max)

3 W (20 min Max)

60 W

500 W/cm2

2 kW/cm2 (Avg.)

35 W/cm2 (Avg.) 100 GW/cm2 (Peak, 1 nm Pulse)

200 W/cm2

Energy Density (Max)

0.2

Detector Type

J/cm2

(1 µs Pulse), 2

J/cm2

Stabilized Thermal Volume Absorber Convection

Thermal Surface Absorber

Resolutiona

100 µW

200 μW ±3% (1064 nm)b ±5% (190 - 2940 nm)c

Measurement Uncertainty Response Timee

0.7 J/cm2 (1 ns Pulse) 10 J/cm2 (1 ms Pulse)

(1 ms Pulse)

1 μW ±3% (1064 nm)d ±5% (Over Entire Range)d

1 mW ±3% @ 351 nmb ±5% @ 190 - 1100 nmc

10 µW ±3% @ 1064 nm ±5% @ 250 - 10.6 µm

<2s

Ø40 mm

Ø15 mm

M6 Tap, 75 mm Post Included (TR75/M)

Universal 8-32/M4 Tap, Post Not Included External SM1 Threads Compatible with S120 Series Adapters

Ø10 mm

Ø20 mm

Ø10 mm

Universal 8-32/M4 Tap, Post Not Included

M6 Tap, 75 mm Post Included (TR75/M) Externally SM1-Threaded Adapter

1.5 m Universal 8-32/M4 Tap, Post Not Included Externally SM1-Threaded Adapter

Cable Length

External SM1-Threads

Fiber Connector

Compatible with S120 Series Adapters

Cage System Compatibility

(1 ns Pulse)

Thermal Volume Absorber

<1 s

Sensor Aperture

J/cm2

Thermal Surface Absorber

Cooling

Lens Tube Compatibility

Illumination Sources

10 W (2 min Max)

Average Power Density (Max)

Mounting

Adaptive Optics

30 mm

N/A N/A

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

N/A

aMeasured

with PM100D console with acceleration circuit switched off for S310C, S305C, and S350C. Measured with PM200 for S401C and S470C. bOther calibration wavelengths available upon request. cSpectral calibration response values for wavelength correction outside this calibration range are interpolated from the general absorption curve of the absorber. dBeam Diameter >1 mm. eMeasured with display (0 – 90%).

Choose a Thermal Sensor ITEM # S305C

DESCRIPTION Compact Thermal Power Sensor, Surface Absorber, 0.19 - 25 µm, 5 W

PRICE $ 690.00

S310C

Thermal Power Sensor, Surface Absorber, 0.19 - 25 µm, 10 W

690.00

S401C

High-Sensitivity Thermal Power Sensor, Stabilized Volume Absorber, 0.19 - 10.6 µm, 10 µW - 1 W

690.00

S350C

Thermal Power Sensor, Surface Absorber, 0.19 - 1.1 µm and 10.6 µm, 10 W

1,020.00

S470C

High-Sensitivity Thermal Power Sensor, Volume Absorber, 0.25 - 10.6 µm, 0.1 mW - 5 W

1,079.67

PRICE 999.00

Touch Screen Power and Energy Meter Console, 5.7" Color LCD

1,545.00

DESCRIPTION FC/PC Fiber Adapter Cap with Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Thread

38.00

PRICE 170.00

PM100D Digital Console (See Pages 532 - 533 for Details)

Choose a Power Meter Console ITEM # PM100D PM200

DESCRIPTION Compact Power and Energy Meter Console, Digital 4" LCD

FC/PC Fiber Adapter ITEM # S120-FC

PM200

PRICE

Recalibration Service for Thermal Sensors (Recommended Annually) ITEM # CAL-S200

DESCRIPTION Recalibration Service for Thermal Sensors

Touch Screen Console (See Pages 534 - 537 for Details)

531

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

PM100D Digital Console Operation Guide Features Power and Energy Measurements n Large, 4" Backlit Digital Display n Rechargeable Battery Lasts up to 8 Hours n USB 2.0 Connectivity n SD Card Slot for Recording Data n 16 Bit A/D Converter n

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

PM100D

Our PM100D Console is compatible with photodiode (power), thermal (power), and pyroelectric (energy) sensors. With a large, backlit 4" display and backlit buttons, it is a versatile console that is ideal for everyday use.

Included with Console Storage Case n Power Adapter (US, UK, Europe, and Australia) n Quick-Start Manual n USB Cable n 2 GB SD Card n 1 GB USB Thumb Drive with Software, Drivers, and Detailed User Manual n Calibration Certificate n

This console has a number of display options including numerical, graphical, simulated analog needle, and statistics. It can be used manually or remotely via the USB 2.0 computer interface. When connected to a computer, it is easy to record data using the GUI and drivers that are included on a USB thumb drive. A bottom-located SD memory card slot can be used to save data when not tethered to a computer. An SD card is included with each unit. The SMA connector on the side of the console provides a sensor output (0 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 2 V, 100 kHz), which is the amplified input signal (not wavelength corrected). This can be used to monitor the signal or to control external processes. The PM100D has an internal battery, offering up to 8 hours of operation per charge. Charge the PM100D via USB or by using the included power adapter.

PM100D Connection Ports

Sensor Connector On/Off Switch

USB Device (PC Operation) DC Input (Charger)

532

Analog Output (SMA)

A 1/4"-20 hole is at the base of the console for post mounting (see www. thorlabs.com for threading adapters). In addition, the unit can be placed upright on the table using the kickstand on the back.

Accessories Microscope Components

PM100D Digital Console Operation Guide

Digital Console Screen

Sensor Info

The menus at the bottom of the screen can be used to access the different measurement views, power and energy range settings, wavelength, measurement configuration, units, audio tuning, and the system menu. Date/Time

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

Battery Info s

The PM100D display with the numeric readout view is shown below. The power display can be set to one of five formats, including a trend graph showing changes in power over time, a simulated analog needle display, a statistics screen, and a bar graph.

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

Main Readout with Numerical View

Light Detection Alignment Tools

Bar Graph Showing Relative and Absolute Changes in Power

Min and Max Values

Menu for Changing the Display and Other Console Settings

Numerical Power Readout Screen of the PM100D PHOTODIODE SENSOR INPUT (CURRENT) Measurement Ranges Accuracy Bandwidth

W, dBm, W/cm2, A ±0.2% of Full Scale (5 µA – 5 mA); ±0.5% of Full Scale (50 nA) DC to 100 kHz, Dependent on Sensor and Settings

THERMOPILE SENSOR INPUT (VOLTAGE) Measurement Ranges

4 Decades; 1 mV – 1 V W, dBm, W/cm2, V

Units Accuracy Bandwidth

±0.5% of Full Scale (10 mV – 1 V); ±1% of full Scale (1 mV) DC to 10 Hz, Dependent on Sensor and Settings

Time Constant Correction

1 – 30 s

ANALOG OUTPUT Connector Bandwidth

0–2V Up to 100 kHz, Dependent on Sensor and Settings

SENSOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT Supported Temperature Sensor

Thermistor

Temperature Measurement Range

-10 to 80 ºC

ITEM # PM100D

Sensor Input Display

Female DB9 for C-Series Connectors 80.4 mm x 60 mm (3.17" x 2.36"), 320 x 240 Pixels

Display Update Rate (Max)

20 Hz

Display Screens

Numerical, Bar Graph, Trend Graph, Statistics, Simulated Analog Needle

Memory Card

SD, 2 GB

A/D Converter Computer Connectivity

16 Bit USB 2.0, Mini USB

Battery

Li-Polymer 3.7 V 1300 mAh; up to 8 hrs Operation

Dimensions

180 mm x 105 mm x 38 mm (7.09" x 4.13" x 1.50")

SMA

Voltage Range

Lab Supplies

GENERAL 6 Decades; 50 nA – 5 mA

Units

Laser Safety

0 to 40 ºC

Operating Temperature

-40 to 70 ºC

Storage Temperature Mounting Options

DESCRIPTION Compact Power and Energy Meter Console, Digital 4" LCD

Kickstand, 1/4"-20 Mounting Hole

PRICE 999.00

Have you seen our...

85 MHz, 10 fs Ti:Sapphire Laser This laser is the ideal source for multifluorophore multiphoton imaging, as shown in this mouse intestine sample labeled with Alexa 350 and Alexa 568 dyes.

See Pages 142 - 143 533

Accessories Microscope Components

PM200 Touch Screen Console Operation Guide

Optomechanics

Features Brilliant 5.7" Color Touch Screen with VGA Resolution and Wide Viewing Angle n Advanced Spectral Correction Support n Power and Energy Measurements for CW and Pulsed Sources n Compact, Rubber-Protected Enclosure Measuring 170.2 mm x 125.1 mm x 37.5 mm (6.70" x 4.93" x 1.48") n 90° Flip Screen and Swivel Kickstand for Landscape or Portrait Viewing n Data Storage on USB Stick n USB 2.0 Remote Operation n Over 30 Compatible Sensor Heads n

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

PM200

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Thorlabs’ PM200 Touch Screen Power and Energy Meter Console, the latest addition to our power and energy meter console offerings, is the high-end counterpart to our PM100D Power Meter Console. It is equipped with a brilliant 5.7" color touch screen (118 mm x 88 mm) with VGA resolution that offers high contrast, a wide viewing angle, and a 90º flip screen that enables use in either a portrait or landscape orientation. The screen is encased in a compact, removable rubber housing that measures 170 mm x 125 mm x 38 mm. This console is compatible with all of our power and energy sensors for use from the UV to the Mid-IR (see pages 526 - 531 for the full line of sensor options). It offers six current ranges for use with photodiode sensors outputting currents from 10 pA to 5 mA and four voltage ranges for use with thermal sensors with thermopile voltages from 100 nV to 1 V. In both cases, manual and auto ranging are possible. A USB 2.0 port allows the user to control the console remotely via a computer.

Intuitive Touch Screen Operation

Removable Rubber Casing

Swivel Kickstand Offers Landscape or Portrait View

534

Accessories Microscope Components

PM200 Touch Screen Console Operation Guide Unique Features and Flexibility

When measuring the power of a broadband light source with a photodiode-based sensor, the wavelength dependence of the sensor can prevent an accurate measurement. However, if you load the spectral power density curve for your broadband light source, the PM200 is capable of using the NISTtraceable sensor responsivity at each wavelength to calculate the resulting responsivity setting that enables the correct power to be displayed. Similarly, you can also load a response curve for a filter and the meter will calculate the adjusted power and display the corrected value. The bullets to the right outline other features that were implemented in the PM200 to extend its functionality and applicability.

n Data

Recording is Stored to a Large Internal Memory (128 MB) or a USB Drive for StandAlone Operation n A Calculator Tool Suggests Appropriate Sensors for Your Application Based on the Relevant Laser Beam Specifications (Diameter, Wavelength, Power, Energy, Pulse Length, Etc.). n Responsive Touch Screen Allows Rapid Navigation Through Settings and Easy Monitoring n Long-Time-Scale Changes with On-Unit Plotting and Statistical Analysis Functions

The different display formats can be accessed by the “Measurement Views” button on the sidebar. For most applications, the numeric and needle views will be the best choice for an easily visible measurement readout. The interactive touch areas allow fast access to all settings.

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

s s

Zoom

Tune Sound

Relative Measurement

Zeroing

s Measurement Views

Reset Min/Max

Battery Info

Settings

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

s s

Main Readout with Fast Configurable Precision and Measurement Units Arrows for Ranging

Temperature*

Major Settings with Active Labels and Drop-Down Menus

Date/Time

Microscope Objectives

Alignment Tools

Power and Energy Measurement

Sensor Info

Optomechanics

Bar Graph with Min and Max Indicators

Supplementary Displays with Drag and Drop Configuration

s *Shown with Relative Humidity

Connectivity

PM200 Connection Ports

The PM200 console allows quick, hot-swapping of sensor heads and reads all the sensor information that is stored in the sensor head connector, including NIST-traceable responsivity curves, sensor types, and model number. These details can be shown on the sensor information display screen.

Auxiliary In/Output (External Trigger, 4x GPIO, 2x ADC)

A selection of diverse I/O ports enables quick integration into non-standard applications. Ports include an analog output, auxiliary input/output for external trigger, general-purpose programmable IO-ports, and ADC.

USB Device (PC Operation)

On/Off Button DC Input (5 VDC/2 A)

Optical Head Input Analog Output (0 – 2 V) USB Host (for Flash Drive)

535

Accessories Microscope Components

PM200 Touch Screen Console Operation Guide

Optomechanics

The display screen of the PM200 Power and Energy Meter Console can be customized to show different measurements. For example, the user can display the minimum and maximum values within a certain time period or enable a visual or audio peak indicator as a tuning aid. Below are several examples of available screens:

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Needle Display

Graph Display

Sensor Information

The needle display with its minimum and maximum indicators is very convenient for laser tuning. The large numeric display below the gauge provides an exact power readout. This screen offers the same convenient configuration features as the numeric display.

The graph display shows the power or energy reading as a function of time. While recording data, this screen can be toggled with the statistic display. Directly after recording or after loading stored data, you can zoom into the graph and set a cursor for data analysis.

The sensor information screen shows sensor-relevant data and the response curve with indicators for minimum, maximum, and set wavelength, which are stored in the sensor EEPROM.

GENERAL

PHOTODIODE SENSOR INPUT (CURRENT)

Sensor Input

Female DB9 for C-Series Connectors

Display

Measurement Ranges

5.7" TFT, 640 x 480 Pixels, 18 Bit Color

Viewing Area

118 mm x 88.5 mm (4.65" x 3.48")

Backlight Display

LED, Adjustable

Display Update Rate

Internal Memory

15 Hz Numerical, Bar Graph, Trend Graph, Statistics, Simulated Analog Needle 128 MB RAM

External Memory

2 GB USB Flash Drive (Included, 8 GB Max)

Display Screens

A/D Converter

16 Bit

Computer Connectivity

USB2.0 Type A (Device), Mini USB (Host)

Battery Dimensions Operating Temp/Storage Temp Features

Li-Polymer 3.7 V 2600 mAh 170.2 mm x 125.1 mm x 37.5 mm (6.70" x 4.93" x 1.48") 0 to 40 ºC/-40 to 70 ºC Rotatable Two-Position Kickstand, Removable Rubber Casing, Touch-Pen

Units Accuracy Bandwidth

6 Decades; 50 nA – 5 mA W, dBm, W/cm2, A ±0.2% of Full Scale (5 µA – 5 mA), ±0.5% of Full Scale (50 nA) DC to 100 kHz, Dependent on Sensor and Settings

THERMOPILE SENSOR INPUT (VOLTAGE) Measurement Ranges Units Accuracy Bandwidth

4 Decades; 1 mV – 1 V W, dBm, W/cm2, V ±0.5% of Full Scale (10 mV – 1 V), ±1% of Full Scale (1 mV) DC to 10 Hz, Dependent on Sensor and Settings

Time Constant Correction

1 – 30 s

ANALOG OUTPUT

Have you seen our...

Connector

Complete Sensor Selection For our full line of Photodiodes, Thermal, and Pyroelectric Sensors, visit www.thorlabs.com

Audio 3.5 mm, Left Side

Voltage Range Bandwidth

0–2V Up to 100 kHz, Dependent on Sensor and Settings

Accuracy

±3%

SENSOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT

S302C Thermal Sensor

536

S140C Integrating Sphere Photodiode Sensor

ES220C Pyroelectric Sensor

Supported Temperature Sensor

Thermistor

Temperature Measurement Range

-10 to 80 ºC

Accessories Microscope Components

PM200 Touch Screen Console Operation Guide

Optomechanics

Included with Console Storage Case n External Power Supply and Power Cord n USB Memory Stick with Drivers, User Application, and Operation Manual n

Calibration Certificate n USB Cable (Type “A” to “Mini-B”) n Cable with Flying Leads for Analog Output n Quick-Start Manual n

DESCRIPTION Touch Screen Power and Energy Meter Console, 5.7" Color LCD

PRICE 1,545.00

Photodiode Power Sensor Options ITEM # S120VC

DESCRIPTION Standard Photodiode Power Sensor, Si

WAVELENGTH RANGE 200 - 1100 nm

POWER RANGE 50 nW - 50 mW

PRICE $ 395.00

S120C

Standard Photodiode Power Sensor, Si

400 - 1100 nm

50 nW - 50 mW

285.00

S121C

Standard Photodiode Power Sensor, Si

400 - 1100 nm

500 nW - 500 mW

310.00

S122C

Standard Photodiode Power Sensor, Ge

700 - 1800 nm

50 nW - 40 mW

570.00

mWa

S130VC Slim Photodiode Power Sensor, Si 200 - 1100 nm

500 pW - 0.5 (Up to 50 mW)a,b

$ 575.00

S130C Slim Photodiode Power Sensor, Si 400 - 1100 nm

500 pW - 5 mW (Up to 500 mW)b

$ 475.00

5 nW - 5 mW (Up to 500 mW)b

$ 675.00

S132C Slim Photodiode Power Sensor, Ge 700 - 1800 nmc S140C

Integrating Sphere Photodiode Power Sensor, Si

350 - 1100 nm

1 µW - 500 mW

655.00

S142C

Integrating Sphere Photodiode Power Sensor, Si

350 - 1100 nm

1 µW - 5 W

910.00

S144C

Integrating Sphere Photodiode Power Sensor, InGaAs

800 - 1700 nm

1 µW - 500 mW

770.00

S145C

Integrating Sphere Photodiode Power Sensor, InGaAs

800 - 1700 nm

1 µW - 3 W

945.00

S146C

Integrating Sphere Photodiode Power Sensor, InGaAs

900 - 1650 nm

10 µW - 20 W

945.00

S150C Compact Fiber Photodiode Power Sensor, Si 350 - 1100 nm

100 pW to 5 mW (-70 dBm to +7 dBm)

$ 285.00

S151C Compact Fiber Photodiode Power Sensor, Si 400 - 1100 nm

1 nW to 20 mW (-60 dBm to +13 dBm)

$ 325.00

S154C Compact Fiber Photodiode Power Sensor, InGaAs 800 - 1700 nm

100 pW to 3 mW (-70 dBm to +5 dBm)

$ 410.00

S155C Compact Fiber Photodiode Power Sensor, InGaAs 800 - 1700 nm

1 nW to 20 mW (-60 dBm to +13 dBm)

$ 470.00

S170C

Microscope Slide Power Sensor, Si

aValid

for devices with serial numbers 1203xxx or higher. Older versions had an optical power range of 5 nW to 5 mW (50 nW to 50 mW with filter).

350 – 1100 nm bWith

10 nW - 150 mW

1,059.00

cValid

Filter

for devices with serial numbers 1203xxx or higher. Older versions had a wavelength range of 1200 to 1800 nm.

Thermal Power Sensor Options ITEM # S302C

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

Touch Screen Power and Energy Meter Console ITEM # PM200

Microscope Objectives

DESCRIPTION Thermal Power Sensor, Stabilized

WAVELENGTH RANGE 0.19 - 25 µm

POWER RANGE 100 µW - 2 W

PRICE 690.00

S401C

High-Sensitivity Thermal Power Sensor, Stabilized Volume Absorber

S305C

Compact Thermal Power Sensor, Surface Absorber

0.19 - 10.6 µm

10 µW - 1 W

690.00

0.19 - 25 µm

10 mW - 5 W

S310C

690.00

Thermal Power Sensor, Surface Absorber

0.19 - 25 µm

10 mW - 10 W

690.00

S350C

Thermal Power Sensor for Excimer Lasers, Surface Absorber

0.19 - 1.1 µm, 10.6 µm

10 mW - 40 W

1,020.00

S314C

Thermal Power Sensor, Surface Absorber

0.25 - 11 µm

10 mW - 40 W

855.00

S322C

Thermal Power Sensor, Surface Absorber

0.25 - 11 µm

100 mW - 200 W

1,260.00

S470C

High-Sensitivity Thermal Power Sensor for Pulsed Sources, Volume Absorber

0.25 - 10.6 µm

0.1 mW - 5 W

1,079.67

S370C

Thermal Power Sensor for YAG Lasers, Volume Absorber

0.40 - 5.2 µm

10 mW - 10 W

1,055.00

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Thorlabs’ full line of power and energy sensors are compatible with the PM100D and PM200 consoles. For more information, visit our website

Pyroelectric Energy Sensor Options ITEM # ES111C

DESCRIPTION Pyroelectric Energy Sensor, Broadband Coating

WAVELENGTH RANGE 0.185 - 25 µm

POWER RANGE 10 µJ – 150 mJ

PRICE 1,200.00

ES120C

Pyroelectric Energy Sensor, Broadband Coating

0.185 - 25 µm

100 µJ – 500 mJ

1,250.00

ES145C

Pyroelectric Energy Sensor, Broadband Coating

0.185 - 25 µm

500 µJ – 2 J

1,450.00

ES220C

Pyroelectric Energy Sensor, Ceramic Coating

0.185 - 25 µm

500 µJ – 3 J

1,500.00

ES245C

Pyroelectric Energy Sensor, Ceramic Coating

0.185 - 25 µm

1 mJ – 15 J

1,750.00

537

Accessories

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

VRC5

VRC6

Thorlabs offers viewing cards for UV, visible, NIR, and MIR beams. When a beam is incident on a card, a visible spot will be seen if the wavelength of the light falls within the absorption band of the card (see plots below) or for the VRC6 it must fall within the compatible wavelength range. They are commonly used for beam alignment and beam collimation. VRC1 Absorption and Emission VRC2 Absorption and Emission 100

VRC1, VRC2, and VRC4 These cards are made from a durable plastic with a photosensitive region adhered to the front surface of the card. The active region on the VRC1 and VRC4 is fast charging; hence, emission is persistent even when used in CW applications in a darkened room. The 1.25" x 2.1" (31.8 mm x 54 mm) detection region on these cards extends all the way to the edge of the card in order to facilitate its use during alignment procedures.

100

VRC1: 250 - 525 nm Working Range

60 40 UV/VIS Absorption

20 0 200

300

400

VIS Emission 500

600

700

60 40 20 0 400

800

80 60

600

NIR Absorption Band 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

Wavelength (nm)

Wavelength (nm) 100

VRC2: 400 - 640 nm and 800 - 1700 nm Working Range

80 VIS Absorption Band

Illumination Sources

VRC4

VRC2

VIS Emission

Adaptive Optics

VRC1

Relative Intensity (a.u.)

Optical Components

VRC4 Absorption and Emission

100

VRC4: 790-840 nm, 870-1070 nm, and 1500-1590 nm Working Range

Relative Intensity (a.u.)

Targets and Reticles

Emission Band

Microscope Objectives

Beams as Low as 1 nW/cm2 n Minimal Optical Charging n Free of Hazardous Reflections n Cards for the UV, Visible, NIR, and MIR n Detect

Relative Intensity (a.u.)

Optomechanics

Viewing Cards

Relative Intensity (a.u.)

Microscope Components

Absorption Bands

VRC5 Absorption and Emission* VRC5: 700 - 1400 nm Working Range

80 60 40

When the card is used in a darkened 20 20 Absorption Band room with a sufficiently bright source, 0 0 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 the fluorescence from the activated Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) photosensitive region can be seen through *Emission spectrum is the visible range. the back of the card. This is especially useful for aligning the overlap of two beams. The VRC2 is similar to the VRC4 and VRC1 except that it requires the user to charge the card with light from a visible light source. Detecting Spot Size on VRC6 Using a Ø0.78 mm Laser Beam 1.2

Detected Spot Size (mm)

VRC5 Our VRC5 IR viewing card has a photosensitive region sandwiched between two plastic layers. The card has a smaller detection region than our other viewing cards but offers a broader working range.

1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4

0.2 VRC6 0.0 The VRC6 MIR laser viewing card is compatible with wavelengths from 1.5 µm to 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 Power Density (W/cm ) at least 13.2 µm, as shown by testing results. The detector area on this card is a thin layer of liquid crystal that has been printed onto the black metal card; it does not need to be charged. Thermochromic liquid crystals are temperature-sensitive organic chemicals with twisted helical molecular structures. The MIR light changes the temperature of the detector area, resulting in a color change. The detector area is green between 25 and 30 °C, and it is black or brown otherwise. The minimum detectable density for this card is 0.3 W/cm2 at 1550 nm. User hint: The card can be quickly cooled by placing it on a room temperature metal surface. 2

ITEM #

538

PRICE

VRC1

76.65

VRC2

VRC4

VRC5 VRC6

WORKING RANGE

ACTIVE AREA

OVERAL DIMENSIONS

250 - 540 nm

1.25" x 2.1" (31.8 mm x 54.0 mm)

2.1" x 3.4" (54.0 mm x 85.7 mm)

76.65

400 - 640 nm, 800 - 1700 nm

1.25" x 2.1" (31.8 mm x 54.0 mm)

2.1" x 3.4" (54.0 mm x 85.7 mm)

76.65

790 - 840 nm, 870 - 1070 nm, 1500 - 1590 nm

1.25" x 2.1" (31.8 mm x 54.0 mm)

2.1" x 3.4" (54.0 mm x 85.7 mm)

119.70

700 - 1400 nm

0.75" x 1.5" (19.1 mm x 38.1 mm)

2.4" x 1.79" (45.5 mm x 61.9 mm)

25.00

1.5 - 13.2 µm

1.25" x 2.1" (31.8 mm x 54.0 mm)

2.1" x 3.4" (54.0 mm x 85.7 mm)

Accessories Microscope Components

IR Alignment Disks n Use

with Ø1/2" or Ø1" Optic Mounts n Ø1.5 mm Alignment Hole VRC2D05 1/2" Outer Diameter

VRC2D1 1" Outer Diameter

VRC2D1 Shown with LMR1 and Post (Sold Separately) ITEM # VRC2D05

SIZE Ø1/2"

PRICE $ 21.00

Optomechanics

These IR alignment disks are ideally used as drop-in tools to simplify active alignment of IR and visible setups. Available in Ø1/2" or Ø1" sizes, these drop-in disks align beams to the optical axis of our mounts or lens tubes. They are made of slow-fading phosphor that is active in the IR. See graphs of the absorption spectrums on the previous page.

VRC2D1

Ø1"

32.50

Ø1" IR Alignment Disk, Working Ranges: 400 - 640 nm and 800 - 1700 nm

VRC4D05

Ø1/2"

21.00

Ø1/2" Enhanced Alignment Disk, Working Ranges: 790 - 840 nm, 870 - 1070 nm, and 1500 - 1590 nm

VRC4D1

Ø1"

32.50

Ø1" Enhanced Alignment Disk, Working Ranges: 790 - 840 nm, 870 - 1070 nm, and 1500 - 1590 nm

Threaded IR Viewing/Alignment Disks

IR Viewing Surface

ITEM # VRC2RMS

CA* Ø0.70"

PRICE 80.00

DESCRIPTION RMS Alignment Disk, Working Ranges: 400 - 640 nm and 800 - 1700 nm

VRC2SM1

Ø0.79"

76.50

SM1 Alignment Disk, Working Ranges: 400 - 640 nm and 800 - 1700 nm

Optical Components

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

VRC2SM1

Made with Slow-Fading Phosphor n RMS (0.800"-36) or SM1 (1.035"-40) Threaded n 400 - 640 nm and 800 - 1700 nm Absorption Bands, see VRC2 Graph on Previous Page

Targets and Reticles

Adaptive Optics

DESCRIPTION Ø1/2" IR Alignment Disk, Working Ranges: 400 - 640 nm and 800 - 1700 nm

Microscope Objectives

Laser Safety

VRC2RMS

Lab Supplies

*Clear Aperture

Cage Alignment Plates Cage alignment plates are handy tools when building a cage system, as beam alignment can be difficult. These alignment plates drop into 16, 30, or 60 mm cages and provide a beam alignment target. A Ø1 mm hole (Ø5 mm on CPA2) on each alignment plate shows the center of a cage assembly. The VRC6CPT has an MIR thermochromic liquid crystal disk for aligning MIR beams within a 30 mm cage system. This alignment plate is made from the same material as our VRC6 Viewing Card.

Features n Alignment Plates for 16, 30, and 60 mm Cage Systems n Quick Drop-In Visual Aid CPA1 n VRC4CPT Features IR Disk for use in the 790 - 840 nm, 870 - 1070 nm, and 1500 - 1590 nm Spectral Regions (Ø1/2" Active Region) n VRC6CPT Features MIR Disk for use in the 1.5 – 13.2 µm Spectral Region (0.39" Active Region)

VRC6CPT

Visit... www.thorlabs.com

To View Our Full Line of Cage System and Lens Tube Components

Active Region

ITEM # SCPA1

PRICE 12.00

DESCRIPTION 16 mm Cage Alignment Plate with Ø1 mm Hole

CPA1

12.24

30 mm Cage Alignment Plate with Ø1 mm Hole

CPA2

12.24

30 mm Cage Alignment Plate with Ø5 mm Hole

VRC4CPT

29.50

30 mm Cage Alignment Plate with IR Disk

VRC6CPT

35.00

30 mm Cage Alignment Plate with MIR Disk

LCPA1

17.00

60 mm Cage Alignment Plate with Ø1 mm Hole

539

Accessories Microscope Components

Magnetic Laser Safety Screens TPSM1/M

TPSM2

Optomechanics

Our TPSM series of laser safety screens assist in the alignment of a beam. They are made of anodized aluminum and are engraved on one side with a 1/2" (10 mm) target grid for rough laser alignment; the other side is blank to provide a complete beam blocking option.

10 mm Grid

1/2" Grid

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

Each alignment screen has two magnets in its base for quick placement and removal. A through hole in the base can be used with a cap screw for permanent placement. Please note that due to the presence of strong magnets, these laser screens should not be used in the vicinity of pacemakers, credits cards, or other devices affected by magnetic fields.

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

ITEM # TPSM1

PRICE $ 28.50

DIMENSIONS (W x H) 2.95" x 7.87"

FOOTPRINT (L x W) 2.95" x 1.38"

GRID SPACING 1/2"

TPSM1/M

$ 28.50

75 mm x 200 mm

75 mm x 35 mm

10 mm

TPSM2

$ 35.00

2.95" x 11.81"

2.95" x 1.38"

1/2"

TPSM2/M

$ 35.00

75 mm x 300 mm

75 mm x 35 mm

10 mm

DAMAGE THRESHOLD >350 J/cm2 (1064 nm, 20 ns, 20 Hz, Ø1.14 mm)

Magnetic Beam Height Rulers n n n

Holes for Beam Alignment Spaced at 1" and 25 mm Intervals Laser Engraved with 1.0 mm and 1/16" (BHM1) or 1/8" (BHM2) Graduations Two Neodymium Magnets Provide Holding Force

Thorlabs’ BHM1 and BHM2 Magnetic Rulers measure beam heights up to 6" (152.4 mm) and 12" (304.8 mm), respectively. Fabricated from anodized bead-blasted aluminum, one side of the ruler is laser engraved with graduations for beam height measurements (see table below for details), while the other side is blank. Laser beams can pass through the ruler using Ø2.0 mm holes positioned next to the engraved numbers at both 25.0 mm and 1.00" intervals.

BHM1

The base of each screen is fitted with a pair of neodymium magnets that hold the ruler to magnetic work surfaces and provide flexibility of movement. Please note that due to the presence of magnets, this ruler should not be used in the vicinity of pacemakers, credit cards, or other devices affected by magnetic fields.

ITEM # PRICE BHM1 $ 19.94 BHM2 $ 39.00

DIMENSIONS (W x H)

FOOTPRINT (L x W) GRADUATIONS

30 mm x 160 mm (1.18" x 6.30")

30 mm x 30 mm (1.18" x 1.18")

40 mm x 310 mm (1.57" x 12.20")

48 mm x 40 mm (1.89" x 1.57")

HOLE SPACING

HOLE DIAMETER

DAMAGE THRESHOLD

1.0 mm and 1/16" 1.00" >350 J/cm2 and 2.0 mm (1064 nm, 20 ns, 20 Hz, Ø1.14 mm) 25.0 mm 1.0 mm and 1/8"

Have you seen our...

Laser Safety Screens Thorlabs offers aluminum laser safety screens that prevent stray or unwanted light from entering or exiting an experimental setup. The safety screens may be used for temporary laser beam blocking purposes, but for permanent solutions, please see our comprehensive family of beam dumps and traps.

See Page 564 for Details 540

TPS4 TPS7

Accessories

Website Navigation on www.thorlabs.com

Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

Multiphoton

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

The Thorlabs Visual Navigation Allows you to Search our Site via Subject Matter Enter or Upload Item #'s, such as ones Found in this Catalog, Straight to your Shopping Cart 11 Offices and 12 Distributors Worldwide Change Currency

The Thorlabs website is 100% built, supported, and maintained by Thorlabs employees. Our mission is to provide visitors with the information and functionality they need to efficiently accomplish their goal. To that end, we are continually working to add functionality, expand the content, and improve our navigational features. If you are, at any time,

dissatisfied with what you experience, let us know using any of our online feedback forms or email us at marketing@thorlabs.com. Our multidisciplinary marketing team of scientists, programmers, and graphic artists are dedicated to continuous improvement.

541

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses Selection Guide* 7 6 5

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives

Targets and Reticles

Optical Components

Adaptive Optics

1.5 7 6 5

Illumination Sources Light Detection

7 6 5 4 3

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Certified Optical Density (OD)

Alignment Tools

190 nm - 400 nm OD 5+ 576 nm - 600 nm OD 5+ 582 nm - 598 nm OD 6+ 585 nm - 595 nm OD 7+

Page 552

LG14 LG14A LG14B

190 nm - 400 nm OD 5+ 532 nm OD 3+

Page 552

LG13 LG13A LG13B

190 nm - 380 nm OD 5+ 630 nm - 700 nm OD 1.5+

Page 551

LG12 LG12A LG12B

180 nm - 534 nm OD 7+ 720 nm - 730 nm OD 5+ >730 nm - 740 nm OD 6+ >740 nm - 1070 nm OD 7+

Page 551

850 nm - 5200 nm OD 3+ 945 nm - 2300 nm OD 5+ 1010 nm - 1500 nm OD 7+ 2300 nm - 2500 nm OD 4+ 2800 nm - 10.6 µm OD 5+

Page 550

LG11 LG11A

7 6 5

LG10 LG10A LG10B

190 nm - 534 nm OD 7+ 850 nm - 925 nm OD 5+ 925 nm - 1070 nm OD 6+ 960 nm - 1064 nm OD 7+

Page 550

7 6 5

LG9 LG9A LG9B

180 nm - 400 nm OD 6+ 720 nm - 1090 nm OD 5+ 750 nm - 1064 nm OD 7+

Page 549

LG8 LG8A LG8B

610 - 664 nm OD 1+ 665 - <670 nm OD 2+ 670 - 690 nm OD 3+ >690 - 698 nm OD 2+ 735 - 789 nm OD 1+ 790 - <808 nm OD 2+ 808 - 1050 nm OD 3+ >1050 - 1080 nm OD 2+

Page 549

LG7 LG7A LG7B

190 nm - 400 nm OD 6+ 615 nm - 720 nm OD 3+ 651 nm - 670 nm OD 4+ 671 nm - 715 nm OD 5+ 680 nm - 710 nm OD 6+ 690 nm - 700 nm OD 7+

Page 548

LG6 LG6A LG6B

190 nm - 398 nm OD 7+ 9 µm - 11 µm OD 7+

Page 548

LG5 LG5A LG5B

180 nm - 390 nm OD 6+ 785 nm - 830 nm OD 5+ 800 nm - 818 nm OD 6+

Page 547

LG4 LG4A LG4B

190 nm - 400 nm OD 5+ 625 nm - 850 nm OD 4+ 633 nm OD 5+ 662 nm - 835 nm OD 5+

Page 547

LG3 LG3A LG3B

180 nm - 532 nm OD 7+

Page 546

LG2 LG2A LG2B

180 nm - 450 nm OD 6+ 770 nm - 1800 nm OD 2+ 820 nm - 1720 nm OD 3+ 870 nm - 1600 nm OD4+ 940 nm - 1070 nm OD 5+

Page 546

LG1 LG1A LG1B

190 nm - 400 nm OD 5+ 808 nm - 840 nm OD 4+ >840 nm - 950 nm OD 5+ >950 nm - 1080 nm OD 7+ >1080 nm - 1090 nm OD 5+

Page 545

3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 7 6 5 4 3

6 5

5 4

6 5 4 3 2 7 5 4

180 nm

542

LG15 LG15A LG15B

635 nm

1750 nm

Wavelength

11 µm

*The chart shows the certified optical density (OD) of our laser safety glasses. Please consult a laser safety expert prior to purchasing laser safety glasses. The color of the bars represents the color of the lenses in each pair of glasses.

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses Indelibly printed on the laser safety glasses are two sets of numbers: Optical Density (OD) and L-Rating, which are both used to indicate the level of protection provided for specific wavelength ranges. The OD numbers printed on the laser safety glasses can be used to determine if the glasses meet the ANSI Z136 standards of laser safety protection for a given laser product. In addition, the OD can be used to calculate the transmittance (T) of light through the laser safety glasses: Optical Density = Log10 (1/T) or T = 10 -OD

Targets and Reticles

ENGRAVED SYMBOL

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Table 1: Laser Mode Designation LASER MODE

Microscope Objectives

Optical Components

The European EN 207 standard for laser safety glasses requires that the protective eye wear be labeled with the CE mark and that the L-Rating specifications are indelibly printed on the lens. In addition, the lenses and frames must be able to provide the stated level of protection for 10 seconds or 100 pulses depending on the mode of the laser. The L-Rating is composed of 3 components: a wavelength range, a laser mode designation, and a scale number. The wavelength range engraved on the laser safety glasses is given in nanometers and is extremely important since the level of protection provided by the laser safety glasses is wavelength dependent. The laser mode designation is based on the duration of the pulse emitted by the laser. Each Pair of Laser Glasses is Indelibly Printed with OD and L-Rating Numbers Indicating the Level of Protection in Specific Wavelength Ranges.

Optomechanics

PULSE DURATION

Continuous Wave (CW)

>0.25 s

Pulsed Mode

>1 µs - 0.25 s

Giant Pulsed Mode

1 ns - 1 µs

Mode Locked

<1 ns

Lab Supplies

Please Refer to the Official EN 207 Standard

Laser Mode Designation The scale number (Ln) specified is intended to be used in conjunction with the wavelength range and the laser mode designation to determine if the laser safety glasses meet the minimum required level of protection for a given laser (see Table 1 above). If one component of the L-Rating is shared, a plus sign is used to separate multiple wavelength ranges or laser modes and scale numbers in order to save space. In addition, a greater than (>) sign preceding a wavelength range indicates that the mode and scale number ratings for that wavelength range are valid for wavelengths of light greater than the bottom number in the range up to and including the top number in the range. For example, if the glasses were rated as 330 - 370 D L2 and >370 - 500 D L3 then at 370 nm the rating would be D L2 and for all wavelengths greater than 370 nm up to and including 500 nm would be rated at D L3.

Laser Safety for Fiber Optics When working with fiber optics, light emitted directly from the endface of a fiber is diverging. Therefore, as the beam spreads the power density decreases, reducing the danger of eye damage. Table 2 lists the beam area created by light exiting fibers with numerical apertures Table 2: Fiber Beam Divergence (NA) between 0.10 NUMERICAL DIVERGENCE and 0.50. If you BEAM AREAa APERTURE HALF ANGLE know the total 0.10 5.7º 20 mm2 power emitted from 0.15 8.6º 46 mm2 the fiber, you can º 0.20 11.5 83 mm2 calculate the power 0.25 14.4º 133 mm2 density 1" from º 0.30 17.4 199 mm2 the fiber tip and 0.35 20.4º 280 mm2 determine a safe º 0.40 23.5 383 mm2 fiber-tip viewing 0.45 26.7º 512 mm2 distance for your º 0.50 30.0 675 mm2 a These values are specified at 1" from the fiber tip and are rounded down to laser glasses. provide conservative beam areas.

543

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses

Optomechanics

Table 3: European Norm for the Selection of Laser Safety Glasses (EN 207)

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

WAVELENGTH

180 - 315 nm

Optical Components Adaptive Optics

>315 - 1400 nm

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

>1400 - 1000000 nm

LASER MODE

MAXIMUM POWER DENSITY (P) or MAXIMUM ENERGY DENSITY (E)*

MINIMUM SCALE NUMBER (Ln)

1 x 10n-3 W/m2

log10(P)+3

I and R

3 x 10n+1 J/m2

log10(E/3)-1

1 x 10n+10 W/m2

log10(P)-10

1 x 10n+1 W/m2

log10(P)-1

I and R

5 x 10n-3 J/m2

log10(E/5)+3

1.5 x 10n-4 J/m2

log10(E/1.5)+4

1 x 10n+3 W/m2

log10(P)-3

I and R

10n+2

J/m2

1 x 10n+11 W/m2

log10(E)-2 log10(P)-11

This guide is not intended as a substitution for reading and understanding the ANSI Z136, EN 207, or EN 208 Laser Safety Standards. It is only meant to provide an introductory overview to understand the markings on the lenses of the LG series of laser glasses.

Please Refer to the Official EN 207 Standard *n in these equations is equivalent to Ln and represents the scale number.

Table 3 above provides two ways to determine the safe usage limits based on the glasses L-Rating: you can start with the scale number and calculate the maximum safe power density or start with a power density and calculate the minimum safe scale number. This is demonstrated further by the two examples below. Example 1: The LG3 laser safety glasses have an L-Rating line that reads “180 - 315 D LB7 + IR LB4”. So if the LG3 glasses are being used with a 10 µs pulsed 280 nm light source, the table above can be referenced to find that E = 3 x 10n+1 J/m2, where the scale number in this example is LB4 so n = 4. As a result, when the LG3 laser safety glasses are being used in this situation, the maximum power density of the light source should not exceed 3 x 105 J/m2. Example 2: A CW Krypton Ion laser lasing at 647.1 nm has a maximum power density of 2.2 x 104 W/m2. Using the table above, the scale number can be calculated using Ln = log10(P)-1, which results in a rounded up scale number of 4. The LG4 laser safety glasses meet the safety specifications of the European EN 207 standard for this example.

Alignment Rating (EN 208) The LG13 and LG14 glasses are rated for laser alignment applications. This rating allows the lens to transmit a portion of the light for alignment purposes, while attenuating the light to eye-safe power levels in the event of accidental direct exposure to a beam. The rating is given as RB# where # is replaced by the minimum optical density at the specified wavelength or wavelength range (in nm). Along with this RB value is the maximum allowable power and energy of the laser over a Ø7 mm aperture. Power is given for pulses greater than 0.2 ms, while energy is specified for pulses from 1 ns to 0.2 ms. When using a pulsed laser, a correction factor of N1/4 must be multiplied by the maximum energy rating, replacing N with the number of pulses the laser produces in a 10 s interval. Example: The LG14 laser safety glasses have an alignment rating of 1 W 2 x 10-4 J 532 RB3. At 532 nm, the glasses will have an optical density between 3 and 4, correlating to transmission between 0.1% and 0.01%. The maximum power over a Ø7 mm aperture that these glasses can be used with at 532 nm is 1 W, or an energy of 2 x 10-4 J. 544

Laser Glasses Come with a Protective Case, Cleaning Cloth, and Slip-On Neck Strap.

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses Overview Thorlabs offers a variety of laser safety glasses for protection in the 180 nm to 11 μm range. They are available in three different frame styles (shown below) to provide the most comfortable fit for users in a lab environment. Every pair of Thorlabs’ laser glasses is CE certified and ANSI Z136 compliant. The CE certification mark, along with the wavelength ranges and their respective ratings, are indelibly printed on the glasses. See www.thorlabs.com for more information on the CE certification and ratings.

Optomechanics

Features n All

Laser Glasses are CE Certified and ANSI Z136 Compliant n Three Styles that Protect from 180 nm to 11 μm n Storage Case with Neck Strap and Cleaning Cloth are Included

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Style 1: Universal

Style 2: Comfort

Style 3: Sport

n Wear

n Detachable

n Adjustable

Over Prescription Glasses n Top and Side Shield Protection

Prescription

Temples n Comfortable Wrap-Around Fit Over Face

Lens Insert n Side Shield Protection n Green

Lens: 59% Visible Light Transmission (VLT) n Optical Density: 190 - 400 nm OD5+, 808 - 840 nm OD4+, >840 - 950 nm OD5+, >950 - 1080 nm OD7+, >1080 - 1090 nm OD5+ n L-Rating:* 808 - 840 DIRM LB4, >840 - 950 + >1080 - 1090 DIRM LB5, >950 - 1080 D LB6 + IRM LB7

LG1 Universal Style

Our Comfort Style Laser Glasses feature a narrower nose piece, which provides a better fit for customers with low nose bridges.

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

LG1A

4 2

Comfort Style

0 200

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

1100

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG1B Sport Style

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG1

PRICE $ 169.30

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 59% VLT, Universal Style

LG1A

$ 169.30

Laser Glasses, 59% VLT, Comfort Style

LG1B

$ 169.30

Laser Glasses, 59% VLT, Sport Style

545

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses Green Lens: 19% VLT n Optical Density: 180 - 450 nm OD6+, 770 - 1800 nm OD2+, 820 - 1720 nm OD3+, 870 - 1600 nm OD4+, 940 - 1070 nm OD5+ n L-Rating:* 180 - 315 D LB6 + R LB4, >315 - 400 DR LB4, >770 - 820 DIR LB2, >820 - 865 DIR LB3, >865 - 940 DIR LB4, >940 - 1064 DIRM LB5, >1064 - 1400 DIRM LB4, >1400 - 1850 DI LB2 n

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

LG2 Universal Style

Adaptive Optics

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

Illumination Sources

Alignment Tools

Light Detection

LG2A

4 2

Comfort Style

0 200

Laser Safety

400

Lab Supplies

600

800

1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 Wavelength (nm)

2000

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG2B Sport Style

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG2

PRICE $ 179.50

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 19% VLT, Universal Style

LG2A

$ 179.50

Laser Glasses, 19% VLT, Comfort Style

LG2B

$ 179.50

Laser Glasses, 19% VLT, Sport Style

Orange Lens: 48% VLT Optical Density: 180 - 532 nm OD7+ n L-Rating:* 180 - 315 D LB7 + IR LB4, >315 - 532 DIRM LB6 n n

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

LG3 Universal Style

6 4 2 0 200

LG3A Comfort Style

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG3B Sport Style

546

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG3

PRICE $ 147.90

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 48% VLT, Universal Style

LG3A

$ 147.90

Laser Glasses, 48% VLT, Comfort Style

LG3B

$ 147.90

Laser Glasses, 48% VLT, Sport Style

1100

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses Blue Lens: 12% VLT n Optical Density: 190 - 400 nm OD5+, 625 - 850 nm OD4+, 633 nm OD5+, 662 - 835 nm OD5+ n L-Rating:* 180 - 315 D LB7 + R LB3, >315 - 395 D LB5 + R LB6, 625 - 830 DR LB4, 625 - 670 + >800 - 830 I LB4, >670 - 800 I LB5 , >830 - 850 DIR LB3 n

LG4 Universal Style

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics

Illumination Sources

LG4A

Light Detection

Alignment Tools

Comfort Style

0 200

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

1100

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG4B Sport Style

CERTIFIED

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

ITEM # LG4

PRICE $ 158.10

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 12% VLT, Universal Style

LG4A

$ 158.10

Laser Glasses, 12% VLT, Comfort Style

LG4B

$ 158.10

Laser Glasses, 12% VLT, Sport Style

Pink Lens: 61% VLT n Optical Density: 180 - 390 nm OD6+, 785 - 830 nm OD5+, 800 - 818 nm OD6+ n L-Rating:* 180 - 315 D LB6 + R LB4, >315 - 390 D LB4 + R LB6, 785 - 800 + >818 - 830 D LB4 + I LB5, >800 - 818 DR LB5 + IM LB6, 10600 DI LB2 n

LG5 Universal Style

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

6 4 2

LG5A Comfort Style

0 200

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

1100

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG5B Sport Style

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG5

PRICE $ 169.30

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 61% VLT, Universal Style

LG5A

$ 169.30

Laser Glasses, 61% VLT, Comfort Style

LG5B

$ 169.30

Laser Glasses, 61% VLT, Sport Style

547

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses

Optomechanics

Clear Lens: 93% VLT n Optical Density: 190 - 398 nm OD7+, 9 - 11 Âµm OD7+ n L-Rating:* 190 - 315 D LB7 + IR LB4, >315 - 398 DIRM LB5, 9000 - 11000 DI LB3 n

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

LG6

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

Universal Style

Adaptive Optics

8 6 OD

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

4 2

LG6A

0 200

Comfort Style

2000

Laser Safety

4000 6000 Wavelength (nm)

8000

10000

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

Lab Supplies

LG6B

CERTIFIED

Sport Style

ITEM # LG6

PRICE $ 147.90

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 93% VLT, Universal Style

LG6A

$ 147.90

Laser Glasses, 93% VLT, Comfort Style

LG6B

$ 147.90

Laser Glasses, 93% VLT, Sport Style

Teal Lens: 35% VLT n Optical Density: 190 - 400 nm OD6+, 615 - 720 nm OD3+, 651 - 670 nm OD4+, 671 - 715 nm OD5+, 680 - 710 nm OD6+, 690 - 700 nm OD7+ n L-Rating:* 180 - 315 D LB6 + R LB4, >315 - 400 DR LB4, >615 - 660 DIR LB3, >660 - 665 DIR LB4, >665 - 715 D LB4 + IR LB5, 694 IR LB7 n

LG7 Universal Style

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

6 4 2

LG7A Comfort Style

0 200

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG7B Sport Style

548

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG7

PRICE $ 205.00

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 35% VLT, Universal Style

LG7A

$ 205.00

Laser Glasses, 35% VLT, Comfort Style

LG7B

$ 205.00

Laser Glasses, 35% VLT, Sport Style

1100

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses Green Lens: 35% VLT n Optical Density: 610 - 664 nm OD1+, 665 - <670 nm OD2+, 670 - 690 nm OD3+, >690 - 698 nm OD2+, 735 - 789 nm OD1+, 790 - <808 nm OD2+, 808 - 1050 nm OD3+, >1050 - 1080 nm OD2+ n L-Rating: 610 - 664 nm DIR LB1, 665 <670 nm DIR LB2, 670 - 690 nm DIR LB3, >690 - 698 nm DIR LB2, 735 - 789 nm DIR LB1, 790 - <808 nm DIR LB2, 808 - 1050 nm DIR LB3, >1050 - 1080 nm DIR LB2 n

LG8 Universal Style

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

4 2

Sport Style

Adaptive Optics

Laser Safety

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

1100

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

CERTIFIED

Optical Components

Alignment Tools

0 200

LG8B

Targets and Reticles

Light Detection

Comfort Style

Microscope Objectives

Illumination Sources

LG8A

Optomechanics

ITEM # LG8

PRICE $ 205.00

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 35% VLT, Universal Style

LG8A

$ 205.00

Laser Glasses, 35% VLT, Comfort Style

LG8B

$ 205.00

Laser Glasses, 35% VLT, Sport Style

Lab Supplies

Brown Lens: 25% VLT n Optical Density: 180 - 400 nm OD6+, 720 - 1090 nm OD5+, 750 - 1064 nm OD7+ n L-Rating:* 180 - 315 D LB6 + R LB4, >315 - 400 DR LB4, 720 - 725 DM LB5, 720 - 750 + >1064 - 1075 IR LB5, >725 - 1075 DM LB6, >750 - 1064 IRM LB7 n

LG9 Universal Style

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

6 4 2

LG9A Comfort Style

0 200

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

1100

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG9B Sport Style

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG9

PRICE $ 190.70

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 25% VLT, Universal Style

LG9A

$ 190.70

Laser Glasses, 25% VLT, Comfort Style

LG9B

$ 190.70

Laser Glasses, 25% VLT, Sport Style

549

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses

Optomechanics

Amber Lens: 35% VLT n Optical Density:190 - 534 nm OD7+, 850 - 925 nm OD5+, 925 -1070 nm OD6+, 960 - 1064 nm OD7+ n L-Rating:* 180 - 315 D LB7 + R LB4, >315 - 534 D LB5 + IRM LB6, 850 - 925 + >1064 - 1085 DIRM LB5, >925 - 980 D LB5 + IRM LB6, >980 - 1064 D LB6 + IRM LB7 n

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

LG10 Universal Style

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

Adaptive Optics

Illumination Sources

Alignment Tools

Light Detection

4 2

LG10A 0 200

Comfort Style

Laser Safety

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

1100

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

Lab Supplies

LG10B Sport Style

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG10

PRICE $ 190.70

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 35% VLT, Universal Style

LG10A

$ 190.70

Laser Glasses, 35% VLT, Comfort Style

LG10B

$ 190.70

Laser Glasses, 35% VLT, Sport Style

Clear Lens: 75% VLT n Optical Density: 850 - 5200 nm OD3+, 945 - 2300 nm OD5+, 1010 - 1500 nm OD7+, 2300 - 2500 nm OD4+, 2800 nm - 10.6 Âµm OD5+ n L-Rating:* 950 - 1000 DIR LB5, >1000 - 1063 DIR LB6, >1063 - 1400 D LB6 + IRM LB7, >1400 - 1700 DIR LB4, 2100 - 2200 DI LB4, 2900 - 3200 + 10600 DI LB4 n

LG11 Universal Style

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

6 4 2 0 200

600

1000

1400 1800 Wavelength (nm)

2200

2600

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG11A Comfort Style CERTIFIED

ITEM #a PRICE LG11 $ 335.00

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 75% VLT, Universal Style

LG11A

Laser Glasses, 75% VLT, Comfort Style

aOur

550

$ 335.00

Clear Lens Safety Glasses are Not Available in the Sport Style.

3000

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses Brown Lens: 11% VLT n Optical Density: 180 - 534 nm OD7+, 720 - 730 nm OD5+, >730 - 740 nm OD6+, >740 - 1070 nm OD7+ n L-Rating:* 180 - 315 D LB7 + R LB4, >315 - 534 + 730 - 740 D LB5 + IRM LB6, >740 - 1070 D LB6 + IRM LB7 n

LG12 Universal Style

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

Adaptive Optics

Illumination Sources

Light Detection

Alignment Tools

LG12A Comfort Style

0 200

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

1100

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG12B Sport Style

CERTIFIED

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

ITEM # LG12

PRICE $ 305.00

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 11% VLT, Universal Style

LG12A

$ 305.00

Laser Glasses, 11% VLT, Comfort Style

LG12B

$ 305.00

Laser Glasses, 11% VLT, Sport Style

Turquoise Lens: 39% VLT n Optical Density: 190 - 380 nm OD5+, 630 - 700 nm OD1.5+ n L-Rating:* 180 - 315 D LB6 + R LB4, >315 - 395 DR LB4 n Alignment Rating: 0.01 W 2 x 10-6 J 605 - 675 RB1, 0.1 W 2 x 10-5 J >675 - 695 RB2 n

LG13 Universal Style

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

6 4 2

LG13A Comfort Style

0 200

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

1100

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG13B Sport Style

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG13

PRICE $ 147.90

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 39% VLT, Universal Style

LG13A

$ 147.90

Laser Glasses, 39% VLT, Comfort Style

LG13B

$ 147.90

Laser Glasses, 39% VLT, Sport Style

551

Accessories Microscope Components

Laser Safety Glasses

Optomechanics

Pink Lens: 47% VLT n Optical Density: 190 - 400 nm OD5+, 532 nm OD3+ n Alignment Rating:* 1 W 2 x 10-4 J 532 RB3 n

Microscope Objectives

Targets and Reticles Optical Components

*Wavelength given in nm

LG14 Universal Style

Adaptive Optics

8 6 OD

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

4 2

LG14A

0 200

Comfort Style

300

400

Laser Safety

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

1100

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

Lab Supplies

LG14B Sport Style

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG14

PRICE $ 200.00

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 47% VLT, Universal Style

LG14A

$ 200.00

Laser Glasses, 47% VLT, Comfort Style

LG14B

$ 200.00

Laser Glasses, 47% VLT, Sport Style

n P urple

Lens: 15% Visible Light Transmission (VLT) n O ptical Density: 190 - 400 nm OD 5+, 576 - 600 nm OD 5+, 582 - 598 nm OD 6+, 585 - 595 nm OD 7+ n L -Rating:* 180 - 315 nm D LB6 + R LB4, >315 - 395 nm DR LB4, >575 - 600 nm DI LB4, 582 - 598 nm I LB6, 585 595 nm I LB7

LG15 Universal Style

*Wavelength ranges given in nm

6 4 2

LG15A

0 200

Comfort Style

300

400

500

600 700 800 Wavelength (nm)

900

1000

Graph represents nominal filter characteristics.

LG15B Sport Style

552

CERTIFIED

ITEM # LG15

PRICE $ 160.00

DESCRIPTION Laser Glasses, 15% VLT, Universal Style

LG15A

$ 160.00

Laser Glasses, 15% VLT, Comfort Style

LG15B

$ 160.00

Laser Glasses, 15% VLT, Sport Style

1100

Accessories Microscope Components

Beam Traps

Optomechanics

n Minimizes

Scattered Laser Light n ±5° Acceptance Angle n Ø0.433" (Ø11.0 mm) Aperture n 30 mm Cage Compatible n SM05-Threaded (0.535"-40) Aperture

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles M4 (8-32) Tap

5°

Optical Components 40 mm (1.57")

5°

Post Not Included

Bottom 20 mm (0.79")

30 mm Cage Compatible

Front

50 mm (1.97")

5°

ITEM # Wavelength Range

Light Detection

5°

Lab Supplies

BT600

BT610

200 nm to 3.0 µm

400 nm to 2.5 µm

Entrance Aperture

Ø0.433" (Ø11 mm)

Laser Type

Max Average Powera

CW and Pulsed

80 Wb

30 W

Max Average Power Densitya

150 W/cm2

15 W/cm2

Max Energy Densitya

30 mJ/cm2

40 J/cm2 c

Backscatterd

aPerformance varies based on material variability. bThe housing temperature will be >100 °C for inputs cSpecified at 1064 nm, 10 ns, 10 Hz

10-4

d Integrated

9 x 10-5

backscatter based on fraction of power from the incident beam @ 633 nm.

>40 W.

ITEM # BT600

METRIC ITEM # BT600/M

PRICE 229.50

BT610

BT610/M

290.00

Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Side

Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings.

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

107.3 mm (4.22") SM05 Internal Thread (0.535"-40)

25 mm (0.98")

BT600

Beam traps are common laser lab safety devices that are designed to absorb a laser beam’s energy. To use, simply aim a beam into the Ø0.433" (Ø11.0 mm) entrance aperture. The trap has a ±5° acceptance angle to simplify the alignment process.

DESCRIPTION Beam Trap for CW Lasers Beam Trap for Pulsed Lasers

Beam Block n Absorbs

CW Visible Wavelength Beams up to 10 W n Includes 3" (75 mm) Long Ø1/2" Post n Large Target Area: 1.4" x 0.7" (35.6 mm x 17.8 mm) The LB1 Beam Block is a compact solution, capable of absorbing CW laser beams up to 10 W. This beam block has a 1.4" x 0.7" (35.6 mm x 17.8 mm) surface, which allows for larger beams and scattered light to be absorbed. An interchangeable Ø1/2" x 3" (Ø12.7 mm x 75 mm) TR post is included.

LB1

ITEM # LB1

METRIC ITEM # LB1/M

PRICE 48.50

DESCRIPTION 1.4" x 0.7" (35.6 mm x 17.8 mm) Beam Block

553

Accessories Microscope Components

Ø1" Diaphragm Shutters with Controller

Optomechanics

Beam Shutter Features

Microscope Objectives

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

SHB1 Ø1" Diaphragm Shutter with Controller

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

5 Stainless Steel Blades that Open from the Center Large Ø1" Aperture with Internal SM1 (1.035"-40) Threading n Up to 10 Hz Continuous (15 Hz Burst) Operation n Interlock Feature Closes Shutter when Voltage Goes Low n Does Not Require Driver Current when Static n SHB1T Blades are Coated on Both Sides with Low-Reflectivity Teflon n Compact Housing: Ø2.25" x 0.38" (Ø57.2 mm x 9.7 mm) n

INTERLOCK OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS Operating Voltage

12 VDC (Max)

Current

1 A (Max)

Mating Connector

2.5 mm Mono Phono Jack

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSa Operating Frequency Rangeb Minimum Exposure Pulsec Rise Time Fall Time

0 - 15 Hz 28 ms (Typical) 30 ms (Max) 10 ms (Typical) 12 ms (Max) 9 ms (Typical) 11 ms (Max)

Exposure Accuracyd

6 ± 0.5 ms SHB1 Shutter mounted Exposure Reliability < 4 ms to a CCD Camera with SM1A9 Adapter and 1.7 ms (Typical) Jitter Rising Edge ≤10 Hz SM1T2 coupler 4 ms (Max) 1.7 ms (Typical) Jitter Falling Edge ≤10 Hz 4 ms (Max) 4 ms (Typical) Jitter Rising Edge 11 - 15 Hz 8 ms (Max) 4 ms (Typical) Jitter Falling Edge 11 - 15 Hz 8 ms (Max) Jittere

Operating Temperature

Thorlabs’ Diaphragm Optical Beam Shutters are designed for blocking or modulating light propagation to CCD cameras for exposure control, to detectors for saturation protection, or to general optical systems for safety and other applications. The included controller offers both a manual pushbutton control and control via an external +5 V TTL signal. These shutters have internal SM1 (1.035"-40) threading for integration with our SM1 lens tubes; however, they can easily be fit onto C-mount-threaded cameras using our SM1A39 adapter (available on next page), as shown in the photo below. For compatibility with posts and 30 mm cage systems, we offer the SHM1 adapter on the next page.

15 - 40 °C

aUnless otherwise indicated, all specifications were measured at 25 °C. bSpecified for an Operating Temperature of 15 - 40 °C cMeasured using the minimum drive pulse (MDP) of 25 ms measured at dReferenced to the external input drive pulse over a range of 3 to 10 Hz. eMeasured 50 times repeatedly over a range of 3 to 10 Hz

50% open.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Controller External Modulation Input Voltage, TTL AC Line Voltage AC Current

Low: 0 - 0.8 VDC High: 2.0 - 5.0 VDC 100 - 240 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz 0.4 A

Shutter Coil Resistance Controller Drive Type Shutter Drive

Voltagea

Controller Shutter Drive Starting Pulse (at 7 VDC Drive Voltage) Controller Shutter Hold (at 7 VDC Drive Voltage, 20 kHz)

8.5 W ± 2.5% Pulse Width Modulation 7.0 VDC (Typical) 8.0 VDC (Max) 18 ms 45% Duty Cycle

aMaximum voltage defined as 18 ms pulse followed by 20 kHz de-bounce (85% duty cycle) and hold (45% duty cycle).

554

SHB1T with Aperture Opened

SHB1T Shutter Mounted to a 1500M-GE 1.4 Megapixel Scientific CCD Camera (See Pages 312 -313) using an SM1A39 Adapter

Accessories

Ø1" Diaphragm Shutters with Controller Time (Typ.)

Time (Max)

11 ms

13 ms

Rising edge to 100% open

10 ms

12 ms

21 ms

25 ms

15 ms

17 ms

A→C

D→E

Delay from input pulse rising edge to shutter being fully open Delay from fall of input pulse to initialization of shutter closing

E→G

Falling edge to 100% closed

9 ms

11 ms

D→G

Delay from falling input pulse to shutter being fully closed

24 ms

26 ms

I→Db

MDP

25 ms

26 ms

C→Eb

Minimum exposure pulse at the top of the pulse Minimum exposure pulse at 50% of the pulse Minimum exposure pulse at the bottom of the pulse

19 ms

21 ms

28 ms

30 ms

35 ms

37 ms

I→C

B→Fb A→Gb

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives

0 C

Open

letters refer to the points shown on the image to the right. b Minimum Drive Pulse (MDP): These measurements use the MDP, which is the minimum pulse to drive the minimum open time (I→D).

Optical Components

Adaptive Optics

SHB1T Teflon Coating Reflectance

0.20

aThe

Targets and Reticles

SHB1 / SHB1T Shutter Response

Reflectance (%)

I→A

Description Delay between input pulse riding edge and initialization of shutter opening

5V External Modulation Input Pulse

SHUTTER TIMING SPECIFICATIONS Diagram Keya

Microscope Components

Illumination Sources

0.15

Light Detection

0.10 0.05 0.00 250

Alignment Tools 500

1000 1500 Wavelength (nm)

2000

2500

UNPROTECTED MODE SPECIFICATIONSa

PROTECTED MODE SPECIFICATIONSa Operating Frequency, Continuous

10 Hz (Max)

Operating Frequency, 30 Minutes

11 - 13 Hz (Max)

Operating Frequency, 10 Minutes

14 - 15 Hz (Max)

a In

Operating Frequency, Continuous

15 Hz (Max)

aIn

protected mode, the shutter will shut down if run for too long at frequencies between 10 and 15 Hz to protect it from overheating.

unprotected mode, the shutter will continue to operate at frequencies between 10 and 15 Hz even if the time limit is exceeded. This mode is designed for users who actively mitigate the heat within a system containing the shutter. The operating temperature range of the shutter is 15 °C to 40 °C. Operation of the shutter outside of this range may lead to shutter damage.

ITEM # SHB1

PRICE 850.00

SHB1T

900.00

Ø1" Low-Reflectivity Diaphragm Optical Beam Shutter with Controller

SM1A39

20.00

Thread Adapter: External C-Mount Threads and External SM1 Threads

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

DESCRIPTION Ø1" Stainless Steel Diaphragm Optical Beam Shutter with Controller

Post and Cage Mount Adapter for Ø1" Diaphragm Optical Beam Shutters The SHM1 Post Mounting Adapter is designed to make our SHB1 and SHB1T diaphragm shutters compatible with Ø1/2" posts and 30 mm cage systems (for more details on these products, visit our website at www.thorlabs.com). The adapter features a double bore that accepts the outer diameter of either shutter, with a notch that allows the controller cord to pass freely, as shown in the photograph below.

SHM1

The top of the adapter has a 5/64" hex nylon-tipped setscrew for mounting with three points of contact. Alternatively, the shutter can be secured to the adapter with 2-56 screws (not included) using the three tapped holes in the face of the adapter; this option is ideal for vibration-sensitive applications. ER3

ITEM # SHM1

METRIC ITEM # SHM1/M

PRICE $ 69.00

DESCRIPTION Post Mounting Adapter for SHB1 Optical Beam Shutter

Cage Rod

555

Accessories Microscope Components Optomechanics

Beam Shutters SH05

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Post Assembly Not Included

Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Our SH05 and SH1 Beam Shutters utilize rotary, electro-mechanical actuators to provide millisecond shutter operation. In general operation, the shutter remains in a closed position and then opens with a pulse control signal. As long as the control voltage to the shutter remains high, the shutter will stay open; however, if the voltage drops, the shutter will close, providing inherent “fail-safe” operation. An optical sensor detects the shutter blade position in the housing to confirm the state of the shutter position, making it ideal in applications where a laser safety lockout is required.

SH1

Thorlabs offers two compatible controllers for Features use with the SH05 and SH1 beam shutters. Both have an "interlock" mode incorporated n Closed Resting State (Zero Drive Current) into the control logic of the controller. Our n Fast Close Time SC10 controller (see page 558) can be operated • 4.08 ms (SH05) using the LCD front panel, using an external • 10 ms (SH1) trigger through the BNC input, or remotely n SM05-Threaded (0.535"-40) or SM1-Threaded via computer control through the RS-232 port. (1.035"-40) Aperture (Model Dependent) The TSC001 solenoid controller (see page 559) n Ideal for Laser Safety Applications can be externally triggered via the SMA input n Passive Closure Mechanism or synchronized with other T-cube equipment n Compatible with the SC10 and TSC001 (available on our website). Both beam shutters Controllers (See Page 558 and 559, Respectively) come with a 10' (3 m) long cable to connect them directly to either our SC10 or TSC001 controllers. While the rate at SH1(/M) ITEM # SH05 which the shutter is opened Shutter Activation Time to Open 3.0 ms (Typical 20 V Pulse) 10 ms (Typical 20 V Pulse) can be controlled using these Shutter Activation Time to Close 4.08 ms (Spring Activated) 10 ms (Spring Activated) Actuation Pulse 8 V to 50 V (Time Dependent) 10 V to 75 V (Time Dependent) controllers, these shutters are not Holding Voltage 8 V to 12 V 8 V to 15 V meant for precise timing purposes. Aperture Ø1/2" Ø1.0" These shutters are also compatible Initial State Normally Closed Normally Closed with third-party controllers. Maximum Pulse Rate 10 Hz Steady, 25 Hz Burst 12.5 Hz Steady, 16.6 Hz Burst Duty Cycle

Optimum @ 10 Hz = 40%

Optimum @ 8 Hz = 50%

Beam Shutter Specifications (When Not Using Thorlabs’ SC10 Controller) ITEM #

SH05

SH1(/M)

Solenoid Coil Resistance

28 W

31.84 W

MAX SOLENOID POWER (20 °C) Steady State

Included Plug & Play Cable is Compatible with our SC10 & TSC001 Shutter Controllers

556

4 W @ Continuous

9 W @ Continuous

50% Duty Cycle

8 W @ 100 s

18 W @ 100 s

25% Duty Cycle

16 W @ 36 s

36 W @ 36 s

5% Duty Cycle

80 W @ 2.5 s

180 W @ 2.8 s 15 VDC (Holding) 75 VDC (Pulse)

Maximum Applied Solenoid Voltage*

12 VDC (Holding) 50 VDC (Pulse)

*To protect the unit from heat, Thorlabs recommends applying an actuation pulse followed by a holding voltage. To keep the unit open for a long period of time, the holding voltage must be within the specified range to prevent overheating. Applying an actuation voltage that is too low may open the shutter; however other timing specifications cannot be guaranteed.

Accessories Microscope Components

Beam Shutters MOP

Typical Driving Pulse (External or Internal) TTL

TD/R Open

Shutter Response

Optomechanics

SHUTTER TIMING SPECIFICATIONS*

TO MSOP

ITEM #

SH05

SH1

8.0 ms

10 ms

3.0 ms

10 ms

TD/R

13.0 ms

20 ms

4.08 ms

10 ms

MOP

10 ms

40 ms

MSOP

27.0 ms

40 ms

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components

*See Below for Timing Definitions

Adaptive Optics TIMING DIAGRAM DEFINITIONS (SEE FIGURE ABOVE) TI

Illumination Sources

Transfer Initialize: the time delay between the application of the energizing voltage and the initial movement of the shutter

Transfer Open: the time for the shutter to move from 20% open to 80% open

TD/R

Transfer Dwell/Release: the delay between the removal of the energizing voltage and the initial closing movement of the shutter

Light Detection

Transfer Close: the time for the shutter to move from 80% open to 20% open

MOP

Minimum Open Pulse: minimum pulse width supplied by the SC10 controller

MSOP

Minimum Shutter Open Time: the minimum time the shutter can be opened for using the minimum open pulse (MOP) from the SC10 controller

Our beam shutters are compatible with a wide variety of Thorlabs’ optomechanical components for easy integration into an experiment. Both the input and output apertures of the SH05 and SH1 are threaded with Thorlabs’ SM05 (0.535"-40) or SM1 (1.035"-40) thread, respectively, which allows them to be used with all of our SM05 and SM1 lens tubes (available on our website).

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

For post mounting, the SH05 has three M6 x 0.5 tapped holes. To enable compatibility with our imperial and metric Ø1/2" posts, three adapters are provided to convert the internal M6 threading to internal 8-32 as well as three adapters for conversion to internal M4. In contrast, the SH1 has four 8-32 tapped holes, while the SH1/M features M4-tapped holes for direct compatibility with metric Ø1/2" posts. In addition to these lens tube and post mounting features, the aperture of the SH1(/M) is also surrounded by four, 4-40 holes on both sides for compatibility with our 30 mm cage systems. ITEM # SH05 SH1

METRIC ITEM # — SH1/M

PRICE 438.00

585.00

The SH1 is Compatible with Both SM1 Lens Tubes and 30 mm Cage Systems

DESCRIPTION Ø1/2" Aperture Beam Shutter (Controller Not Included) Ø1" Aperture Beam Shutter (Controller Not Included)

Beam Shutter Controller Options n Safety

Alarm when Coupled with SH05 or SH1 Beam Shutter n Local Operation or SC10 Remote Control via LabVIEW, LabWindows, or BNC n Input and Output External Trigger Control See Page 558

n T-Cube

Solenoid Controller for the SH05 or SH1 Beam Shutters n Compact 60 mm x 47 mm x 60 mm Footprint n Software Compatible with Other apt™ Controllers

TSC001

See Page 559 557

Benchtop Controller for Beam Shutters Features n Automatic,

Single, Manual, Repeat, and External Gate Operation n LCD Front Panel with Dedicated Shutter Status Indicators n Safety Alarm when Coupled with SH05 and SH1 Beam Shutters n Interlock and Keyswitch Provide Multiple Layers of Safety n Input and Output Triggers n Remote PC Control, LabWindows™, and LabVIEW™ Interfaces

SC10

SPECIFICATIONS

The SC10 Shutter Controller is a versatile instrument designed to control either the SH05 or the SH1 beam shutter with millisecond accuracy. The front panel of the controller features an LED that displays the status of the shutter at a glance and an interactive LCD that provides access to the control parameters. Computer control is provided through a digital I/O, RS232 port on the back of the unit, as well as a BNC connector for a 5 V external trigger.

558

Minimum Exposure Time

10 ms

Accuracy

0.2 ms 1 ms to 999.999 s

Maximum Steady State Power

Hold Voltage Range

9 V to 11.8 V

Shutter Voltage Output

24 VDC Drive Pulse (10 VDC Hold Voltage)

Typical Transfer Time

1 ms

Power Compatibility Dimension (L x W x H)

100 - 240 VAC; U.S. Power Cord Included 11.5" x 5.3" x 3.0" (292 mm x 135 mm x 76 mm)

The SC10 has three basic user interfaces: control from the front panel, control from a PC, and direct control from an external trigger event. It can also double as a stand-alone digital delay generator with 1 ms resolution, 0.1 ms accuracy, and a TTL output trigger.

SC10 Benchtop Controller with the SH1 Beam Shutter

PRICE $ 689.00

25 Hz

On/Off Times

The unit incorporates a laser safety interlock feature that will override all system commands and close the shutter. If tripped, the unit must be re-enabled to resume operation.

ITEM # SC10

Maximum Exposure Rate

This shutter controller comes with an executable software package written in LabWindows™. The libraries and function panel are included. In addition, a library that contains VI’s for LabVIEW™ applications is included.

DESCRIPTION Shutter Controller, 100 - 240 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz @ 110 mA

Accessories Microscope Components

T-Cube Solenoid Controller for Beam Shutters

Optomechanics

Features n Operates

Thorlabs’ SH05 and SH1 Beam Shutters n Smaller Footprint than SC10 Controller n Automatic, Single, Manual, and Triggered Operating Modes n Manual or PC-Controlled Operation via USB n Input/Output Triggering (Daisy Chaining) n Easy-to-Use Manual Controls via ‘Mode’ and ‘Enable’ Buttons

n Safety

Enable Key Switch n Laser Safety Interlock Jack n Software Control Suite Included, Extensive ActiveX® Programming Interfaces n Software Compatible with Other apt™ Controllers (Integrated Systems Development)

n Timing

n Solenoid

Resolution: 250 µs n On/Off Times: 100 ms to 10 s n Maximum Repetition Rate: Up to 10 Hz n SMA Trigger In/Out: TTL n Output Enable: Key Switch and Interlock Jack Plug

$ 175.00

TCH002 $ 726.90

Light Detection

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Input Power Requirements n Voltage:

15 V Regulated DC n Current: 1 A Peak, 300 mA Steady State

General

User-Controlled On/Off n Single: DSP-Controlled Single On/Off Cycle n Auto: DSP-Controlled Multiple On/Off Cycles n Triggered: Externally Triggered On/Off

TPS008

Illumination Sources

Drive: 15 V Pulse (10 V Hold) n Position Sensor Feedback: Photodiode

Operating Modes

TPS001 $ 25.00

Adaptive Optics

Designed to operate 15 V solenoid-actuated devices, this mini controller’s embedded software functionality allows it to control solenoid devices manually (using panel buttons), automatically with DSP-timed operation, or via external trigger signals for operation with third-party equipment. An SMA trigger out connection enables multiple T-Cube controllers to be connected together for multi-channel ‘synchronized’ operation.

Output (6-Pin Hirose)

PRICE $ 545.00

Optical Components

Alignment Tools

Specifications

ITEM # TSC001

Targets and Reticles

TSC001

For applications where the SH05 and SH1 shutters do not need to be operated at their maximum operating parameters, the TSC001 T-Cube Solenoid Controller can be used. At less than a third as long and half as wide as the SC10 controller, this option is an extremely compact, single-channel controller for solenoid-operated shutters, flipper mounts, and other such devices.

n Manual:

Microscope Objectives

n Housing

Dimensions (W x D x H): 60.3 mm x 60.3 mm x 47.5 mm (2.37" x 2.37" x 1.87") n Weight: 160 g (5.5 oz)

DESCRIPTION T-Cube Flipper/Shutter Controller (Power Supply Not Included) 15 V Power Supply Unit for a Single T-Cube Controller 15 V Power Supply Unit for up to Eight T-Cube Controllers T-Cube Controller Hub and Power Supply for up to Six T-Cube Controllers

559

Accessories Microscope Components

Liquid Crystal Optical Beam Shutter

Optomechanics

Features

Microscope Objectives

n Wavelength

Range: 420 - 700 nm Crystal Optical Shutter and Variable Attenuator Modes n High Average Transmittance (>60%) and Contrast Ratio (8000:1) Over Operating Wavelength Range n Fast Shutter Switching Speeds (Shutter Mode) • Opening: 5 ms • Closing: 1 ms n Vibration-Free Device with No Moving Parts n Post Mountable via 8-32 (M4) Taps n 30 mm Cage System Compatible n SM1 (1.035"-40) Threaded for Compatibility with Ø1" Lens Tubes n Liquid

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection

LCC1620

Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Thorlabs’ Liquid Crystal (LC) Optical Shutter incorporates a liquid crystal cell sandwiched between polarizing elements that is used to quickly change the transmission by either blocking or attenuating light in the 420 to 700 nm range. This optical shutter provides rapid and vibrationless (i.e., no moving parts) control over the transmission of light through the device, making it ideal for imaging and precision illumination applications.

SPECIFICATIONS Operating Wavelength Range

420 - 700 nm

Transmissiona (Shutter Mode, Avg.)

>60%

Contrast Ratiob (Avg.)

>8000:1 Opening: 5 ms (Typical) Closing: 1 ms (Typical)

Switching Speed (in Shutter Mode) Operating Frequency Rangec

0 - 50 Hz

Incidence Angle

±5º (Max) CW: 1 W/cm2 Pulsed: 0.4 J/cm2 (532 nm, 10 ns, 10 Hz, Ø0.750 mm)

Laser Damage Threshold

A switch on the top of the housing allows the user to Clear Aperture Ø20 mm select the shutter or attenuator mode. In shutter mode, Surface Quality 40-20 Scratch-Dig the LCC1620 acts similarly to a mechanical shutter, Wavefront Distortion ≤l/4 @ 633 nm opening in 5 ms and closing in 1 ms. As seen in the left Operating Temperature 15 to 60 ºC graph below, the contrast ratio between the open and 60 mm x 27 mm x 60 mm closed states is on average >8000:1 over the 420 - 700 nm Dimension (L x W x H) (2.36" x 1.06" x 2.36") a For linearly polarized light with the axis of polarization aligned to the transmission axis of the shutter operating range. In attenuator mode, the device behaves bAverage contrast ratio over the specified wavelength range cIn shutter mode with a 0 - 5 V TTL input from the EXT port as a variable attenuator (attenuation levels shown in the right graph below); the attenuation level can be set using the knob on the top of the unit. External control of these modes though the SMC connector is possible by using a 0 - 5 V TTL signal in shutter mode or a 0 – 5 V DC signal in attenuator mode.

10 0 400

10000 1000 100 Transmission Contrast Ratio 450

500

550

600

650

700

750

1 800

Wavelength (nm) Shaded Region Indicates the Operating Wavelength Range of the Beam Shutter

560

Transmission (%)

50 40 30 20

Attenuation 100000

Contrast Ratio

Transmission (%)

Transmission and Contrast Ratio 100 90 80 70 60

100 90 80 70 60

0V 3V

1V 4V

2V 5V

50 40 30 20 10 0 350

400

450

500

550

600

650

Wavelength (nm)

700

750

800

Accessories Microscope Components

Liquid Crystal Optical Beam Shutter

Optomechanics

SHUTTER TIME SPECIFICATIONS

5V External Modulation Input Pulse 0

Diagram Keya

90% 10%

Open Shutter Response Close

90% F

B C

10%

D E

The above diagram shows the timing of a TTL pulse (top) and the corresponding liquid crystal shutter’s response (bottom). See the table to the right for timing definitions.

Microscope Objectives

Description

Time (Typ.)b

A→B

Delay between input pulse’s rise to 90% and shutter closing to 90%

0.65 ms

B→C

Shutter closing from 90% to 10%

0.346 ms

A→C

Delay between input pulse’s rise to 90% and shutter initiation to 10%

0.416 ms

Optical Components

D→E

Delay between input pulse’s falling and shutter opening to 10%

2.23 ms

Adaptive Optics

E→F

Shutter opening from 10% to 90%

3.24 ms

D→F

Delay between the input pulse’s falling to 10% and shutter opening to 90%

5.47 ms

aThe letters refer to the points shown on the image to the left. bAll values are specified at 25 °C. For timing at higher temperatures,

manual available at www.thorlabs.com.

please see the

Targets and Reticles

Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools

The LC optical beam shutter is capable of achieving switching and modulation speeds that are significantly faster than either our single-blade mechanical shutters (featured on pages 556 - 557) or diaphragm shutters (featured on pages 554 - 555). However, due to the wavelength limitations of the liquid crystal cells, for applications above 700 nm or below 420 nm, we recommend using the mechanical shutters instead.

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Because the LC shutter is made from liquid crystal cells and polarizers, it is not sensitive to the direction of propagation and may be used in either direction. Each face is engraved with a white line that indicates the polarization axis for the device. For maximum transmission, the input beam should be linearly polarized and aligned with the polarization axis of the shutter. Although the shutter is compatible with unpolarized light, the total transmission will be greatly reduced by the polarizers inside the device. Therefore, we recommend using mechanical shutters in applications requiring unpolarized light to avoid this reduction in transmitted light.

LCC1620 Optical Shutter Mounted to a 1500M-GE-TE 1.4 Megapixel Scientific CCD Camera (See Pages 312 -313) using an SM1A39 Adapter (See Page 555)

Long-Term Stability

The front and back faces of the housing are SM1 (1.035"-40) threaded, which is ideal for mounting filters or Ø1" lens tubes to the housing. Additionally, four 4-40 tapped holes on the front and back faces ensure compatibility with Thorlabs’ 30 mm cage system. These shutters are post mountable via one of two 8-32 (M4) tapped holes on the sides of the housing.

Normalized Transmission (%)

100 99 98 97 96 95

Time (Hours) ITEM # LCC1620

METRIC ITEM # LCC1620/M

PRICE 920.00

DESCRIPTION Liquid Crystal Shutter, Ø20 mm, 420 - 700 nm, 8-32 (M4) Taps

561

Accessories Microscope Components

Black Rubberized Fabric n Not Intended for use in Laser Curtain ÂApplications n Double Layer Recommended for Extremely Sensitive Applications n Custom Lengths Available

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

Black rubberized fabric provides an easy method for protecting lightsensitive equipment. The rubberized coating prevents light from penetrating through the weave of the fabric.

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

ITEM # BK5

BK5

PRICE $ 46.00

DESCRIPTION* 5' (W) x 9' (L) x 0.005" (1.5 m x 2.7 m x 0.12 mm)

*For longer lengths, add $15.00 per additional yard, and request a quotation from tech support.

Black Hardboard This material is a heavy-duty construction board consisting of a dense foam core sandwiched between two plastic-coated cardboard outer layers with a thickness of 5 mm. The material can be easily cut with a utility knife for construction of lightweight boxes. We recommend using our 2" wide black masking tape (see page 565) for corners and other joints to eliminate the passage of light through those areas. Custom sizes are also available upon request. Multilayer Rugged Construction Board n Dense, Durable, and Moisture Resistant n Hard, Smooth Finish n Lightweight Polystyrene Foam Core n Custom Sizes Available

Dense, Lightweight Foam Core

ITEM # TB4

PRICE $ 60.90

TB4

Plastic-Coated Cardboard Outer Layer

DESCRIPTION 3 Sheets, 24" x 24" (610 mm x 610 mm), 5 mm Thick

Have you seen our...

Optical Enclosures Thorlabsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; optical enclosures provide protection for instruments or optical setups from environmental factors such as temperature, light, and acoustic vibrations. They are constructed from our 25 mm rails and feature panels made from black hardboard or plexiglass.

Visit www.thorlabs.com for Details 562

Accessories

Black Poster Board

Application Idea 1/16" (1.6 mm) Thick Solid Black Board n Build Light-Tight Boxes n Score and Fold n Thick Outer Skin Holds Scored Poster Board Together n

TB5

ITEM # TB5

PRICE 44.00

Lightly Score Along White Lines

DESCRIPTION 5 Sheets, 20" x 30" (508 mm x 762 mm)

Black, Flocked, Self-Adhesive Paper

Microscope Components Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety

Solution for Eliminating Stray Light n Self Adhesive n

n Does

Not Shed Dust or Lint n Do Not Cut the BFP1 with a Laser Cutting Tool

Image contrast can suffer when stray light reaches the focal plane of an application where the light path travels through a tube or other enclosed area. Although applying a flat, black paint to the inside may help, a textured, matte, black surface is much more effective. For large angles of incidence, this flocked, self-adhesive ITEM # BFP1

PRICE 28.40

Lab Supplies

paper absorbs virtually 100% of the light that strikes it. In addition, the fibers will not shed dust or lint, unlike some velvet and felt materials. When compressed, this flocked paper is approximately 0.015" (0.381 mm) thick with the backing and 0.012" (0.305 mm) thick without the backing.

DESCRIPTION 1 Sheet, Black Flocked Paper 30" x 30" (762 mm x 762 mm) Sheet

Black Aluminum Foil n Ideal

for Masking Light Leaks Unwanted Reflections n High Flexibility and Lightweight n Corrosion and Abrasion Resistant n For Use with a Wide Range of Radiation Sources (Including X-Ray, UV, etc.) n Nominal Thickness:â&#x20AC;&#x2C6;0.002" (50 Âľm) n Eliminate

BKF12

This black foil material is mainly used to block out light. It has a matte black finish to absorb any reflective light from an ambient or conventional light source. The foil is ideal for masking light leaks and/or eliminating unwanted reflections. ITEM # BKF12

PRICE 28.50

It can be quickly molded to form blackout covers, dark rooms, laser channels, or other configurations. Lightweight, yet durable, it can be quickly positioned in place with tape, staples, or adhesives.

DESCRIPTION 1' x 50' (305 mm x 15.2 m) Black Aluminum Foil

563

Accessories Microscope Components

Aluminum Laser Safety Screens

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles

The aluminum is bead blasted prior to anodization to create a homogeneously diffusive surface. With walls just 0.08" (2 mm) thick and bases that are 0.79" (20 mm) wide, these compact, lightweight screens are easily integrated into a laser setup.

Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Anodized Aluminum Barriers n Flat and Curved Profiles for Tailored Shielding n Available in Three Sizes (See Table Below) Thorlabs offers curved and straight aluminum laser safety screens to prevent stray or unwanted light from entering or exiting an experimental setup.

TPS4

Optical Components

n Bead-Blasted

TPS7

The base of each screen contains several slotted mounting holes for 1/4"-20 (M6) cap screws that are each 2" (50.8 mm) long, providing flexible mounting options. The TPS4 and TPS8 screens additionally contain a centered through hole designed for 8-32 or M4 cap screws, allowing them to be mounted to a post as shown to the right. Our safety screens may be used for temporary laser beam blocking purposes, but for permanent solutions, please see our comprehensive family of beam dumps and traps (see page 553).

Slots for Breadboard Mounting Using 1/4"-20 or M6 Screws

TPS4 and TPS8 Screens Can be Post Mounted

MOUNTING HOLESa DESCRIPTION 2 Slotted + 1 Through Laser Safety Screen, 8" x 6" (203 mm x 152 mm)

ITEM # TPS4

PRICE $ 37.50

TPS5

55.50

2 Slotted

TPS6

89.00

4 Slotted

Laser Safety Screen, 24" x 12" (610 mm x 305 mm)

TPS8

50.00

2 Slotted + 1 Through

Curved Laser Safety Screen, 8" x 6" (203 mm x 152 mm)

TPS7

65.00

2 Slotted

Curved Laser Safety Screen, 12" x 12" (305 mm x 305 mm)

TPS9

95.00

4 Slotted

Curved Laser Safety Screen, 24" x 12" (610 mm x 305 mm)

aSlotted

Laser Safety Screen, 12" x 12" (305 mm x 305 mm)

mounting holes are compatible with 1/4"-20 or M6 cap screws, while the through hole only accommodates an 8-32 or M4 cap screw.

Have you seen our...

Multiphoton Microscope Light Boxes Thorlabs offers custom light boxes that are designed for use with our Bergamo II multiphoton microscopes. They feature sliding front doors for easy access to the microscope and samples, as well as magnetic, easily removable side panels. Each light box has adjustable port holes that are suitable for passing through cables or light sources such as lasers. For applications sensitive to electric fields, the light boxes can also act as Faraday cages.

Contact ImagingSales@thorlabs.com for More Information 564

Accessories Microscope Components

Black Masking Tapes

Optomechanics

These black masking tapes are offered for any applications that require blackout conditions. We offer a standard- and high-performance paper-based black masking tape along with a black aluminum foil masking tape. The standard black masking tape is for general applications, while the high-performance tape is recommended for applications requiring minimal light. For total blackout conditions or high-power applications, we recommend the non-reflective, flame-retardant aluminum tape. For sample laser transmission values, please see the table below.

Microscope Objectives

High-Performance Black Masking Tape

Black Masking Tape

Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

T137-1.0

T743-2.0

T205-2.0

Incident Power

T137-2.0 (Masking Tape)

CPS180 (635 nm)

1.07 mW (100%)

HRS015 (632.991 nm)

1.41 mW (100%)

LDM850 (850 nm)

20.34 mW (100%)

T743-2.0 (High-Performance Masking Tape)

T205-2.0 (Aluminum Foil Tape)

1.34 µW (0.13%)

0.90 µW (0.08%)

Zero (0%)

3.36 µW (0.24%)

0.012 µW (<0.01%)

Zero (0%)

28.74 µW (0.14%)

1.04 µW (<0.01%)

0.0006 µW (<1 x 10-5%)

ITEM # T137-1.0

PRICE 8.90

DESCRIPTION Black Masking Tape, 1" x 180' (25 mm x 55 m) Roll

T137-2.0

14.90

Black Masking Tape, 2" x 180' (50 mm x 55 m) Roll

T743-1.0

18.50

High-Performance Black Masking Tape, 1" x 180' (25 mm x 55 m) Roll

T743-2.0

36.90

High-Performance Black Masking Tape, 2" x 180' (50 mm x 55 m) Roll

T205-1.0

28.00

AT205 Black Aluminum Foil Tape 1" x 81' (25 mm x 25 m) Roll

T205-2.0

54.00

AT205 Black Aluminum Foil Tape 2" x 81' (50 mm x 25 m) Roll

Light Detection Alignment Tools

MEASURED POWER (% TRANSMITTANCE) LASER ITEM # (WAVELENGTH)

Targets and Reticles

Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Visit... www.thorlabs.com For additional hex keys and balldrivers

Tool Kit n Available

in Imperial and Metric Sizes

n All

Sizes Labeled in a Convenient Stand

TC3/M Metric hex kit includes 6 balldrivers and 9 hex keys

n Essential

for Every Lab TC2

Imperial hex kit includes 9 balldrivers and 11 hex keys

These balldriver tool kits, available in both imperial and metric versions, offer a wide range of the most commonly used balldriver and hex wrench sizes (see table below for details), all organized in a convenient stand. The precisionmachined stand has discrete locations for each balldriver and hex wrench; labels are provided next to the slots for easy identification. The wide base provides stability and easy placement anywhere on an optical table. ITEM # PRICE TC2 $ 88.30

DESCRIPTION 20-Piece Imperial Balldriver and Hex Kit with Stand

HEX KEY AND BALLDRIVER SIZES Hex Keys: 0.028", 0.035", 0.050", 1/16", 5/64", 3/32", 7/64", 1/8", 9/64", 5/32", 3/16" Balldrivers: 0.050", 1/16", 5/64", 3/32", 7/64", 1/8", 9/64", 5/32", 3/16"

TC3/M $ 84.10

15-Piece Metric Balldriver and Hex Kit with Stand

Hex Keys: 0.7 mm, 0.9 mm, 1.3 mm, 1.5 mm, 2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm Balldrivers: 1.5 mm, 2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm

565

Accessories Microscope Components

Lens Tissues

Optomechanics

n Soft,

Microscope Objectives Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources Light Detection Alignment Tools Laser Safety Lab Supplies

Premium-Grade Sheets n Approximate Sheet Dimensions: 4.9" x 2.9" (124 mm x 73 mm) These tissues can be used to clean optics or to protect an optic prior to placing it in a storage container. Tissues are free from contaminants and adhesives. ITEM # MC-5

PRICE 9.80

MC-50E

78.00

MC-5 MC-50E

5 Lens Tissue Booklets

50 Lens Tissue Booklets DESCRIPTION Lens Tissues, 25 Sheets per Booklet, 5 Booklets Lens Tissues, 25 Sheets per Booklet, 50 Booklets in a Closable Box

Duster with Integrated Nozzle Dusting gas is commonly used to clear particles off of an optic. This non-contact cleaning method is suitable for a variety of optics and consists of a trigger valve on a 10 oz can of Tetrafluoroethane (ozone safe). Ground Shipment Required on Aerosol Cans ITEM # CA3

PRICE 12.00

CA3

Stocked in USA, Germany, and Japan

DESCRIPTION Duster with Plastic Nozzle

Fiber Patch Cable Inspection Scope Inspect Fiber Patch Cables Ends for Dirt, Damage, or Polish Quality n Coaxial or Oblique Illumination Modes for Optimum Image Contrast n White LED Illumination n LED Lifetime: 100,000 Hours n 190 mm (7.48") Long x Ø45 mm (Ø1.77") n Fine Focus Control Wheel n Built-In IR Filter n Two AAA Batteries are Included n

FS200

Universal Adapter for FC, ST, SC, and APC Connectors

View of a Ø105 µm Core Multimode Fiber with the FS200

The FS200 Fiber Inspection Scope is ideal for inspecting fiber patch cables ends for dirt, damage, or polish quality. With a high-intensity illumination system, 200X magnification, and ~Ø600 μm field of view, this microscope is powerful enough to offer a clear image of the fiber core as well as the surrounding cladding. An oblique illumination setting is also available, which provides illumination at an off-center angle to the fiber endface. We strongly recommend this fiber inspection scope for any critical examination of polish quality.

FS200-LC

The FS200 includes adapters for FC-/ST-/SC-/APC- (Ø2.5 mm Ferrules) and SMAterminated (Ø3 mm Ferrules) fibers. An LC adapter is available for Ø1.25 mm ferrules.

Adapter for Ø1.25 mm Ferrules

566

Adapter for SMA Connectors (Included with FS200)

ITEM # FS200

PRICE 202.00

FS200-LC

28.00

DESCRIPTION Fiber Microscope LC Adapter for FS200 Fiber Inspection Scope

Accessories

Fiber Bulkhead and Connector Cleaning

FBC1 Fiber Cleaner Being Used to Clean the Bulkhead of a Fiber Coupled Laser Source

Thorlabs offers an assortment of fiber optic cleaning products for use with bare fiber, connectors, and bulkheads. Recommended cleaning procedures for many of these products may be found at www.thorlabs.com.

Another option is to use the FCS3 solvent with the LFW90 Lint-Free Wipes. The 2" x 4" wipes come in a mini tub containing 90 wipes.

Targets and Reticles Optical Components Adaptive Optics Illumination Sources

FCC-7020

FCC-7020 Being Used to Clean a Fiber End

Universal Fiber Connector Cleaner

Light Detection Alignment Tools

The FCC-7020 Universal Fiber Connector Cleaner is the third option for cleaning fiber connectors. This cloth reel comes in a protective case and features a rubber pad under the cleaning surface to prevent MCC25 scratching. Connector

Laser Safety

FCS3

Cleaning Sticks

Cleaning Bare Fiber:

Optomechanics Microscope Objectives

Cleaning Fiber Bulkheads and Fiber Connectors: Three options are available for cleaning fiber connectors. The FBC1 One-Step Bulkhead and Connector Cleaner contains a dry cleaning thread that eliminates the need for solvents. With over 525 cleanings per unit, it quickly cleans FC/PC, ST, and SC connectors and bulkheads by simply pushing the cleaner against the bulkhead or connector.

Microscope Components

Lab Supplies

Fiber Cleaning Fluid

For cleaning bare fiber, the FCS3 Cleaning Solvent can be applied with LFW90 Lint-Free Wipes or using MCC25 Connector Cleaning Sticks.

LFW90 2" x 4" Lint-Free Wipes, 90 Sheets per Tub

General Fiber Cleaning Supplies: For customers who prefer to use their own solvents in the cleaning process, we offer the BD8 One-Touch Pump dispenser. The bottle is ideal for many solvents, including acetone, propanol, turpentine, and water. Eighteen pre-labeled and two blank self-adhesive labels are included.

BD8 One-Touch Pump Dispenser for Solvents

Kimwipes are low-lint, 4.5" x 8.4" wipes ideal for many cleaning purposes, including cleaning connectors between polishing steps and bare fiber during preparation. ITEM # FBC1

PRICE 84.66

FCS3

16.73

Fiber Cleaning Fluid

FCC-7020

19.28

Universal Fiber Connector Cleaner, 20' Spool

FCC-7021

6.32

Replacement Cleaning Reel for FCC-7020, 20' Spool

MCC25

25.50

Connector Cleaning Sticks (50 per Pack)

LFW90

10.10

Lint-Free Wipes (90 Sheets per Tub)

BD8

19.80

8 oz One-Touch Pump Dispenser

KW32

44.60

Kimwipes, 280 Kimwipes per Box, 12 Boxes per Case

KW32 Low-Lint Kimwipes

DESCRIPTION One-Step Fiber Connector Cleaner, 525 Cleanings Per Unit

Have you seen our...

Fiber Patch Cables

Thorlabsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; extensive line of patch cables and connectors includes standard and custom lengths with FC/PC, FC/APC, or SMA connectors.

Visit www.thorlabs.com for Details 567